FCC ID: T8GNTG6NQEM Automotive head unit to be installed in cars with the following features FM AM DAB USB Bluetooth WLAN and GNSS

 

A-Class Owner's Manual Mercedes-Benz Symbols In this Owner's Manual, you will find the follow ing symbols:

& DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices Warning notices draw your attention to haz ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.

# Please observe the warning notices in this Owner's Manual.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe envi ronmental notes Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behaviour or environmentally responsible disposal.

# Observe environmental notes.

* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged.

# Observe notes on material damage.

% Useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you. Instruction X

(Q page) Further information on a topic Display Information in the multifunction dis play/multimedia display

+ Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system Corresponding submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia sys tem Marks a cause

R equipment R technical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus trations. The following are integral parts of the vehicle:

R Digital Owner's Manual R Printed Owner's Manual R Service Booklet R Equipment-dependent Supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner. Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Man ual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to:

R model R order R national version R availability The illustrations in this manual show a left-hand drive vehicle. On right-hand drive vehicles, the layout of components and controls differs accordingly. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehi cles to the state of the art. Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas:

R design 1775844400Z102 1775844400Z102 2 Contents At a glance .................................................... 6 Overview of the cockpit .................................. 6 Overview of warning and indicator lamps ....... 8 Overview of the overhead control panel ....... 12 Overview of the door control panel and seat adjustment ............................................ 14 Overview of emergencies and breakdowns ... 16 Digital Owner's Manual ............................. 18 Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual .......... 18 General notes ............................................. 20 Protection of the environment ...................... 20 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles ................... 20 Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ....................... 21 Owner's Manual ........................................... 22 Operating safety ........................................... 22 Declaration of Conformity ............................ 23 Diagnostics connection ................................ 25 Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 25 Vehicle registration ....................................... 26 Correct use of the vehicle ............................ 26 Implied warranty ........................................... 26 QR code for rescue card ............................... 26 Vehicle data storage ..................................... 27 Copyright ...................................................... 29 Occupant safety ......................................... 30 Restraint system ........................................... 30 Seat belts ..................................................... 32 Airbags ......................................................... 37 PRE-SAFE system ....................................... 44 Children in the vehicle .................................. 45 Notes on pets in the vehicle ......................... 62 Opening and closing .................................. 64 Key ............................................................... 64 Doors ............................................................ 68 Load compartment ....................................... 73 Side windows ................................................ 75 Sliding sunroof .............................................. 78 Anti-theft protection ..................................... 83 Seats and stowing ..................................... 86 Notes on the correct driver's seat position ... 86 Seats ............................................................ 87 Steering wheel .............................................. 94 Using the memory function .......................... 97 Stowage areas .............................................. 98 Cup holders ................................................ 108 Ashtray and cigarette lighter ....................... 110 Sockets ....................................................... 111 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial ....... 113 Fitting/removing the floor mats .................. 115 Light and sight .......................................... 116 Exterior lighting ........................................... 116 Interior lighting ........................................... 124 Changing bulbs (only for vehicles with halogen headlamps) .................................... 125 Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system ............................................ 127 Mirrors ........................................................ 131 Operating the sun visors ............................. 134 Climate control ........................................ 135 Overview of climate control systems .......... 135 Operating the climate control system ......... 136 Driving and parking ................................. 140 Driving ........................................................ 140 DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ 149 Automatic transmission .............................. 150 Refuelling .................................................... 154 Parking ....................................................... 160 Driving and driving safety systems ............. 168 Trailer hitch ................................................. 221 Bicycle rack function .................................. 224 Vehicle towing instructions ......................... 226 Instrument Display and on-board computer .................................................. 227 Instrument display overview ....................... 227 Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel .......................................................... 228 Operating the on-board computer .............. 229 Setting the multifunction display ................ 230 Overview of displays on the multifunc tion display ................................................. 231 Adjusting the instrument lighting ............... 232 Menus and submenus ................................ 232 Head-up Display ......................................... 239 LINGUATRONIC ......................................... 240 Notes on operating safety ........................... 240 Operation ................................................... 240 Using LINGUATRONIC effectively ................ 243 Essential voice commands .......................... 243 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) .. 256 Overview and operation .............................. 256 System settings .......................................... 281 Navigation ................................................... 291 Telephone ................................................... 327 Online and Internet functions ..................... 352 Media .......................................................... 361 Radio .......................................................... 368 Sound ......................................................... 371 Maintenance and care ............................. 374 ASSYST PLUS service interval display ......... 374 Engine compartment .................................. 375 Cleaning and care ....................................... 381 Breakdown assistance ............................ 388 Emergency .................................................. 388 Contents 3 Flat tyre ...................................................... 390 Battery (vehicle) ......................................... 395 Tow-starting or towing away ....................... 400 Electrical fuses ........................................... 404 Wheels and tyres ..................................... 408 Notes on noise or unusual handling char acteristics ................................................... 408 Regular checking of wheels and tyres ........ 408 Notes on snow chains ................................ 409 Tyre pressure .............................................. 409 Wheel change ............................................. 418 Emergency spare wheel .............................. 427 Technical data .......................................... 429 Notes on technical data .............................. 429 On-board electronics .................................. 429 Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number ............................................ 431 Operating fluids .......................................... 433 Vehicle data ................................................ 440 Trailer hitch ................................................. 441 4 Contents Display messages and warning/indi cator lamps .............................................. 443 Display messages ....................................... 443 Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 496 Index .......................................................... 513 6 At a glance Overview of the cockpit Left-hand drive vehicles At a glance Overview of the cockpit 7 8 PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamps M Adjusts the steering wheel 1 Steering wheel gearshift paddles 2 Combination switch 3 DIRECT SELECT lever 4 Start/stop button 5 Multimedia system display 6 Climate control systems 7 Hazard warning lights 9 Glove box A Stowage compartment B Cup holder C Control knob D Calls up navigation E Calls up the radio Calls up media Switches the sound and volume on and off Switches the multimedia system on and off 152 118 150 141 259 136 119 41 100 99 108 256 256 291 369 364 F Calls up the telephone G Calls up favourites H Calls up vehicle functions I Active Parking Assist J DYNAMIC SELECT switch K Control elements for the multimedia system L Control panel for the multimedia system N Control panel for:

On-board computer Operating cruise control or the variable limiter Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC O Diagnostics connection P Unlocks the bonnet Q Electric parking brake R Light switch 328 271 263 207 149 259 228 94 228 181 184 25 376 165 116 8 At a glance Overview of warning and indicator lamps Standard cockpit At a glance Overview of warning and indicator lamps 9 1 ! ABS malfunctioning 2 #! Turn signal light 3 h Tyre pressure monitoring system 4 Speedometer 5 Multifunction display 6 # Electrical fault 7 Distance warning 8 J Brakes (red) 9 J Brakes (yellow) A ! Electric parking brake applied (red) B ! Electric parking brake (yellow) C % Diesel engine: preglow D ; Engine diagnostics 498 118 511 227 231 508 505 498 498 498 498 508 E ESP OFF ESP F 6 Restraint system G R Rear fog light H K Main beam L Dipped beam T Standing lights I Fuel level display J Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location indicator K Power-assisted steering malfunctioning L Seat belt not fastened M j Trailer hitch not operational 498 498 31 117 118 116 116 508 506 504 506 10 At a glance Overview of warning and indicator lamps Widescreen cockpit 1 Speedometer 2 #! Turn signal light 3 j Trailer hitch not operational 4 Multifunction display 5 6 Restraint system 6 Rev counter 7 ESP OFF ESP 8 R Rear fog light 9 K Main beam L Dipped beam T Standing lights A ? Coolant too hot/cold B Coolant temperature display C ! Electric parking brake (yellow) At a glance Overview of warning and indicator lamps 11 D J Brakes (yellow) E # Electrical fault F Distance warning G ! ABS malfunctioning H Power-assisted steering malfunctioning I h Tyre pressure monitoring system J % Diesel engine: preglow K Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap location indicator L Fuel level display M ! Electric parking brake applied (red) N Seat belt not fastened O J Brakes (red) P ; Engine diagnostics 498 508 505 498 506 511 508 498 504 498 508 227 118 506 231 31 227 498 498 117 118 116 116 508 227 498 12 At a glance Overview of the overhead control panel At a glance Overview of the overhead control panel 13 1 Sun visors 2 p Switches the left-hand reading lamp 7 Service call button (Mercedes me connect) 8 SOS emergency call system (Mercedes-Benz emergency call system) 3 | Switches the automatic lighting control 124 9 3 Opens/closes the panoramic sliding sun roof 4 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off Opens/closes the roller sunblinds 5 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 6 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp A Spectacles compartment B Inside rearview mirror 134 124 124 124 124 on/off on/off on/off 346 346 78 78 100 132 14 At a glance Overview of the door control panel and seat adjustment 1 Using the memory function 2 Adjusts the seats electrically 3 Switches the seat heater on/off 4 Switches the seat ventilation on/off 5 & % Locks/unlocks the vehicle 6 Opens the door 7 Operates the outside mirrors At a glance Overview of the door control panel and seat adjustment 15 B W Opens/closes the rear left side window C W Opens/closes the left side window D Adjusts the head restraints E Seat adjustment using the multimedia system F Adjusts the seat backrest inclination G Adjusts the seat height 131 H Adjusts the seat cushion inclination 97 90 93 94 69 69 75 75 62 75 75 90 92 89 89 89 89 89 8 W Opens/closes the right side window I Sets the seat fore-and-aft adjustment 9 W Opens/closes the rear right side window J Adjusts the seat cushion length A Override feature for the rear side windows 16 At a glance Overview of emergencies and breakdowns At a glance Overview of emergencies and breakdowns 17 What to do in the event of an accident 9 Flat tyre 3 Buttons for the SOS emergency call system and 1 Safety vests 2 Fire extinguisher breakdown assistance 4 Hazard warning lights 5 Glove box 6 Starting assistance 7 Checking and topping up operating fluids 8 Tow-starting and towing away A QR codes for accessing the rescue card B Tow-starting and towing away C Warning triangle D TIREFIT kit E First-aid kit (soft sided) F Fuel filler flap with instruction labels for tyre pressure, fuel type and QR codes for accessing the rescue card 388 389 346 119 100 397 433 401 390 26 401 388 391 389 154 18 Digital Owner's Manual Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual Multimedia system:

, Vehicle info . Owner's Manual Alternatively, you have the following possibilities:

R LINGUATRONIC: call up the Digital Owner's Manual via the voice control system R Multifunction display: call up brief informa tion from the Digital Owner's Manual as mes sages in the multifunction display (also dur ing the journey) R Context introduction: open the correspond ing context in the Digital Owner's Manual by pressing the menu path input of the multime dia system R Animations: watch animations of selected vehicle functions. R Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the multifunction dis play. R Bookmarks: receive access to your person ally saved bookmarks. R Language: select the language for the Digital Owner's Manual.

% A function from the multimedia system can also be called up from the Digital Owner's Manual using the context introduction . The Digital Owner's Manual describes the func tion and operation of:

R the vehicle R the multimedia system For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated while driving.

# Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Owner's Manual:

R Search: search for keywords, in order to find quick answers to questions about the opera tion of the vehicle. R Quick start: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle. R Tips: find the first steps towards setting up your vehicle. 1 Back 2 Add bookmarks 3 Picture 4 Contents section 5 Menu Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual, e.g. warning notes, can be opened and closed.

% The Owner's Manual can also be found in the Mercedes-Benz Guides App in all common App Stores. Digital Owner's Manual 19 20 General notes Protection of the environment

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style The pollutant emission of your vehicle is directly related to the way you operate your vehicle. You can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally-

responsible manner. Please observe the fol lowing recommendations on operating condi tions and personal driving style. Operating conditions:

# make sure that the tyre pressure is cor rect.

# do not carry any unnecessary weight

(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them).

# adhere to the service intervals. a regularly serviced vehicle will contrib ute to environmental protection.

# always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style:

# do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.

# do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary.

# drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.

# avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.

# change gear in good time and use each gear only up to of its maximum engine speed.

# switch off the engine in stationary traf fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function.

# drive fuel-efficiently. Take-back of end-of-life vehicles EU countries only:

Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) End-

of-Life Vehicles Directive. A network of vehicle take-back points and dis mantlers has been established for you to return your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these points free of charge. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving resources. For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-

back conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz website for your country. Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by not using recycled reconditioned components Daimler AG offers recycled reconditioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the implied warranty is valid as for new parts.

# Use recycled reconditioned compo nents and parts from Daimler AG.

* NOTE Impairment of the operating effi ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessories or from repairs or welding Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle:

R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Centre console

# Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas.

# Do not carry out repairs or welding.

# Have accessories retrofitted at a quali fied specialist workshop. You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal function. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conver sion parts and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model for General notes 21 their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independ ently approved by a testing centre. Certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehi cle's general operating permit. This is the case in the following situations:

R A change of the vehicle type from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted. R If other road users could be endangered. R If the exhaust gas or noise levels are adversely affected. Always specify the vehicle identification number

(VIN) ( page 431) when ordering Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts. 22 General notes Owner's Manual This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of this Owner's Manual going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fit ted with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illus trations. The original purchase contract documentation for your vehicle contains a list of all of the sys tems in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre. The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Operating safety

& WARNING Risk of accident due to mal functions or system failures If you do not have the prescribed service/

maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures.

# Always have the prescribed service/

maintenance work as well any required repairs carried out at a qualified spe cialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic component parts Modification to electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked com ponent parts. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function properly and/or jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

# Never tamper with the wiring and elec tronic component parts or their soft ware.

# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you modify the car electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid.

& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system.

# When driving on unpaved roads or off-

road, regularly check the vehicle under side.

# Remove trapped plants or other flam mable material, in particular.

# If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle Damage to the vehicle may occur in the fol lowing cases:

R the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road. R the vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pot hole. R a heavy object strikes the underbody or chassis components. In situations such as this, the body, the underbody, chassis components, wheels or tyres could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. If the underbody panelling is damaged, flam mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody panelling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts on the exhaust system.

# Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. or

# If driving safety is impaired while con tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten tion to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist workshop. Declaration of Conformity Electromagnetic compatibility The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regu lation ECE-R 10. General notes 23 Wireless vehicle components The following information applies to all compo nents of the vehicle and the information systems and communication devices integrated into the vehicle which receive and/or transmit radio waves:

The components of this vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with the basic requirements and all other relevant conditions of Directive 2014/53/EU. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Jack Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

EC declaration of conformity 1. The signatory, as a representative Manufacturer:

BRANO a.s. 74741 Hradec nad Moravic, Opavsk 1000, 24 General notes Czech Republic ID No.: 64-387-5933 VAT Reg. No.: CZ64-387-5933 declares, as our sole responsibility, that the product:

2. a) Description:

Jack Type, number:

A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18 B) A 240 580 00 18 C) A 639 580 02 18 Manufacture year: 2015 Fulfils all relevant conditions Directive No. 2006/42/EC b) Description and purpose of use:

The jack is only intended for raising the specified vehicle in accordance with the operating instruc tions affixed to the jack. 3. Reference data of the harmonised standards or specifications A) ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, DBL 7382.20, MBN 10435, AS 2693 B) ISO 4063, ISO 14341-A, DBL 7392.10, MBN 10435 C) DBL 7392.10, DBL 8230.10 The technical documentation of the product is stored at the manufacturer's plant. Representa tive for the compilation of the technical docu mentation: Director of the Technical Department Brano a.s. 4. Hradec nad Moravic City 5. 05.05.2015 Date Signed by Director of Quality TIREFIT kit Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

EC declaration of conformity In accordance with EC Directive 2006/42/EC We hereby declare that the product Product designation: Daimler electric air pump Model designation: 0851ve, DT/UW 200046 MB part no.: A 000 583 8200 complies with the following relevant regulations:

2004/108/EC Applied harmonised standards, in particular:

DIN EN 55014-1 DIN EN 55014-2:2009-06 Manufacturer: Dunlop Tech GmbH Address: Birkenhainerstrasse 77, 63450 Hanau, Germany Authorised representative: IMS dept. Date: June 2015 Signature: IMS-AM, IMS-AE-L Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic devices at a quali fied specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to con necting devices to the diagnostics con nection If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehi cle could be affected.

# Only connect equipment to a diagnos tics connection in the vehicle which is approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-

Benz.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

* NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery.

# Check the charge level of the battery.

# If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance. General notes 25 Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor mation being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the neces sary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety. Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop:

R work relevant to safety R service and maintenance work R repair work R modifications as well as installations and conversions R work on electronic components 26 General notes MercedesBenz recommends a MercedesBenz service centre. ship. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre, for example. Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehi cles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehi cle checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registra tion data. It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases:

R if your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer. R if your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz service centre. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle owner Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. When using the vehicle, observe the following information:

R the safety notes in this manual R technical data for the vehicle R traffic rules and regulations R laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Implied warranty

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instruc tions. Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola tion of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

# Follow the instructions in these operat ing instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehi cle damage. QR code for rescue card The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card con tains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at http://

www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. General notes 27 Vehicle data storage Information from electronic control units Electronic control units are fitted in your vehicle. Some of these are necessary for the safe opera tion of your vehicle, while some assist you when driving (driver assistance systems). In addition, your vehicle provides convenience and entertain ment functions, which are also made possible by electronic control units. Electronic control units contain data memories which can temporarily or permanently store technical information about the vehicle's operat ing state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or faults. In general, this information documents the state of a component part, a module, a system or the surroundings such as:

R operating statuses of system components

(e.g. fluid levels, battery status, tyre pres sure) R status messages concerning the vehicle and its individual components (e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration, lat eral acceleration, display of the fastened seat belts) R malfunctions or defects in important system components (e.g. lights, brakes) R information on vehicle damage events R system reactions in special driving situations

(e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of sta bility control systems) R ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain sensor) In addition to providing the actual control unit function, this data assists the manufacturer in detecting and rectifying faults and optimising vehicle functions. The majority of this data is temporary and is only processed in the vehicle itself. Only a small portion of the data is stored in the event or fault memory. When your vehicle is serviced, technical data from the vehicle can be read out by service net work employees or third parties. Services include repair services, maintenance processes, warranty events and quality assurance meas ures, for example. The read out is performed via the legally prescribed port for OBD ("on-board diagnostics") in the vehicle. The respective service network locations or third parties col lect, process and use the data. They document technical statuses of the vehicle, assist in find ing faults and improving quality and are trans mitted to the manufacturer, if necessary. Fur thermore, the manufacturer is subject to prod uct liability. For this, the manufacturer requires technical data from vehicles. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet as part of repair or maintenance work. They can enter data into the vehicle's conveni ence and infotainment functions themselves as part of the selected equipment. This includes, for example:

R multimedia data, such as music, films or pho tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system R address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an inte grated navigation system R entered navigation destinations R data about the use of Internet services 28 General notes This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle. If this data is stored in the vehi cle, you can delete it at any time. This data can only be transmitted to third parties upon your request with particular regard to the scope of use of online services according to your selected settings. You can store or change convenience settings/

individualisations in the vehicle at any time. Depending on the equipment, this includes, for example:

R settings of the seat positions R suspension and climate control settings R individualisation such as interior lighting If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can control them via the control elements integrated in your vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain infor mation is simultaneously transmitted to your smartphone. Depending on the respective integration type, this includes, for example:

R general vehicle data R position data This enables the use of selected smartphone Apps, e.g. navigation or music playback. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. Which type of further data processing occurs is determined by the provider of the specific app used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your smartphone. Service providers Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connec tion, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wire less network connection is enabled via the vehi cle's transmission and reception unit or via con nected mobile end devices (e.g. smartphones). Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online serv ices and applications/Apps provided by the manufacturer or other providers. Manufacturer's services The manufacturer describes the respective func tions and corresponding legal data protection information when suitable for the manufacturer's online services. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data is exchanged via a secure connection, e.g. to the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Personal data is collected, processed and used via the provision of services exclusively on the basis of legal permissions or with prior consent. The services and functions (sometimes subject to a fee) can usually be activated or deactivated. In some cases, this also applies to the entire vehicle's data connection. This excludes, in par ticular, legally prescribed functions and services. Third party services If it is possible to use online services from other providers, these services are subject to the data protection and terms of use of the responsible General notes 29 provider. The manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged. Please enquire, therefore, about the type, scope and purpose of the collection and use of per sonal data as part of third party services from their respective provider. Copyright Information on free and open-source software licences for your vehicle's software can be found on the data storage medium in your vehicle document wallet and on the Internet together with updates at:

http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource 30 Occupant safety Restraint system Protection by the restraint system The restraint system includes the following:

R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi cle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, seat belt tensioners and/or airbags supplement the protection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Seat belt tensioners and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident. In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu pant must observe the following information:

R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos sible. R Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. However, no system available today can com pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying. Reduced restraint system protection

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from modifications to the restraint system The restraint system can no longer function correctly after alterations have been made. The restraint system may then not protect the vehicle occupants as intended by failing in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for example

# Never alter the parts of the restraint system.

# Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their software. If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom modate a person with disabilities, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use driving aids which have been approved specifi cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Restraint system functionality When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint sys tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional. Malfunctioning restraint system A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys tem if:

R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on. R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint sys tem If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be trig gered unintentionally or might not be trig gered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe cialist workshop. Function of the restraint system in an acci dent How the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated:

R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Only for certain countries: rollover Occupant safety 31 The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-

emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the colli sion. Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred cannot play a deci sive role in airbag deployment, nor do they pro vide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, for exam ple, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle deceleration. 32 Occupant safety The components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other:

before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger front airbag is correct

( page 41) ( page 41). Component Seat belt tensioners Driver's airbag, front passenger front air bag Detected deploy ment situation Frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover1) Frontal impact Knee airbag Frontal impact Side impact airbag Side impact Window airbag Side impact, roll over1), frontal impact 1) Only for certain countries. The front passenger front airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both

& WARNING Rick of burns from hot airbag components The airbag parts are hot after an airbag has been deployed.

# Do not touch the airbag parts.

# Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, partic ularly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an airbag deployed. If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an air bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released:

R The bang will not generally affect your hear ing. R In general, the powder released is not haz ardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly.

# Always ensure that all vehicle occu pants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Always observe the instructions about the cor rect driver's seat position and adjusting the seat

( page 86). In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro vide the intended level of protection, each vehi cle occupant must observe the following infor mation:

R The seat belt must not be twisted and must fit tightly and snugly across the body. R The seat belt must be routed across the centre of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. R The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. R Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoul der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin ted, abrasive or fragile objects. R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Never allow babies and chil dren to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads

( page 98). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat. If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on

"Children in the vehicle" ( page 45). Occupant safety 33 Reduced seat belt protection

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam ple.

# Adjust the seat properly before begin ning your journey.

# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoul der. 34 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller build Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable addi tional restraint system. If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly.

# Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in a suitable restraint system.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations:

R If the seat belts are damaged, modified, extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R If the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty R If the seat belt tensioners, seat belt anchorages or seat belt retractors have been modified Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible, e.g. due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified seat belt tensioners could acciden tally trigger or fail to function as intended.

# Never modify the seat belts, seat belt tensioners, seat belt anchorages or seat belt retractors.

# Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean.

# Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tension ers Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protec tive function.

# Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners immediately replaced at a qualified specialist work shop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident.

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.

# Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted. Fastening seat belts If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can not be pulled out any further. Occupant safety 35 vate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia system. Vehicles with automatic front passenger front airbag deactivation system:

* NOTE Deployment of the seat belt ten sioner and side impact airbag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front passenger seat, the seat belt tensioner and the side impact airbag may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other sys tems.

# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Vehicles without automatic front passenger front airbag deactivation system:

# Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor responding seat. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: if the front seat belt is not pulled tight across your body, the seat belt adjustment may automatically apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deacti Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger The seat belt warning lamp in the instru ment display is a reminder that all vehicle occu pants must wear their seat belts correctly. In addition, an acoustic warning tone may sound. As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. Function of the rear seat belt status display The rear seat belt status display is only available for certain countries. The rear seat belt status display informs you which rear seat belt is not fastened. You can immediately dismiss the rear seat belt status display using the back button on the left-

hand side of the steering wheel ( page 229). If a vehicle occupant unfastens a seat belt in the rear while the vehicle is motion, the rear seat belt status display is displayed again. In addition, an acoustic warning tone may sound. In this case, the rear seat belt status display cannot be hidden using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. 36 Occupant safety

* NOTE Deployment of the seat belt ten sioner when the front passenger seat is unoccupied If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front passenger seat, the seat belt tensioner may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems.

# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Releasing a seat belt

# Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue. Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Vehicle

# Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment. Airbags Overview of airbags 1 Knee airbag 2 Driver's airbag 3 Front passenger front airbag 4 Window airbag 5 Side impact airbag The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. When activated, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Potential protection from each airbag:

AIRBAG Potential protection for Knee airbag Thigh, knee and lower leg Driver's airbag, front passenger front airbag Head and ribcage Window airbag Head Side impact air bag Thorax and pelvis The front passenger front airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger front airbag is correct

( page 41) ( page 41). Occupant safety 37

* NOTE Important points to remember if the front passenger seat is unoccupied In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if:

R There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat. R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.

# Stow objects in a suitable place.

# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Protection by the airbags Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection offered by a cor rectly fastened seat belt. 38 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended pro tective function and deployment may even cause further injuries. To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all vehicle occupants:

R Have their seat belt fastened correctly, including pregnant women. R Are seated properly and keep as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information.

# Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant. To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information:

R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the informa tion on the correct driver's seat position

( page 86). R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. R Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. R Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deploy ment area of the airbag. R If children are travelling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes ( page 45). R Always stow and secure objects correctly. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the follow ing:

R There are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessory parts, such as cup holders, attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on doors, side windows or side panelling. R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. Reduced airbag protection

& WARNING Risk of injury from modifica tions to the airbag cover If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can no lon ger function correctly.

# Never modify an airbag cover and do not affix objects to it. The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol ( page 37).

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre vent the deployment of the airbags integra ted into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the operation of the auto matic front passenger airbag shutoff could be restricted.

# You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the correspond ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc tions of the sensors in the door panelling Sensors to control the airbags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not per formed correctly to the doors or door panel ling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do.

# Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.

# Always have work on the doors or door panelling carried out at a qualified spe cialist workshop. Occupant safety 39

& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro tection and cannot provide the intended pro tective function in the event of an accident.

# Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced. Have deployed airbags replaced immediately. Status of the front passenger airbags Function of the automatic front passenger front airbag deactivation system The automatic front passenger front airbag deac tivation system is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint system. The front passenger front airbag is enabled or disabled accordingly. 40 Occupant safety When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, always make sure of the follow ing:

R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi tioned correctly ( page 53). R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. R Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. R Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust ment. R The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. R The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. R The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina tion and the head restraint setting accord ingly.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect the func tion of the automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff. This could result in the front passenger front airbag not functioning as intended during an accident.

# Do not place any objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system.

# The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.

# The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possi ble, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.

# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information:

R Fasten seat belts correctly ( page 32). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos sible. Otherwise, the front passenger front airbag may be disabled by mistake, for example in the fol lowing situations:

R The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the sitting sur face.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to deactivated front passenger airbag If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front passenger airbag is disa bled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ( page 41)

( page 41). Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica tor lamps A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:

R The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. R The person is seated correctly.

# Ensure, both before and during the jour ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas sification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place after the front passenger front airbag deactivation system self-test. The status of the front passenger front airbag is displayed. Occupant safety 41 Self-test of the automatic front passenger front airbag deactivation system When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously. The status of the front passenger front airbag is displayed after the self-test:

R PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front passenger front airbag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. R PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continu ously: the front passenger front airbag is dis abled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger front airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp 42 Occupant safety light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta tus of the front passenger front airbag is correct for the current situation. After fitting a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat:

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continu ously.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from using a rearward-facing child restraint system when the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. Always ensure that the front passenger air bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 52). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do not fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat. Instead, fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat. After fitting a forward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat: depend ing on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. Always observe the fol lowing information.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forward-

facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and you position the front passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could:

R come into contact with parts of the vehi cle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

# Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet on the vehicle to the shoul der belt guide on the child restraint sys tem. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the front passenger seat accordingly.

# Always observe the child restraint sys tem manufacturer's installation instruc tions. When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 52). If a person is sitting in the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con tinuously or be off, depending on the person's stature. A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information:

R If the front passenger seat is occupied with an adult or a person with a stature corre sponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger front air bag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person with a build corresponding to that of an adult should not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp either lights up continuously or remains off, depending on the result of the classification.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off: move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or a person of smaller stature should use a rear seat. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: a person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat.

Occupant safety 43

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front passenger airbag can not perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the front passenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:

R The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. 44 Occupant safety R The person is seated properly with a cor rectly fastened seat belt. R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. Further related subjects:

R Child restraint system on the front passenger R Suitable positioning of the child restraint sys seat ( page 51). tem ( page 53). PRE-SAFE system PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protec tion) PRE-SAFE is able to detect certain critical driv ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas ures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE can implement the following meas ures independently of each other:

R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the

# If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, sliding sunroof. R Vehicles with memory function: moving the front passenger seat to a more favoura ble seat position. R PRE-SAFE Sound: provided that the multi media system is switched on, generates a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro tective mechanism of a person's hearing.

* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat The automatic adjustment of the seat posi tion may result in damage to the seat and/or the object.

# Stow objects in a suitable place. If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings your self. move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases. Function of PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) PRE-SAFE PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact. PRE-SAFE PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other:

R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a higher flashing frequency. is stationary. This brake application is cancel led automatically when the vehicle pulls away. Reversing the PRE-SAFE system measures R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. System limitations The system will not initiate any action in the fol lowing situations:

R when reversing R when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there is a risk of a rear impact The system will not initiate any braking applica tion in the following situations:

R whilst driving or or R when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist Children in the vehicle Notes on the safe transportation of children

"Digital Vehicle Key in the smartphone"

function is activated via the Mercedes me connect web app. Occupant safety 45

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehi cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

R Releasing the parking brake. R Shifting the automatic transmission out of park position j or shifting manual transmission into idle position. R Starting the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip ment and become trapped.

# Never leave children and animals unat tended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key sticker and mobile phones if the

& WARNING This poses an increased risk of death due to heat stroke or exposure to cold in the vehicle If persons particularly children experi ence prolonged exposure to extremely high or low temperatures, this poses a risk of injury or even fatal injury.

# Never leave anyone particularly chil dren unattended in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns on these parts, particularly on metallic parts of the child restraint system. 46 Occupant safety

# Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight.

# Protect it with a blanket, for example.

# If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 1.50 m in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information:

R Only secure children using a child restraint system which is appropriate to the height, age and weight of the child and suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Be sure to observe the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system. R Always fit a child restraint system to a rear seat if possible. R Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems:

the seat belt system the ISOFIX or i-Size mounting brackets the Top Tether anchorages R The manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system. R The warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by incorrect installation of the child restraint system If the child restraint system is incorrectly installed on a suitable seating position, it cannot perform its intended protective func tion. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change of direction.

# Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.

# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.

# Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cush ions.

# Always use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them.

# Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle If the child restraint system is not correctly installed or secured, it could release in the event of an accident, sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants.

# Always fit child restraint systems cor rectly, even when not in use.

# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems Child restraint systems or their retaining sys tems that have been subjected to a load in an accident may then not be able to perform their intended protective function. The child cannot be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change of direction.

# Always replace child restraint systems immediately that have been damaged or involved in an accident.

# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.

% Use Mercedes-Benz care products recom mended by Mercedes-Benz to clean child restraint systems. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist work shop. The following notes must be observed:

R When fitting a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the information on fit ting a child restraint system on the front passenger seat ( page 51). R Notes on attaching suitable child restraint systems ( page 53). R Notes on recommended child restraint sys tems ( page 59). R Instructions and safety notes on the auto matic front passenger front airbag shutoff

( page 39). R Safety notes on the seat belt ( page 32). R Information on the correct use of the seat belt ( page 35). Occupant safety 47 ISOFIX and i-Size child seat securing systems Information on the ISOFIX and i-Size child seat securing systems

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury if the child secured weighs more than the permissible gross weight for an ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system For ISOFIX or iSize child restraint systems in which the child is secured using the seat belt integrated in the child restraint system, the permissible gross weight of the child and child restraint system is 33 kg. If the child and the child restraint system together weigh more than 33 kg, the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system with integra ted seat belt does not offer sufficient protec tion. Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example.

# If the child and the child restraint sys tem together weigh more than 33 kg, only use an ISOFIX or iSize child with ECE R44, iSize child restraint systems are approved in accordance with ECE R129. Only child restraint systems that have been approved in accordance with ECE R44 may be attached to ISOFIX mounting brackets. The following child restraint systems can be attached to i-Size mounting brackets:

R ISOFIX child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with ECE R44 R iSize child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with ECE R129 48 Occupant safety restraint system with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt.

# Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system:

R in the manufacturer's installation and operat ing instructions for the child restraint system used R on a label on the child restraint system, if present Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When using a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as its correct use and the suitability of the seats for attaching a child restraint system. ISOFIX and i-Size are standardised securing sys tems for special restraint systems. ISOFIX child restraint systems are approved in accordance 1 Symbol for fitting an ISOFIX child restraint 2 Symbol for fitting an i-Size child restraint system system Fitting ISOFIX and i-Size child seat securing systems

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury if the child secured weighs more than the permissible gross weight for an ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system For ISOFIX or iSize child restraint systems in which the child is secured using the seat belt integrated in the child restraint system, the permissible gross weight of the child and child restraint system is 33 kg. If the child and the child restraint system together weigh more than 33 kg, the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system with integra ted seat belt does not offer sufficient protec tion. Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX or iSize child restraint systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example.

# If the child and the child restraint sys tem together weigh more than 33 kg, only use an ISOFIX or iSize child restraint system with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt.

# Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system R in the manufacturer's installation and operat ing instructions for the child restraint system used R on a label on the child restraint system, if present Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When using a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as its correct use and the suitability of the seats for attaching a child restraint system. Occupant safety 49 1 ISOFIX mounting brackets 2 i-Size mounting brackets Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system or the i-Size child restraint system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX or iSize mounting brackets. 50 Occupant safety

* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the centre seat When fitting a child restraint system, the seat belt for the centre seat could be damaged.

# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap ped.

# Attach the ISOFIX child restraint system to both ISOFIX mounting brackets 1 or iSize mounting brackets 2. or

# Attach the iSize child restraint system to both iSize mounting brackets 2. Securing Top Tether

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked after fitting Top Tether belts If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an acci dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident.

# Always lock rear seat backrests after fitting Top Tether belts.

# Observe the lock verification indicator. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, the red lock verification indicator will be visible. The risk of injury can be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt facilitates an additional con nection between the child restraint system attached with ISOFIX or i-Size and the vehicle. The child restraint system must be equipped with a Top Tether belt. Vehicles with adjustable head restraints:

# If necessary, move the head restraint upwards ( page 91).

# Route Top Tether belt 3 under the head restraint between the two head restraint bars. Vehicles without adjustable head restraints:

# Top Tether belt with a seat belt strap: guide Top Tether belt 3 over the centre of the head restraint. or

# Top Tether belt with two seat belt straps:

guide each Top Tether belt 3 to the right and left side of the head restraint. All vehicles

# Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.

# Hook Top Tether hook 2 into Top Tether anchorage 1 without twisting it.

# Tension Top Tether belt 3. Always comply with the child restraint system manufactur er's installation instructions when doing so. Vehicles with adjustable head restraints:

# If necessary, slide the head restraint down R The unintentionally disabled front passenger wards ( page 91). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 3. front airbag. system. R Incorrect positioning of the child restraint Occupant safety 51 Child restraint systems on the front passenger seat Notes on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the information on the automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff

( page 39). By doing this, you can avoid risks caused by:

R A child restraint system that is not detected Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor:

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from using a rearward-facing child restraint system when the front passenger airbag is enabled by the automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff. If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger 52 Occupant safety seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. Always ensure that the front passenger air bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out, the front passenger front airbag is ena bled. Be sure to observe the notes on the safe trans portation of children ( page 45). Notes on vehicles without the automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff Vehicles without automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side. Notes on forward-facing and rearward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat When using a rearward-facing child restraint sys tem on the front passenger seat, the front passenger front airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously

( page 41). When using the child restraint system on the front passenger seat, it is essential to observe the following:

R Move the front passenger seat as far back as R Set the seat backrest to an almost vertical R Retract the seat cushion length as far as pos R The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. R The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front possible. position. sible. Never install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat:

Make sure you observe the following informa tion:

R On forward-facing and rearward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

( page 52). R On attaching suitable child restraint systems

( page 53). Suitability of the seats for child restraint sys tems Notes on attaching suitable child restraint systems Only child restraint systems with the following ECE standards are permitted for use in the vehi cle:

R ECE R44 R ECE-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems) Examples of approval labels on child restraint systems:

passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. R If necessary, adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. R Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position. R Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. R If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly. R Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Always comply with the manufacturer's installa tion and operating instructions for the child restraint system used, and the notes on fitting suitable child restraint systems ( page 53). Occupant safety 53 Label for child restraint systems in accord ance with ECE R-44 54 Occupant safety Label for child restraint systems in accord ance with ECE R-129 ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint systems of the fol lowing "Universal" category can be used, in accordance with the tables on suitability of seats for the attachment of child restraint systems, on seats marked U, UF, IUF or i-U. Semi-universal child restraint systems are indi cated by the text "semi-universal" on the approval label. They can only be used if the vehi cle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Notes on the suitability of seats for attach ing belt-secured child restraint systems Observe the following information:

R When using a baby car seat of the cate gory 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the driver's and front passenger seat such that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. R When using a forward-facing child restraint system of category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible ( page 92). In addition, the seat backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the back rest of the vehicle seat. R When you remove the child restraint system, fit the head restraint immediately ( page 92) and adjust all the head restraints again cor rectly. R For certain child restraint systems in weight categories II or III, there may be certain restrictions in the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. R Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat forward slightly. R The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the head restraints accord ingly. R Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system. Legend for the table:

X U Not suitable for children in this weight category. Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category. UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems of the "Universal" cat egory in this weight category. L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint sys Occupant safety 55 tems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system man ufacturer's vehicle model list. Front passenger seat:

Weight categories Category 0: up to 10 kg Category 0+: up to 13 kg Category I: 9 to 18 kg Category II: 15 to 25 kg Category III: 22 to 36 kg Front passenger front airbag enabled Front passenger front airbag disa bled1 X X UF, L UF, L UF, L U, L U, L U, L U, L U, L 1 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. 56 Occupant safety Rear seats:

Weight categories Category 0: up to 10 kg Category 0+: up to 13 kg Category I: 9 to 18 kg Category II: 15 to 25 kg Category III: 22 to 36 kg Left, right Centre1 U, L U, L U, L U, L U, L U, L U, L U, L X X 1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat. Notes on the suitability of seats for attach ing ISOFIX child restraint systems Observe the following information:

R When using a baby car seat of cate gory 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system of category I on a rear seat: adjust the driver's and front passenger seat such that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. R When using a forward-facing child restraint system of category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible ( page 92). In addition, the seat backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the back rest of the vehicle seat. R When you remove the child restraint system, fit the head restraint immediately ( page 92) and adjust all the head restraints again cor rectly. R For certain child restraint systems in weight categories II or III, there may be certain restrictions in the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. R Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat forward slightly. R The child restraint system must not touch the Legend for the table:

roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the head restraints accord ingly. R Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system. X IUF Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight category and/or size category. Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" cat egory in this weight category. IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint sys tems according to the table in "Over view of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Occupant safety 57 Weight categories Carry cot Category 0: up to 10 kg and approx. 6 months Category 0+: up to 13 kg and approx. 15 months Size category Equipment Rear seat Left, right F G E E D C ISO/L1 ISO/L2 ISO/R1 ISO/R1 ISO/R2 ISO/R3 X X IL IL IL IL1 58 Occupant safety Weight categories Category I: 9 to 18 kg and between approx. 9 months and 4 years Size category Equipment D C B B1 A ISO/R2 ISO/R3 ISO/F2 ISO/F2X ISO/F3 Rear seat Left, right IL IL1 IUF IUF IUF 1 When using a child restraint system of size category C (ISO/R3), move the front seat to the highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system. Notes on the suitability of seats for attach ing iSize child restraint systems Observe the following information:

R When using a rearward-facing child restraint system: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint sys tem. R When using a forward-facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible

( page 92). In addition, the seat backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the vehicle seat. R When you remove the child restraint system, fit the head restraint immediately ( page 92) and adjust all the head restraints again cor rectly. R Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat forward slightly. R Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system. Legend for the table:

X iU Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category. Suitable for forward-facing and rear ward-facing i-Size child restraint sys tems in the "Universal" category. iSize child restraint system X iU X iU Front passenger seat Left rear seat Centre rear seat Right rear seat Occupant safety 59 Overview of recommended child restraint systems Recommended child restraint systems for attaching with the vehicle seat belt Weight categories Manufacturer Type Approval number

(E1 ...) Order number (A 000 ...) colour code 9H95 Category 0:

up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months Category 0+:

up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months Category I:

9 to 18 kg between approximately 9 months and 4 years Britax Rmer BABY SAFE plus II 04 301 146 Britax Rmer BABY SAFE plus II 04 301 146 Britax Rmer DUO plus 04 301 133 970 36 00 970 57 00 970 36 00 970 57 00 970 37 00 970 58 00 60 Occupant safety Weight categories Manufacturer Type Approval number

(E1 ...) Order number (A 000 ...) colour code 9H95 Category II/III:

15 to 36 kg between approximately 4 and 12 years Britax Rmer KIDFIX 04 301 198 Britax Rmer KIDFIX XP 04 301 304 970 38 00 970 59 00 970 61 00 Recommended "Universal" and "Semi-Universal" category ISOFIX child restraint systems Weight categories Size category Manufacturer Type Britax Rmer BABY SAFE plus 04 301 146 B6 6 86 8224 Approval number

(E1 ...) Order number (col our code: 9H95) Category 0+:

up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months Category I:

9 to 18 kg E B1 Britax Rmer DUO plus 04 301 133 A 000 970 37 00 A 000 970 58 00

% You can obtain further information on the correct child restraint system at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Child safety locks Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehi cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

R Releasing the parking brake. R Shifting the automatic transmission out of park position j or shifting manual transmission into idle position. R Starting the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip ment and become trapped.

# Never leave children and animals unat tended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key sticker and mobile phones if the

"Digital Vehicle Key in the smartphone"

function is activated via the Mercedes me connect web app.

& WARNING This poses an increased risk of death due to heat stroke or exposure to cold in the vehicle If persons particularly children experi ence prolonged exposure to extremely high or low temperatures, this poses a risk of injury or even fatal injury.

# Never leave anyone particularly chil dren unattended in the vehicle. Occupant safety 61

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could:

R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out of the vehicle and be hit by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

# Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are travelling in the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key sticker and mobile phones if the

"Digital Vehicle Key in the smartphone"

62 Occupant safety function is activated via the Mercedes me connect web app. Child safety locks for the rear doors and an over ride feature for the rear side windows are availa ble. The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside.

# Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or

# To activate/deactivate: press button 2.

# Make sure that the child safety locks are 2 (deactivate). working properly. Activating/deactivating the override feature for the rear side windows Opening/closing the side window in the rear is possible:

R With indicator lamp 1 lit: via the switch on the driver's door. R With indicator lamp 1 off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driv er's door. Notes on pets in the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat tended in the vehicle If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten ded or unsecured, they could possibly press down buttons or switches. Thereby an animal may:

R activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example R switch systems on or off and endanger other road users Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking manoeuvres and injure vehicle occupants in the process.

# Never leave animals in the vehicle unat tended.

# Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car rier. Occupant safety 63

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

# Never leave children and animals unat tended in the vehicle.

# Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children.

* NOTE Damage to the key caused by magnetic fields

# Keep the key away from strong mag netic fields. 64 Opening and closing Key Overview of key functions

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could:

R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out of the vehicle and be hit by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, children could also set the vehi cle in motion, for example, by:

R releasing the parking brake. R shifting the automatic transmission out of park position j or shifting manual trans mission into neutral. R starting the engine. 1 Locks 2 Battery check lamp 3 Unlocks

% The key may vary from the one shown in the diagram, depending on the vehicle equip ment. The key locks and unlocks the following compo nents:

R The doors R The fuel filler flap R The tailgate The indicator lamp in the door trim on the driv er's side flashes when the vehicle is locked from outside. The indicator lamp goes out if the vehi cle is locked from inside or while the vehicle is in motion. If you do not open the vehicle within approx imately 40 seconds after unlocking:

R The vehicle is locked again R Anti-theft protection is reactivated Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the key's functionality.

% If battery check lamp 2 does not light up after pressing the % or & button, the battery is discharged. Replacing the key battery ( page 66). Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Vehicle

# Activate or deactivate Acoustic lock. Activating/deactivating the panic alarm Changing the unlocking settings Requirements:

% The panic alarm function is only available in certain countries. R The ignition is switched off. Opening and closing 65 Possible unlocking functions of the key:

R Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap

# To switch between settings: press the

% and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. If the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected:

R Pressing the % button a second time cen trally unlocks the vehicle. R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel filler flap are unlocked. Reducing the energy consumption of the key All vehicles: if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time, you can reduce the energy consumption of the respec tive key. To do so, deactivate the key functions.

# To activate: press button 1 for approx imately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered.

# To deactivate: briefly press button 1 again. or

# Press the start/stop button on the cockpit

(the key is inside the vehicle). 66 Opening and closing

# To deactivate: press the & button on the

# Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in key twice in quick succession. The battery check lamp of the key flashes twice briefly and lights up once.

# To activate: press any button on the key.

% When the vehicle is started with the key in the stowage compartment of the centre con sole, the key functions are automatically activated ( page 143). Removing/inserting the emergency key the intermediate position.

% You can use the intermediate position of emergency key 2 to attach the key to a key ring.

# Press release knob 1 again and fully remove emergency key 2.

# To insert: press release knob 1.

# Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate position or fully until it engages.

% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the intermediate position is not available.

# Keep batteries out of the reach of chil dren.

# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat teries Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. Replacing the key battery

& DANGER Serious damage to health caused by swallowing batteries Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub stances. Swallowing batteries may cause serious damage to health. There is a risk of fatal injury. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

# To remove: press release knob 1. Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly. Opening and closing 67 Requirements:

R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist work shop.

# Remove the emergency key ( page 66).

# Press release button 2 down fully and slide cover 1 in the direction of the arrow.

# Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove.

# Remove battery compartment 3 and take out the discharged battery.

# Insert the new battery into battery compart ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the bat tery.

# Push in battery compartment 3.

# Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it engages. Problems with the key Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle. Possible causes:

R The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. 68 Opening and closing Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions R The key is faulty.

# Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary .

# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock .

# Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You have lost a key.

# Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.

# If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Doors Notes on the additional door lock The additional door lock is only available for vehicles for the United Kingdom.

& WARNING Risk of injury to persons inside the vehicle when the additional door lock is activated If the additional door lock is activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. If there are persons in the vehicle, they can no longer leave the vehicle, e.g. in hazardous situations.

# Never leave persons unattended in the vehicle, particularly children, elderly persons or persons in need of help.

# If there are persons in the vehicle, do not activate the additional door lock. The additional door lock is automatically activa ted:

R After locking the vehicle with the key. R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.

% After locking the vehicle, the horn can be operated for a short time.

% After locking the vehicle, pressing the button to centrally unlock the vehicle from inside will trigger an alarm ( page 69). If the additional door lock is activated, the doors cannot be opened from the inside. You can deactivate the additional door lock by deactivating the interior protection ( page 85). Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside

# United Kingdom only: observe the notes on the additional door lock ( page 68). Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

# Pull door handle 1.

# To unlock: press button 1.

# To lock: press button 2. The indicator lamp lights up. This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. Opening and closing 69 The vehicle is not unlocked:

R If you have locked the vehicle using the key. R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY LESS-GO. Locking or unlocking the vehicle with a smartphone or a Digital Vehicle Key sticker Requirements:

R The vehicle is equipped with the "Digital Vehicle Key" function and this service has been activated. R A Digital Vehicle Key sticker.

Or R A suitable mobile telephone with NFC aerial. The "Digital Vehicle Key" function is acti vated via the Mercedes me connect web app: http://www.mercedes.me. The mobile phone battery must be suf ficiently charged. On some mobile phones, the function is also available when the battery is discharged.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY LESS-GO Requirements:

R The key is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m. R The driver's door and the door at which the door handle is used are closed. 70 Opening and closing

% You can check the suitability of your mobile phone by entering the phone number at http://www.mercedes.me. Information about suitable mobile phones can be obtained from your Mercedes-Benz service centre or at http://www.mercedes-

benz.com/connect.

% Mercedes-Benz recommends that you carry the emergency key in case of function restrictions.

% The function is only available in combination with Mercedes me connect and only in cer tain countries.

% Protective cases around the mobile phone can impair the range of functions. If the vehicle has been parked for longer than two weeks, the NFC aerial in the door handle is deactivated.

# Pull the door handle. The NFC aerial is activated.

# Touch the door handle on the driver's door in the area where NFC aerial 1 is located with the part of the mobile phone where the NFC aerial is located or with the Digital Vehicle Key sticker. The vehicle is locked or unlocked alternately. If you lose your mobile phone, deactivate the

"Digital Vehicle Key" service in Mercedes me connect via http://www.mercedes.me. Opening and closing 71 If you open the tailgate from outside it is auto matically unlocked.

# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur face of the door handle.

# To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface

# Convenience closing: touch recessed sen sor surface 2 for an extended period.

% Further information on convenience closing 1 or 2.

( page 77). Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Problems with KEYLESS-GO You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. Possible causes:

R KEYLESS-GO has been deactivated . R The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged. R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. R The key is faulty.

# Activate KEYLESS-GO .

# Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary .

# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock the vehicle .

# Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 72 Opening and closing Activating/deactivating the automatic lock ing feature The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn ing faster than walking pace.

# To activate: press and hold button 2 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.

# To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds. When the vehicle is locked automatically, the indicator lamp in button 2 lights up. There is a danger of being locked out if the func tion is activated:

R While the vehicle is being tow started/

pushed. R On a roller dynamometer. Locking and unlocking the vehicle with the emergency key Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the emergency key

% If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using the emergency key, first press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv er's door using the emergency key.

# Insert the emergency key as far as it will go into opening 1 in the cover.

# Pull and hold the door handle.

# Pull the cover on the emergency key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases.

# Release the door handle. Locking the front passenger door and rear doors with the emergency key Opening and closing 73

# To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle:

turn the emergency key clockwise as far as it will go. If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from outside. Load compartment Opening the tailgate

& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail gate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

# Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate.

# Never drive with the tailgate open.

# To unlock: turn the emergency key anti-

clockwise to position 1.

# To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position 1.

# Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin der until it engages and is seated firmly.

# Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into opening 1 on the door lock.

# To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle:

turn the emergency key anti-clockwise as far as it will go.

# Before the journey, secure objects, lug gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

# Pull the tailgate down with the handle and let it drop into the lock. Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency key

# Fold the rear seat backrest forwards.

# Remove the load compartment cover 74 Opening and closing

* NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by obstacles above the vehicle The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when it is opened.

# Make sure that there is sufficient space behind and above the tailgate.

# Pull the tailgate handle. Closing the tailgate items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured

( page 103).

# Insert emergency key 2 into opening 1 in the trim and push it in. The tailgate is unlocked. Side windows Opening and closing the side windows

# If someone is trapped, release the but ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when opening a side window When you open a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.

# When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.

# If someone is trapped, release the but ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process.

# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows Children could become trapped if they oper ate the side windows, particularly when unat tended.

# Activate the override feature for the rear side windows.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. on. Requirements:

R The power supply or the ignition is switched Opening and closing 75 1 Closing 2 Opening The buttons on the driver's door take prece dence.

# To start automatic operation: press the W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. 76 Opening and closing

# To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again. R during resetting When the vehicle is switched off, the side win dows can continue being operated. The function is available for around five minutes or until a front door is opened. Automatic reverse function of the side win dows If an object blocks a side window during the closing process, the side window opens again automatically. The automatic reverse function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your atten tiveness.

# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window The reverse function does not react:

R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers This means that the reverse function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations.

# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

# If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again. Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.

# When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

# Press and hold the % button on the key. The following functions are performed:

R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened. R The panoramic sliding sunroof is opened. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on. If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic sliding sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first.

# To continue convenience opening: press the % button again.

# To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)

& WARNING Risk of entrapment caused by inadvertent convenience closing When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side win dow and the sliding sunroof.

# Observe the complete closing proce dure when using convenience closing.

# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

# Press and hold the & button on the key. The following functions are performed:

R The vehicle is locked. R The side windows are closed. R The panoramic sliding sunroof is closed.

# To close the roller sunblinds: press the

# To interrupt convenience closing: release

& button again. the & button.

% Convenience closing can also be operated with KEYLESS-GO ( page 70). Opening and closing 77 Problems with the side windows Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

# Check to see if any objects are in the window guide.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area in the process.

# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.

# To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side win dow. 78 Opening and closing Problem The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening feature. Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof

% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panoramic sliding sunroof. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

# Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has closed, and hold the button for an additional second. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly:

# Repeat the previous step. The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function. The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.

# Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary .

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped while opening and closing the sliding sunroof During opening and closing, parts of the body could get caught in the sweep of the sliding sunroof.

# When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or

# Press the button in any direction during the automatic opening/closing process. The opening/closing process is stop ped. Opening and closing 79

* NOTE Important points to remember when a roof rack is fitted When a roof rack is fitted, raising or opening the sliding sunroof may be limited.

# Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof rack is fitted.

# If in doubt, do not raise or open the sliding sunroof.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the slid ing sunroof is operated by children Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment while opening and closing the roller sunblinds When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding sunroof.

# When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.

# Release the switch immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or

# Press the switch in any direction during the automatic opening/closing process. The opening/closing process is stop ped.

* NOTE Malfunction caused by snow and ice Snow and ice may lead to a malfunction of the sliding sunroof.

# Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice.

* NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects Objects that protrude from the sliding sun roof may damage the sealing strips.

# Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. 80 Opening and closing 1 To raise 2 To open 3 To close/lower Use the 3 button to operate the panoramic sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind. R The panoramic sliding sunroof can be opened only when the roller sunblind is open. R The roller sunblind can be operated only when the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed.

# To start automatic operation: press the 3 button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.

# To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press the 3 button in any direction. The opening/closing process is stopped. R Check whether the panoramic sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof rack is fitted. Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If there is an object obstructing the sliding sun roof during the closing process, the sliding sun roof opens again automatically. The automatic reverse function is only an aid and is not a sub stitute for your attentiveness.

# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment even with the reversing feature active The reverse function does not react in partic ular:

R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers R over the last 4 mm of the closing path R during resetting This means that the reverse function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations.

# When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or

# Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The closing process is stopped. Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind If there is an object obstructing the roller sun blind during the closing process, the roller sun blind opens again automatically. The automatic reverse function is only an aid and is not a sub stitute for your attentiveness.

# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of move ment.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers. This means that the reversing function can not prevent entrapment in these situations.

# When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or

# Press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process is stopped. Automatic features of the sliding sunroof

% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panoramic sliding sunroof. By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you can interrupt the automatic functions: "Rain closing function when driving" and "Automatic lowering feature". Automatic closing when the vehicle is sta tionary R if it starts to rain (detection by the rain sen sor on the windscreen) R after six hours R if there is a malfunction in the power supply The rear of the sliding sunroof is then raised. Opening and closing 81 Rain closing function when driving Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: If it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof is automatically lowered while the vehicle is in motion. Automatic lowering feature Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, the slid ing sunroof is automatically lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it is raised again automatically.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment by auto matic lowering of the sliding sunroof At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers slightly at the rear. This could trap you or other persons.

# Make sure that nobody reaches into the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the vehicle is in motion. 82 Opening and closing

# If somebody becomes trapped, briefly push the sliding sunroof button for wards or backwards. The sliding sunroof lifts during opening. Problems with the sliding sunroof

% The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panoramic sliding sunroof. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injury by closing the sliding sunroof again If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased force. Parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area in the process.

# Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.

# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or

# Press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process is stopped. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

# Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to the point of resist ance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force. Opening and closing 83 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and reopens again slightly:

# Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof is closed again with increased force. Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: The sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind does not operate smoothly.

# Pull and hold the button 3 little by little until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.

# Pull and hold the button 3 little by little until the roller sunblind is fully closed.

# Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof. Anti-theft protection Function of the immobiliser The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. The immobiliser is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off and deactivated when the ignition is switched on. ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations:

R When a door is opened R When the tailgate is opened R When the bonnet is opened R When the interior protection is triggered R When tow-away protection is triggered

( page 85)

( page 84) The ATA system is primed automatically after approximately 10 seconds:

R After locking the vehicle with the key R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO 84 Opening and closing

% When the MercedesBenz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is auto matically sent to the Customer Assistance Centre ( page 350). Deactivating the ATA

# Press the % or & button on the key. or

# Press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( page 143) Tow-away protection is only primed when the fol lowing components are closed:

R The doors R The tailgate Tow-away protection is automatically deactiva ted:

R After pressing the % button on the key R After pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( page 143) R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-

Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:

# Grasp the outside door handle with the key GO outside the vehicle. Indicator lamp 1 flashes when the ATA system is activated. The ATA system is automatically deactivated:

R After unlocking the vehicle with the key R After pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( page 143) R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GO Function of tow-away protection An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-

away protection is primed. Tow-away protection is automatically primed after about 60 seconds:

R After locking the vehicle with the key R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Priming/deactivating tow-away protection Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Schnellzugriff

(Quick access)

# Prime/deactivate Tow-away protection. Tow-away protection remains deactivated until:

R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. Opening and closing 85 Function of interior protection When interior protection is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detec ted in the vehicle interior. Interior protection is primed automatically after approximately 10 seconds:

R After locking the vehicle with the key R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Interior protection is only primed when the fol lowing components are closed:

R Doors R The tailgate Interior protection is automatically deactivated:

R After pressing the % button on the key R After pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( page 143) R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-

GO The following situations can lead to a false alarm:

R Moving objects such as mascots in the vehi cle interior R The side window is open R The panoramic sliding sunroof is open Priming/deactivating interior protection Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Schnellzugriff

(Quick access)

# Prime/deactivate Interior motion sensor. Interior protection remains deactivated until:

R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. 86 Seats and stowing Notes on the correct driver's seat position

& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations:

R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt. R your legs are not entirely stretched and you can depress the pedals properly R the back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint R you can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent R you can move your legs freely R you can see all the displays on the instru ment cluster clearly R you have a good overview of the traffic con ditions R the seat belt is pulled snugly against the body and is routed across the centre of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area Ensure the following when adjusting the steering wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3:

R you are as far away from the driver's airbag R you are sitting in a normal upright position R your thighs are slightly supported by the seat as possible cushion Seats Adjusting the front seat mechanically (with out Seat Comfort Package)

# Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil dren in the vehicle".

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Car Key sticker and mobile phones if the "Digital Car Key on smartphone" function is activated via the Mercedes me connect web app.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. Seats and stowing 87

& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations:

R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. 88 Seats and stowing Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped.

# While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints which are not fitted or are adjusted incorrectly If head restraints are not fitted or are adjus ted incorrectly, they cannot provide protec tion as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

# Always drive with the head restraints fitted.

# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam ple.

# Adjust the seat properly before begin ning your journey.

# Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoul der. 1 Seat fore-and-aft position 2 Seat height 3 Seat backrest inclination

# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:

lift lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired position.

# Make sure that the seat is engaged.

# To adjust the seat height: turn or push lever 2 until the desired position has been reached.

# To adjust the seat backrest inclination:

turn handwheel 3 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached. Adjusting the front seat mechanically (with Seat Comfort Package) Seats and stowing 89

# To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever 1 and slide the front section of the seat cushion forwards or backwards.

# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:

lift lever 2 and slide the seat into the desired position.

# Make sure that the seat is engaged.

# To adjust the seat cushion inclination:

turn handwheel 3 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.

# To adjust the seat height: turn or push lever 4 until the desired position has been reached.

# To adjust the seat backrest inclination:

turn handwheel 5 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached. 1 Seat cushion length 2 Seat fore-and-aft position 3 Seat cushion inclination 4 Seat height 5 Seat backrest inclination 90 Seats and stowing Adjusting the front seat electrically Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support Head restraints Adjusting the front seat head restraints mechanically

& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations:

R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt. 1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat cushion inclination 4 Seat fore-and-aft position 1 To raise 2 To soften 3 To lower 4 To harden

# Save the settings with the memory function

( page 97).

# Using buttons 1 to 4, adjust the contour of the backrest individually to suit your back.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints which are not fitted or are adjusted incorrectly If head restraints are not fitted or are adjus ted incorrectly, they cannot provide protec tion as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

# Always drive with the head restraints fitted.

# Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. Seats and stowing 91 Adjusting the head restraints of the rear seats mechanically

# To raise: press release knob 1 and pull the head restraint up.

# To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down.

# To move forwards: press release knob 2 and pull the head restraint forwards.

# To move backwards: press release knob 2 and push the head restraint backwards.

# To raise: pull the head restraint up.

# To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down. 92 Seats and stowing Removing Fitting/removing the rear seat head restraints

# Push release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint. Fitting

# Insert the head restraint such that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.

# Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position.

# Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages. Configuring the seat settings Multimedia system:

, . Comfort . Seat comfort

# Select a seat. Adjusting the backrest side bolsters

# Select Side bolsters.

# Adjust the air cushions. Adjusting the seat contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest (lumbar)

# Select Lumbar.

# Adjust the air cushions. Selecting the massage program for the front seats Multimedia system:

, . Comfort . Massage

# Select a seat.

# Select Wave Massage or Pulsating Massage. The selected program starts.

# To set the massage intensity: switch High intensity on or off . Resetting the seat and massage settings Multimedia system:

, . Comfort . Seat com-

fort . Reset

# Select Yes or No.

# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it slightly forwards ( page 101).

# Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go. Seats and stowing 93

* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heater is switched on When the seat heater is switched on, over heating can occur due to objects or docu ments placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface.

# Make sure that no objects or docu ments are on the seats when the seat heater is switched on.

& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat edly switching on the seat heater Requirements:

R The power supply is switched on.

% Only the settings for the selected seat are

# Select a program. reset. The selected program starts. Setting ENERGIZING seat kinetics Requirements:

R These functions are available only for fully electrical seats with a memory function. Multimedia system:

, . Comfort . Seat com-

fort . Seat kinetics ENERGIZING seat kinetics supports back health by changing the seat position during driving. The muscles and joints are stressed and relieved again and again by means of minor movements of the cushion and backrest. Depending on the planned driving time, three different programs are available for selection. The following programs are available:

R Short journey (16 minutes) R Medium-dist. journey (32 minutes) R Long-distance journey (96 minutes) Configuring a program

# Select Settings.

# Select Backr. & seat surface, Backrest or Seat surface.

# Vehicles with a multicontour seat:

switch Including lumbar on or off. Switching the seat heater on/off Repeatedly switching on the seat heater can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. The health of persons with limited tempera ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affec ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.

# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heater. 94 Seats and stowing

% The seat heater automatically switches down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heater is switched off. Switching the seat ventilation on/off Requirements:

R The power supply is switched on.

# To switch on: press button 1. All indicator lamps are on.

# To reduce the level: press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps light up.

# To switch off: press button 1 repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.

# To switch on: press button 1. All indicator lamps are on.

# To reduce the level: press button 1 repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. Depending on the ventilation level, up to three indicator lamps light up.

# To switch off: press button 1 repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel manually

& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations:

R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil dren when adjusting the steering wheel Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key sticker and mobile phones if the

"Digital Vehicle Key in the smartphone"

function is activated via the Mercedes me connect web app. Seats and stowing 95 Switching the steering wheel heater on/off R The ignition is switched on.

# Push release lever 1 down as far as it will go. The steering column is unlocked.

# Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the steering wheel.

# Push release lever 1 up as far as it will go. The steering column is locked.

# Check and make sure that the steering col umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.

# To switch on: push the switch to position 1. The indicator lamp 3 lights up.

# To switch off: push the switch to position 2. The indicator lamp 3 goes out. 96 Seats and stowing When you switch the ignition off, the steering wheel heater switches off. Easy entry and exit feature Function of the easy entry and exit feature

& WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process of the easy exit feature If you pull away while the easy entry and exit feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle.

# Always wait until the adjustment proc ess is complete before pulling away.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped while adjusting the easy entry and exit feature When the easy entry and exit feature adjusts the driver's seat, you and other vehicle occu pants particularly children could become trapped.

# During the adjustment process of the easy entry and exit feature, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the driver's seat. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat:

# Press the seat adjustment switch. The adjustment process is stopped.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Car Key sticker and mobile phones if the "Digital Car Key on smartphone" function is activated via the Mercedes me connect web app. You can stop the adjustment process by press ing one of the memory position switches of the memory function.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during activation of the easy entry and exit feature by children If children activate the easy entry and exit feature, they can become trapped, particu larly when unattended.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. When the easy entry and exit feature is active, the driver's seat moves backwards when:

R you switch the ignition off when the driver's R you open the driver's door when the ignition door is open is switched off

% The driver's seat moves backwards only if it is not already in the rearmost position. The driver's seat moves back to the last drive position in the following cases:

R you switch the ignition on when the driver's R you close the driver's door when the ignition door is closed is switched on The last drive position is stored in the following situations:

R you switch the ignition off R you call up the seat settings via the memory R you save the seat setting using the memory function function Setting the easy entry and exit feature Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Fahrzeug (Vehi cle) . Easy Entry/Exit

# Activate or deactivate the function. Using the memory function

& WARNING Risk of an accident if memory function is used while driving If you use the memory function on the driv er's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made.

# Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is station ary.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when set ting the seat with the memory function When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants particu larly children could become trapped.

# During the adjustment process of the memory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. Seats and stowing 97

# If someone becomes trapped, immedi ately press the position button or seat adjustment switch.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children Children could become trapped if they acti vate the memory function, particularly when unattended.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Car Key sticker and mobile phones if the "Digital Car Key in the smartphone" function is activated via the Mercedes me connect web app. The memory function can be used when the igni tion is switched off. Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. 98 Seats and stowing The following systems can be selected:

R Seat R Seat contour R Outside mirrors R Head-up display

# To store: set the seat, seat contour, the head-up display and the outside mirror to the desired position.

# Press memory button M and then press pre set position button 1, 2 or 3 within three sec onds.

# To call up: press and briefly hold preset posi tion button 1, 2 or 3. After releasing the button, the front seat, head-up display, outside mirror and seat con tour are moved into the stored position auto matically. Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

# Always switch off the engine before opening the boot lid.

# Never drive with the boot lid open.

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.

# Before the journey, secure objects, lug gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrectly

& WARNING Risk of burns from tailpipes stowed objects and tailpipe trim If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects so that they can not be thrown around in such situa tions.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.

# Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trim.

# Allow the vehicle parts to cool down before you touch them. The handling characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle:

R never exceed the maximum gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants).

# Close the lockable stowage spaces R the load must not protrude above the upper before starting a journey. edge of the seat backrests.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot. R always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. R secure the load using the tie-down eyes and distribute the load evenly. Seats and stowing 99 Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior Overview of the front stowage compart ments 1 Stowage compartment in the doors 2 Stowage compartment in the armrest with a multimedia and USB connection 3 Stowage compartment in the front centre console with a USB connection and charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones 4 Glove box 100 Seats and stowing Locking or unlocking the glove box Stowage compartment for customer litera ture Opening the spectacles compartment

# Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clock wise 2 (to lock) or anti-clockwise 1 (to unlock).

# To open: turn the handle to the left or right.

# Press button 1. Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat Requirements:

R The centre seat backrest has been unlocked. Folding the rear seat backrest forwards The centre and outer seat backrests can be fol ded forwards. Seats and stowing 101

& WARNING Risk of injury if the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold for wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. R If this is the case, the vehicle occupant would be forced into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could result in additional injury. R Objects or loads in the boot/load com partment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.

# Make sure that the seat backrest and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip. Ensure that the centre seat backrest is not locked.

# Centre seat backrest: pull release catch 3 of seat backrest 2 forwards.

# Fold the corresponding seat backrest for wards.

# Left and right seat backrest: if necessary, fully insert the seat backrest head restraints

( page 91).

# Pull on release lever 1. 102 Seats and stowing Folding the rear seat backrest back

* NOTE Damage to the seat belt The seat belt could become trapped and thus damaged when folding back the seat back rest.

# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap ped when folding back the seat back rest.

# Move the driver's or front passenger seat for wards, if necessary. Blocking the release catch of the centre rear seat backrest Requirements:

R The left and centre seat backrest are engaged and joined together. You can lock the centre seat backrest. The centre seat backrest can then only be folded for wards together with the left seat backrest.

# Fold corresponding seat backrest 1 back until it engages. Left and right seat backrest: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, red lock verification indicator 2 will be visible. Centre seat backrest: if the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, red lock verification indicator 3 will be visible.

# Fold the centre and left seat backrest for wards.

# To lock: slide catch 1 upwards. The release mechanism of the centre seat backrest is locked.

# To unlock: slide catch 1 downwards. Load compartment cover Fitting and removing the load compartment cover

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects being poorly secured On its own, the load compartment cover can not secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident.

# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.

# Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the load compartment cover. Do not load the load compartment cover with more than 2.5 kg.

# To remove: pull the hanging clips 1 on the tailgate downwards and unhook them. Seats and stowing 103

# Swivel the load compartment cover down wards and pull it out in the direction of arrow 2.

# To install: place the load compartment cover onto the guide rails on the left and right.

# Push the load compartment cover forwards until it engages.

# Swivel the load compartment cover upwards and hook the hanging clips 1 to the tail gate. Attaching/removing the partition net

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects being poorly secured On its own, the partition net cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. 104 Seats and stowing

# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.

# Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even when you are using the partition net. For safety reasons, always use a partition net when transporting a load. Damaged partition nets can no longer fulfil their functions and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Partition net without load compartment enlarge ment Partition net with load compartment enlargement

# To attach: attach the partition net to the holders 1 on the left and right on the roof lining.

# Without load compartment enlargement:

attach the hooks 2 to the tie-down eyes 3 on the left and right in such a way that the hooks 2 point backwards.

# With load compartment enlargement: attach the hooks 2 to the tie-down eyes 3 on the left and right in such a way that the hooks 2 point to the door.

# Slide the loose end of the tie-down strap into the buckle in the direction of arrow 4 until the tie-down straps are loose.

# Remove the hooks 2 from the tie-down

# Pull at the loose ends of the tie-down straps eyes 3 on the left and right. until the partition net is tight.

# Remove the partition net from the holders 1 on the roof lining on the left and right. Overview of the tie-down eyes Observe the notes on loading the vehicle

( page 98). Seats and stowing 105 1 Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat)

# To remove: turn the buckle of the tie-down strap in the direction of arrow 5. 106 Seats and stowing Overview of bag hooks

& WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage could be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly changing direc tions.

# Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.

# Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle

( page 98). The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 3 kg. Do not use it to secure a load. 1 Bag hook Opening or closing the stowage space under the load compartment floor

& WARNING Risk of injury due to an open load compartment floor If you drive when the load compartment floor is open, objects could be thrown around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sud den braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always close the load compartment floor before a journey. Attaching the roof rack

& WARNING Risk of injury by exceeding the maximum roof load When you load the roof, the vehicle centre of gravity rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as the steer ing and braking, will be greatly impaired.

# Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section.

* NOTE Vehicle damage from non-

approved roof racks The vehicle could be damaged by roof racks which have not been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

# Only use roof racks tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Seats and stowing 107

# Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof rack is fitted:

R the sliding sunroof can be fully raised. R the boot lid can be fully opened.

# Position the load on the roof rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sus tain damage even when it is in motion.

* NOTE Damage to the panoramic sliding sunroof when a roof rack is fitted The panoramic sliding sunroof may be dam aged by the roof rack if you attempt to open it when the roof rack is fitted.

# Do not open the panoramic sliding sun roof if a roof rack is fitted. In order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior, you can raise the panoramic sliding sunroof.

# To open: pull the handle 1 upwards.

# Lift the load compartment floor upwards by handle 1.

# To close: fold the load compartment floor downwards and then press handle 1 down until it engages. 108 Seats and stowing

* NOTE Damage to the covers The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened.

# Do not use metallic or hard objects.

# Fold covers 1 carefully upwards in the direction of the arrow.

# Secure the roof rack to the anchorage points under covers 1.

# Comply with the roof rack manufacturer's installation instructions.

# Secure the load on the roof rack. Cup holders Fitting the cup holder in or removing it from the centre console (automatic transmission)

& WARNING Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in motion. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic condi tions and you may lose control of the vehicle.

# Only use the cup holder when the vehi

# Only use the cup holder for containers cle is stationary. of the right size.

# Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot. Cup holder in the stowage compartment with cover

% The cup holder and the rubber mat beneath it can be removed for cleaning, e.g. with clear, lukewarm water. Seats and stowing 109 Cup holder in the stowage compartment without cover

# To remove: Slide the snap-in brackets 1 of the cup holder inwards until they are unlocked.

# Move the cup holder upwards out of the stowage compartment. Cup holder in the stowage compartment with cover Cup holder in the stowage compartment without cover

# To fit: If necessary, open the stowage com partment cover and insert the cup holder, as shown, into the stowage compartment with the sign to the vehicle interior.

# Slide the cup holder onto the bars in the stowage compartment. Ashtray and cigarette lighter Using the ashtray 110 Seats and stowing

# Slide the snap-in brackets 1 outwards until they engage.

# Press button 2 and/or 4. The wings 3 fold upwards.

% The cup holder wings can be folded down wards and engaged. The cup holder's hold ing function will then not be available. Opening or closing the cup holder in the rear armrest

* NOTE Damage to the rear seat armrest When folded out, the rear seat armrest can be damaged by the weight of your body.

# Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest. When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged.

# Only fold the rear armrest back when the cup holder is closed.

* NOTE Damage to the cup holder

# To close: push the cup holder 1 or 2 back until it engages.

# To open: press cup holder 1 or 2. The cup holder 1 or 2 extends automati cally.

# While driving: place the closed ashtray in the front door stowage compartment while driving.

# Check that it is seated firmly.

# Comply with the notes on loading the vehicle

( page 98).

# To open: fold lid 1 upwards.

% Twist the top part of the ashtray to remove it for cleaning, e.g. with clear, lukewarm water, or for emptying. Using the cigarette lighter in the front centre console

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from the hot cigarette lighter You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga rette lighter. In addition, flammable materials may ignite if:

R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example

# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.

# Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Seats and stowing 111

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Requirements:

R The ignition is switched on. Sockets 12 V socket in the front centre console Requirements:

R Only devices with up to a maximum of 180 watts (15 A) are permissible.

# Press in cigarette lighter 1. The cigarette lighter will pop out automati cally when the heating element is red-hot.

# Lift up socket cap 1.

# Insert the plug of the device. 12 V socket in the stowage compartment with cover: if you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment open. 112 Seats and stowing Using the 230 V socket in the rear

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam aged connecting cables or sockets When a suitable device is connected, the 230 V power socket will be carrying a high voltage. You could receive an electric shock if the connecting cable or the 230 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet.

# Use only connecting cables that are dry and free of damage.

# When the ignition is switched off, make sure that the 230 V power socket is dry.

# Immediately have the 230 V power socket checked or replaced at a quali fied specialised workshop if it is dam aged or has been pulled out of the trim.

# Never plug the connecting cable into a 230 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor rect handling of the socket You could receive an electric shock:

R if you reach into the socket. R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects into the socket.

# Only connect suitable devices to the socket. Requirements:

R Devices must be equipped with a suitable plug which conforms to the standards spe cific to the country you are in. R Only devices up to a maximum of 150 watts are permitted. R Multiple sockets are not permitted.

# Open flap 3.

# Insert the plug of the device into 230 V socket 1. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp 2 lights up. USB port in the rear If the ignition is switched on you can charge a USB device, e.g. a mobile phone, at USB ports 1 using a suitable charging cable. Seats and stowing 113

# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment If you place objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment, they may heat up excessively and even catch fire.

# Do not place additional objects, espe cially those mode of metal, in the mobile phone stowage compartment. Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial Notes on wireless charging of the mobile phone

& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

# Always stow objects so that they can not be thrown around in such situa tions.

# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. 114 Seats and stowing

* NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stow age compartment If you place objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment, these may be dam aged by electromagnetic fields.

# Do not place credit cards, storage media or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone stowage compartment.

* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged.

# Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment. R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior aerial via the charging module. R The charging function and wireless connec tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior aerial are only available if the ignition is switched on. R Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment. R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior aerial. R The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This depends on the appli cations (apps) currently running. R To ensure more efficient charging and con nection with the vehicle's exterior aerial, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protective covers which are designed for wireless charging are excluded. Wireless charging of the mobile phone in the front Requirements:

R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging (Qi compatible mobile phone).

% A list of Qi compatible mobile phones can be found at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/

connect.

# Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. When the charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the multimedia system display.

% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water. Stowage compartment without cover Secure your mobile phone so it does not get thrown about during the journey.

# To secure mobile phone: swing lever 2 out. Fitting/removing the floor mats

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. Seats and stowing 115

# To install: slide the seat backwards and lay the floor mat into the footwell.

# Press the studs 1 onto the holders 2.

# Adjust the corresponding seat.

# To remove: pull the floor mat off the holders 2.

# Remove the floor mat. Light switch Operating the light switch 116 Light and sight Exterior lighting Notes on changing the lights when driving abroad It is not necessary to change the headlamps. The legal requirements are also met in countries where traffic drives on the other side of the road. Lighting systems and your responsibility The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation. 5 L Dipped beam/main beam 6 R Switches the rear fog light on or off When dipped beam is activated, the indicator lamp for the standing lights T is deactivated and replaced by the dipped beam indicator lamp L.

# Always park your vehicle safely and in a well-

lit area, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations.

* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery.

# Where possible, switch on the right X or left W parking light. 1 W Left-hand parking lights 2 X Right-hand parking lights 3 T Standing lights and licence plate light In the case of severe battery discharging, the standing lights or parking lights are automati cally switched off to facilitate the next engine start. 4 Automatic driving lights (preferred light ing switch position) Activating/deactivating the rear fog light Requirements:

R The light switch is in the L or posi tion.

# Press the R button. Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps. Adjusting the headlamp range (halogen headlamps) The headlamp range adjuster allows you to adjust the cone of light from the headlamps in relation to the vehicle's load condition. The exterior lighting (except standing and park ing lights) switches off automatically when the driver's door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting

( page 124). Automatic driving lights function The standing lights, dipped beam and daytime running lights are switched on automatically depending on the ignition status, whether the engine is running and the light conditions.

& WARNING Risk of accident when the dipped beam is switched off in poor visi bility When the light switch is set to , the dipped beam may not be switched on auto matically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray.

# In such cases, turn the light switch to L. The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting. Light and sight 117 g Driver's seat and front passenger seat occu 1 Driver's seat, front passenger seat and rear pied seats occupied 2 Driver's seat, front passenger seat and rear seats occupied, load compartment laden 3 Driver's seat and front passenger seat occu pied and maximum permissible rear axle load utilised 118 Light and sight

# Turn the headlamp range adjuster to the position that corresponds to the load condi tion of your vehicle. 3 Headlamp flasher 4 Turn signal light, left Operating the combination switch for the lights

# Use the combination switch to activate the desired function. Main beam

# To switch on: turn the light switch to the L or position.

# Press the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. When the main beam is activated, the indica tor lamp for dipped beam L is deactiva ted and replaced by the indicator lamp for the main beam K.

# To switch off: press the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 or pull in the direction of arrow 3. Headlamp flasher

# Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3. Turn signal lights

# To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly up to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal light flashes three times.

# To indicate permanently: press the combi nation switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. Vehicles with Active Lane Keeping Assist: Active Lane Keeping Assist can:

R lengthen turn signal operation for the duration of the lane change if the driver has activated the turn signal indicator. R automatically activate the turn signal indi cator if the driver indicated to turn in that direction immediately before but a lane change was not immediately possible. 1 Main beam 2 Turn signal light, right Activating/deactivating the hazard warning light Light and sight 119 Active headlamps function The hazard warning lamps switch off automati cally when the vehicle reaches a speed exceed ing 10 km/h following maximum full-stop brak ing. Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED Functions of the Intelligent Light System The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation and provide exten ded functions for improving illumination of the road. The system comprises the following functions:

R Active headlamps( page 119) R Cornering light( page 120) R Motorway mode ( page 120) R City lighting ( page 120) System limitations R The system is active only when it is dark. R The headlamps follow the steering move R Relevant areas are better illuminated during ments. travel. The functions are active when the main beam is switched on.

# Press the 1 button. The hazard warning lamps switch on automati cally if:

R The airbag has been deployed. R The vehicle brakes sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill. 120 Light and sight Cornering light function Roundabout and intersection function: the cornering light is activated on both sides through an evaluation of the current GPS position of the vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or the intersection. Motorway mode function Motorway mode increases the range and bright ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibil ity. The cornering light improves the illumination of the carriageway over a wide angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for example. It can be activated only when the dipped beam is switched on. The function is active:

R At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn sig nal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned. R At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h when the steering wheel is turned. The function is active if a motorway journey is detected by:

R The vehicle's speed. R The multifunction camera. R The GPS. The function is not active:

R At speeds below 80 km/h. Function of City lighting City lighting improves the illumination of road sides within built-up areas using a broader distri bution of light. The function is active:

R at lower speeds R in illuminated parts of built-up areas. Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off Requirement:

R the ignition is switched on Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Lights . Multi-

beam LED

# Activate or deactivate the function.

# Always observe the traffic carefully and switch off the main beam in good time. System limitations Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted if:

R Visibility is impaired, for example in fog, heavy rain or snow. R There is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi tions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function of Adaptive Highbeam Assist

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recog nise the following road users:

R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. trians cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic main beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. Light and sight 121 Adaptive Highbeam Assist switches automati cally between:

R Dipped beam R Main beam At speeds above 30 km/h:

R If no other road users are detected, the main beam is automatically switched on. 122 Light and sight The main beam switches off automatically:

R At speeds below 25 km/h. R If other road users are detected. R If street lighting is sufficient. At speeds above approx. 50 km/h:

R The headlamp range of the dipped beam is regulated automatically based on the dis tance to other road users. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function

# Always observe the traffic carefully and switch off the main beam in good time.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not rec ognise the following road users:

R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. trians cyclists System limitations Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted if:

R Visibility is impaired, for example in fog, heavy rain or snow. R There is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traf fic conditions. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off

# To switch on: turn the light switch to R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier the position.

# Switch on the main beam using the combina tion switch. When the main beam is switched on auto matically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display comes on.

# To switch off: switch off the main beam using the combination switch. On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road users that have lights, or may recognise them too late. In this, or in similar situations, the automatic main beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. them. The vehicle in front is illuminated by the dipped beam. At speeds above 30 km/h:

R If no other road users are detected, the main beam is automatically switched on. R If other road users are detected, the partial main beam is automatically switched on. At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is suffi cient street lighting:

R The main beam switches off automatically. R The partial main beam switches off automati cally. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off

# To switch on: turn the light switch to the position. Light and sight 123

# Switch on the main beam using the combina tion switch. When the main beam is switched on auto matically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp on the multifunction display comes on.

# To switch off: switch off the main beam using the combination switch. Setting the dipped beam Vehicles with MULTIBEAM LED headlamps only. Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Lights . Dipped-

beams

# Select Right-side traffic, Left-side traffic or Automatic. Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time Requirements:

R The light switch is in the position. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus switches auto matically between:

R Dipped beam R Partial main beam R Main beam The partial main beam uses the main beam to shine past other road users rather than dazzling 124 Light and sight Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Lights . Exterior light shut-off The exterior lighting is activated for the config ured time when the vehicle is parked.

# Set the switch-off delay time. Switching the surround lighting on/off Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Lights . Sur-

round lighting The exterior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the surround lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated.

# Activate or deactivate the function. Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting Front overhead control panel Control panel in the grab handle 1 p Front left reading lamp 2 | Automatic interior lighting control 3 c Front interior lighting 4 u Rear interior lighting 5 p Front right reading lamp

# To switch on or off: press the 1 - 5 but ton. 1 p Rear reading lamp

# To switch on or off: press the 1 button. Adjusting the ambient lighting Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Lights . Ambient lighting Setting the colour and brightness

# Select Settings.

# Set the colour and brightness values.

% 64 colours are available. Activating the brightness for zones

# Select Settings.

# Select Brightness zones.

# Activate or deactivate the function. The Emphasis, Ambient and Vents zones can be set separately.

% Fewer zones may be available depending on the vehicle equipment. Activating multi-coloured lighting

# Select Settings.

# Select Multi-colour.

# Activate or deactivate the function. There are ten preset colour combinations available. Activating multi-coloured animation

# Select Multi-colour animat..

# Activate or deactivate the function. The chosen colour combination changes in a predefined rhythm. Activating welcome lighting

# Select Welcome.

# Activate or deactivate the function. When the vehicle is unlocked, a special inte rior lighting sequence runs. Activating dependency on air conditioning settings

# Select Climate.

# Activate or deactivate the function. If changes are made to the temperature set ting in the vehicle, the colour of the ambient lighting changes briefly. Switching the inner switch-off delay time on/off Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Lights . Interior light shut-off

# Switch the switch-off delay time on or off. Light and sight 125 Changing bulbs (only for vehicles with halo gen headlamps) Notes on changing bulbs

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts whilst replacing a bulb Bulbs, lamps and plugs can become very hot during operation. When replacing a bulb, you could burn your self on these component parts.

# Allow the component parts to cool down before replacing the bulb. R Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its glass has been scratched. The bulb may otherwise explode. R Do not touch the glass bulb with your bare hands. R Protect bulbs from moisture and do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids. 126 Light and sight Halogen headlamps Overview of the bulbs to be changed Tail lamps Changing the front bulbs (vehicles with halo gen headlamps) Fitting/removing the cover on the front wheel arch Requirements:

R The lighting system is switched off. R The appropriate front wheel is turned inwards. 1 Main beam: bulb H7 55 W 2 Dipped beam: bulb H7 55 W 1 Turn signal light: bulb PY 21 W 2 Reversing light: bulb W 16 W Light and sight 127 Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system Switching the windscreen wipers on/off

# To remove: turn the cover 1 to the left and remove it from the wheel arch liner.

# To install: insert the cover 1 into the wheel arch liner and turn it to the right until it engages. Replacing bulbs in the halogen headlamp Requirements:

R Dipped beam: bulb type H7 55 W R Main beam: bulb type H7 55 W

# Switch the lighting system off.

# Remove the cover in the front wheel arch

( page 126).

# Turn the relevant housing cover anti-clock wise and remove it.

# Turn the socket anti-clockwise and remove it.

# Pull the bulb out of the socket.

# Insert the new bulb into the socket such that the entire base of the bulb is resting on the bottom of the socket.

# Insert the socket and turn it clockwise.

# Press on the housing cover and turn it clock

# Replace the cover in the front wheel arch wise.

( page 126). Changing the rear bulbs (vehicles with halo gen headlamps) Replacing the tail lamp bulbs

# Due to their locations, have the bulbs for the turn signal light and reversing light changed at a qualified specialist workshop. 1 Dipped beam housing cover 2 Main beam housing cover 1 Single wipe / wipes with washer fluid 1 g Windscreen wipers off 2 Intermittent wiping, normal Vehicles with rain sensor: normal automatic wiping 128 Light and sight 3 Intermittent wiping, frequent Vehicles with rain sensor: frequent auto matic wiping 4 Continuous wiping, slow 5 Continuous wiping, fast

# Turn the combination switch to the correct position 1 - 5.

# Single wipe / washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R Single wipe R Wiping with washer fluid Switching the rear window wiper on/off

# Switching intermittent wiping on or off:

press button 2. The symbol appears on the instrument cluster when the rear window wiper is switched on. Replacing the windscreen wiper blades

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

# Always switch off the windscreen wip ers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. Removing the wiper blades

# Switch off the ignition. 1 Single wipe / washing 2 Intermittent wiping

# Single wipe: press button 1 to the point of resistance.

# Wiping with washer fluid: press button 1 beyond the point of resistance.

# Within around 15 seconds, press button 1 on the combination switch ( page 127). The wiper arms move into the change posi tion.

# Fold the wiper arms away from the wind shield. tion of arrow 1 away from the wiper arm as far as it will go.

# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1.

# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the removal position.

# Remove the wiper blade in the direction of arrow 4 away from the wiper arm.

# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking position.

# Make sure that the wiper blade sits correctly.

# Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind Fitting the wiper blades screen. Maintenance display Light and sight 129

# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direc 130 Light and sight

# Remove protective film 1 of the mainte nance display on the tip of the newly fitted wiper blades. If the colour of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced.

% The duration of the colour change varies depending on the usage conditions. Changing the rear window wiper blade Removing the wiper blade

# Switch off the ignition. Fitting the wiper blade

# Fold wiper arm 2 away from the rear win dow until it engages in the change position.

# Unclip wiper blade 1 on wiper arm 2 and remove it in the direction of arrow 3.

# Position wiper blade 1 with both lugs 3 on holder 2 on the wiper arm.

# Press wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow 4 until it engages in the holder 2.

# Make sure that wiper blade 1 sits correctly.

# Fold the wiper arm from the change position back onto the rear window. Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors

& WARNING Risk of injury through adjust ing vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations:

R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi cle is in motion

# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis judgement of distances when using the outside mirror The outside mirrors reflect objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. As a result, you may misjudge the distance between you and the road user driving behind you, e.g. when changing lanes.

# Therefore, always look over your shoul der in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you. Light and sight 131

# To fold in or out: briefly press button 2.

# To set: press button 1 or 3 to select the outside mirror to be adjusted.

# Press button 4 to adjust the position of the mirror glass. 132 Light and sight

% If the battery has been disconnected or com pletely discharged, you must reset the out side mirrors. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.

# To adjust: briefly press button 2. An outside mirror that has been pushed out of position can be engaged in position again in the following manner:

# Vehicles without electrically folding out side mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into the correct position.

# Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: press and hold button 2. You will hear a click and the mirror will audi bly engage in position. The outside mirror is set to the correct position. Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function

& WARNING Risk of burns and poisoning due to the anti-dazzle mirror electrolyte Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irrita tion. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.

# If you come into contact with electro lyte, observe the following:

R Rinse the electrolyte from your skin and seek medical attention immedi ately. R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, rinse them thor oughly with clean water and seek medical attention immediately. R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. R Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with electrolyte. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. The inside rear-view mirror and the outside mir ror on the driver's side automatically go into anti-dazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rear-view mirror. System limitations The system does not go into anti-dazzle mode in the following situations:

R the engine is switched off. R reverse gear is engaged R the interior lighting is switched on Function of the passenger outside mirror parking position

% The parking position is available only in vehi cles with a memory function. The parking position makes parking easier. The passenger outside mirror tilts downwards and shows the rear wheel on the front passenger side in the following situations:

R the parking position is stored ( page 133) R the passenger mirror is selected R reverse gear is engaged The passenger outside mirror moves back to its original position in the following situations:

R if you shift the transmission to another trans mission position R at speeds greater than 15 km/h R if you press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side Storing Storing the parking position of the passenger outside mirror using reverse gear Calling up

# Press button 1 to select the passenger out Light and sight 133 side mirror.

# Engage reverse gear. The passenger outside mirror moves to the stored parking position. Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Vehicle

# Activate or deactivate Auto. fold-in mirrors.

# Press button 1 to select the passenger out side mirror.

# Engage reverse gear.

# Move the passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button 2. 134 Light and sight Operating the sun visors Using the single sun visor

# Glare from the front: fold sun visor 1

# Glare from the side: swing sun visor 1 to down. the side. Climate control 135 Overview of climate control systems THERMATIC control panel overview The indicator lamps in the buttons , , ,

, g, and & indicate that the corresponding function is activated. 6 Switches the rear window heater 7 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off 8 Switches the A/C function on/off on/off

( page 138)

( page 136) 9 Button without function A _ Sets the air distribution THERMOTRONIC control panel overview The indicator lamps in the buttons , ,

, g, , 0 and & indicate that the corresponding function is activated. 1 w Sets the driver side temperature 2 _ Sets the air distribution 3 H Sets the airflow or switches off climate control 4 Sets climate control to automatic mode ( page 136) 5 Demists the windscreen 6 Switches the rear window heater 7 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off 8 Switches the A/C function on/off on/off

( page 138)

( page 136) 1 w Sets the temperature 2 Button without function 3 H Sets the airflow or switches off climate control 4 Sets climate control to automatic mode ( page 136) 5 Demists the windscreen 136 Climate control Switches the residual heat on/off

( page 138) 9 0 Activates or deactivates synchronisa tion ( page 137) A w Sets the front passenger side tempera ture Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off

# To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or higher using the H button.

# To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using the H button.

% If climate control is switched off, the win dows may mist up more quickly. Switch off climate control only briefly. Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the control panel The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air.

# Press button . Deactivate the A/C function only briefly other wise the windows can mist up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not a sign that there is a malfunction. The compressor function is deactivated in the following cases:

R when driving uphill or downhill at a gradient of more than 35 %

R when driving in across an incline of more than 35 %

Calling up the air conditioning menu

% The button on the control panel is not availa ble on all equipment variants. In this case, the air conditioning menu can only be called up using the multimedia system. Activating/deactivating the A/C function using the multimedia system The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air.

# Calling up the air conditioning menu

( page 136).

# Select A/C. Depending on the previous status, the func tion is activated or deactivated. Calling up the air conditioning menu using the multimedia system

# Select the temperature display at the bottom edge of the screen. Calling up the air conditioning menu using the button on the control panel

# Press the b button on the control panel. Setting climate control to automatic mode In automatic mode, the set temperature is con trolled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply.

# Press the button.

# To switch to manual mode: press the _ or button. In automatic mode, you can choose between five different air quantities using the H button. Automatic mode is retained. Air distribution settings The symbols on the display indicate which vents the airflow is being directed through:

R defroster and side air vents R P centre and side air vents R O footwell and side air vents R S centre, side and footwell vents R a defroster, footwell and side air vents R _ all vents R b defroster, middle and side air vents R W automatic air distribution Setting the air distribution

# Call up the air conditioning menu

( page 136).

# To set the air distribution: select , P or O.

# Set the airflow.

% Several air distribution options can be selec ted at the same time, for example to set the temperature/air conditioning for the wind screen and the footwells simultaneously. Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronisation function via the control panel Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronisation function. The temperature and air distribution setting for the driver side is adop ted automatically for the front passenger side.

# Press button 0. The synchronisation function is deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate zones are changed. Climate control 137 Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronisation function using the multime dia system Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronisation function. The temperature set ting is automatically adopted for all climate zones.

# Calling up the air conditioning menu

( page 136).

# Select SYNC. Depending on the previous status, the func tion is activated or deactivated. Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside

# Press the button.

# If the windows continue to mist up: press the button. Windows misted up on the outside

# Switch on the windscreen wipers.

# Press the button. 138 Climate control Switching air-recirculation mode on/off Air vents

# Press the g button. The interior air will be recirculated. Air-recirculation mode automatically switches back to fresh-air mode after some time depend ing on the A/C function (air conditioning system is switched on or off).

% If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly. Switching the residual heat on/off Requirements:

R The vehicle is parked. It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilat ing the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes.

# To switch on: press the button. Residual heat is switched off automatically. Adjusting the front air vents

& WARNING Risk of burns/frostbite due to not maintaining a sufficient distance to the air vents Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents.

# Always ensure that all vehicle occu pants maintain a sufficient distance to the air vents.

# If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

# To open or close: turn the centre of the air vent 1 to the left or right as far as it will go.

# To adjust the air direction: hold air vent 1 in the centre and move it up or down or to the left or right. Adjusting the rear air vents Climate control 139

# To open or close: turn controller 2 to the left or right as far as it will go.

# To adjust the air direction: hold rear air vent 1 in the centre and move it up or down or to the left or right. 140 Driving and parking Driving Switching on the power supply or ignition using the start/stop button

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could:

R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out of the vehicle and be hit by oncoming traffic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, children could also set the vehi cle in motion, for example, by:

R releasing the parking brake. R shifting the automatic transmission out of park position j or shifting manual trans mission into idle position. R starting the engine.

# Never leave children and animals unat tended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key sticker and mobile phones if the

"Digital Vehicle Key in the smartphone"

function is activated via the Mercedes me connect web app.

# Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key sticker and mobile phones if the "Digital Vehicle Key in the smart phone" function is activated via the Mercedes me connect web app.

& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases causes poisoning.

# Never leave the engine running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.

& WARNING Risk of fire caused by flam mable material on the exhaust system Flammable materials brought in by either ani mals or environmental influences may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the engine or exhaust system.

# Therefore, check regularly that there are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system. Requirements:

R the key is located in the vehicle and the key battery is not discharged. R or an already activated Digital Vehicle Key sticker is located in the marked space

( page 142). R or the mobile phone is located in the marked space and the "Digital Vehicle Key" function has been activated via the Mercedes me con nect web app ( page 142).

# To switch on the power supply: press but ton 1 once. You can activate the windscreen wiper, for example. The power supply is switched off again if the fol lowing conditions are met:

R you open the driver's door. R you press button 1 twice.

# To switch on the ignition: press button 1 twice. The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. The ignition is switched off again if one of the following conditions is met:

R you do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes. The transmission is in position j. or The electric parking brake is applied. R you press button 1 once. Driving and parking 141 Starting the vehicle Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but ton Requirements:

R the key is located in the vehicle and the key battery is not discharged. R or an already activated Digital Vehicle Key sticker is located in the marked space

( page 142). R or the mobile phone is located in the marked space and the "Digital Vehicle Key" function has been activated via the Mercedes me con nect web app ( page 142).

# Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift the transmission to position j or i.

# depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once.

# If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-

essential consumers and press button 1 once. 142 Driving and parking If the vehicle still does not start, one of the fol lowing display messages appears in the multi function display:

# Place the key in the marked space See Own-

er's Manual: start the vehicle in emergency operation mode ( page 143). or

# Key not detected Place smartphone in charg-

ing bracket: place the mobile phone in the marked space ( page 114). You can switch off the engine while driving by pressing button 1 for about three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips". Starting vehicle with mobile phone or Digital Vehicle Key sticker Requirements:

R the vehicle is equipped with the "Digital Vehi cle Key" function and the service was activa ted. R a Digital Vehicle Key sticker or R a suitable mobile phone with NFC aerial

the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is acti vated via the Mercedes me connect web app: http://www.mercedes.me. a sufficient charge level on the mobile phone. On some mobile phones, the function is also available when the battery is discharged.

% You can check the suitability of your mobile phone by entering the phone number at http://www.mercedes.me. Information about suitable mobile phones can be obtained from your Mercedes-Benz service centre or at http://www.mercedes-

benz.com/connect.

% Mercedes-Benz recommends that you carry the emergency key in case of function restrictions.

% The function is only available in combination with Mercedes me connect and only in cer tain countries.

% Protective cases around the mobile phone can impair the range of functions.

# If necessary, make sure that the charge level of the mobile phone is sufficient. If neces sary, charge the mobile phone before start ing the journey. Initial start

# Make sure that there is a valid vehicle key in the vehicle.

# Place the mobile phone or the Digital Vehicle Key sticker in the middle of the marked space 1.

# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button.

% The key is not needed for any further starts. Any further starts

# Place the mobile phone or the Digital Vehicle Key sticker in the middle of the marked space 1 and leave it there during the jour ney.

# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button. The "Digital Vehicle Key" service can be deacti vated in Mercedes me connect at http://

www.mercedes.me. The function is then deacti vated in the smartphone via an online connec tion. If connection to the Internet is not possible, e.g. after the mobile phone has been stolen, the key function can be deactivated at a Mercedes-

Benz service centre. Starting the vehicle in emergency operation mode If the vehicle does not start and the Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual display message appears in the multifunction display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode. Marked space (example with cup holder without cover)

# Open the cover of marked space 2 if neces sary.

# Make sure that marked space 2 is empty.

# Remove key 1 from the key ring. Driving and parking 143

# Place key 1 in marked space 2 on the symbol 3. The vehicle will start after a short time. If you remove key 1 from marked space 2 the engine continues running. For further vehicle starts however, key 1 must be loca ted in marked space 2 on symbol 3 during the entire journey.

# Have the key 1 checked at a qualified spe cialist workshop. If the vehicle does not start:

# place key 1 in marked space 2 and leave it there.

# depress the brake pedal.

# start the vehicle using the start/stop button.

% You can also switch on the power supply or the ignition with the start/stop button. 144 Driving and parking Starting the vehicle via Remote Online serv ices Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before starting a journey

% This function is not available in all countries. If you start the vehicle via your smartphone, the previously selected air conditioning setting is active. Ensure the following before starting the engine:

R the legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. Charging the battery before commencing your journey

% This function is not available in all countries. R If the vehicle battery is discharged, you receive a message on your smartphone. R You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. R The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes. Ensure the following before starting the engine:

R the legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R it is safe to start and run the engine where R the fuel tank is sufficiently filled. R the starter battery is sufficiently charged. your vehicle is parked. R the fuel tank is sufficiently filled.

% You can also set the temperature with your smartphone. Information on Mercedes me connect and other services: http://

www.mercedes.me Starting the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap ment due to unintentional starting of the engine Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work.

# Always secure the engine against unin tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work. Requirements:

R park position j is selected. R the anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R the panic alarm is not activated. R the hazard warning lights are switched off. R the bonnet is closed. R the doors are closed and locked. R the windows and sliding sunroof are closed.

# Start the vehicle using the smartphone:

R after every vehicle start, the engine runs for ten minutes. R you can carry out a maximum of two consec utive starting attempts. The vehicle must be started once with the key before trying to start the vehicle again with the smartphone. R you can stop the vehicle again at any time. R further information can be found in the smartphone app. Securing the engine against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work:

# switch on the hazard warning lights. or

# unlock the doors. or

# open a side window or the sliding sunroof. Running-in notes To preserve the engine during the first 1,500 km:

R drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds. R drive in drive program C or E. R change gear before the rev counter needle is of the way to the red area of the rev coun ter. R do not shift down a gear manually in order to R avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at brake. full throttle. R vehicles with automatic transmission: do not depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). R only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1,500 km. This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Please also observe the following running-in notes:

R In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a cer tain distance is driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system Driving and parking 145 effectiveness is not achieved until the end of this teach-in process. R Brake linings, brake discs and tyres that are either new or have been replaced only ach ieve optimum braking effect and grip after several hundred kilometres of driving. Com pensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Notes on driving

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.

# Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that

& WARNING Risk of accident due to ing. 146 Driving and parking there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. unsuitable footwear Operating the pedals may be impaired by wearing unsuitable footwear, e.g.:

R platform shoes R high-heeled shoes R slippers

# Always wear suitable footwear when driving so that you can operate the ped als safely.

& WARNING Risk of accident when switch ing off the ignition when driving If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example. You will then need to use considerably more force to steer and brake.

# Do not switch off the ignition while driv

& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases causes poisoning.

# Never leave the engine running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.

& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction.

# Do not shift down on slippery road sur faces to increase the engine braking effect.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to poi sonous exhaust gases If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi cle. This is the case, for example, if the vehi cle is stuck in snow.

# When the engine or the stationary heater are running, keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle clear of snow.

# Open a window on the side of the vehi cle facing the wind to ensure an ade quate supply of fresh air.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and brake system overheating engine when pulling away If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may over heat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail.

# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.

# Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.

* NOTE Causing wear to the brake linings by permanently depressing the brake pedal

# Do not permanently depress the brake pedal while driving.

# To use braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.

# Do not warm up the engine when sta tionary. Pull away immediately.

# Avoid high engine speeds and full throt tle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.

# Do not allow the wheels to spin.

* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata lytic converter.

# Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.

# Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving and parking 147 Limited braking effect on salt-treated roads:

R due to salt build-up on the brake discs and brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side. R maintain a much greater safe distance to the vehicle in front. To prevent salt build-up:

R brake occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions. R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey. ECO start/stop function Operation of the ECO start/stop function The engine is automatically switched off if the following conditions are met:

R you brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans mission position h or i. R if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met. 148 Driving and parking The symbol appears in the multifunction display when the vehicle is stationary. If not all the vehicle conditions are met, the symbol appears in the multifunction display. The engine is restarted automatically if:

R you release the brake pedal in transmission position h when the HOLD function is not active. R you shift from transmission position j. R you engage transmission position h or k. R you depress the accelerator pedal. R you change the vehicle level. R an automatic engine start is necessary. If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/

stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn ing tone sounds. The Vehicle is operational Switch off the ignition before exiting display message also appears in the multifunction dis play. If you do not switch off the ignition, the ignition is automatically switched off after one minute. Switching the ECO start/stop function off/on Function of the ECO display The ECO display summarises the driving style from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economi cal driving style. You can influence consumption if you:

R drive with particular care R drive the vehicle in drive program E R observe the gearshift recommendations

# Press button 1. A display appears in the instrument cluster when switching the ECO start/stop function off/on.

% A continuous display appears in the instru ment cluster while the ECO start/stop func tion is deactivated. The lettering in the segment lights up brightly, the outer edge lights up and the segment fills up in the following situations:

R 1 steady speed R 2 gentle deceleration and rolling R 3 moderate acceleration The lettering in the segment is grey, the outer edge is dark and the segment empties in the fol lowing situations R 1 fluctuations in speed R 2 heavy braking R 3 sporty acceleration You have driven economically when:

R the three segments are fill up completely at the same time R the edge around all three segments lights up The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison to a driver with a very sporty driving style is shown in the centre of the display 4. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in consumption. DYNAMIC SELECT switch Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs:

R I (Individual): individual settings R S (Sport): sporty driving style R C (Comfort): comfortable and economical driving style R E (Eco): particularly economical driving style Depending on the drive program selected, the following vehicle characteristics will change:

R drive

engine and transmission management Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

R ESP R Vehicles with DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL:

suspension R steering Driving and parking 149 Selecting the drive program

# Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards or backwards. The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display. 150 Driving and parking Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia system) Multimedia system:

, . Settings . DYNAMIC SELECT Setting drive program I

# Select Individual config..

# Select and set a category. Restoring the last drive program

# Select Restore settings. When the function is active, a prompt appears after the vehicle is started to ask if the last drive program set should be restored. If this function is not active, the Comfort drive program will be set automati cally when the vehicle is started.

# Activate or deactivate the function. Displaying vehicle data Multimedia system:

, . Vehicle info

# Select Vehicle. The vehicle data is displayed. Displaying engine data Multimedia system:

, . Vehicle info

# Select Engine. The engine data is displayed. Calling up fuel consumption indicator Multimedia system:

, . Vehicle info

# Select Consumption. A display with current and average consump tion figures is shown. Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever

% The values for engine output and engine tor que may deviate from the nominal values. Items that can influence this are, for exam ple:

R Engine speed R Sea level R Fuel grade R Outside temperature

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could:

R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out of the vehicle and be hit by oncoming traffic. R Operate vehicle equipment.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor Driving and parking 151 rect gearshifting If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply.

# If you engage the transmission position h or k always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time. Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the trans mission position. The current transmission posi tion is displayed in the multifunction display. Moreover, children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example:

R Releasing the parking brake. R Shifting the transmission out of park position j. R Starting the engine.

# Never leave children and animals unat tended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to mobile phones if the

"Digital Car Key in the smartphone"

function is activated via the Mercedes me connect web app.

# Keep the keys out of the reach of chil dren. This also applies to mobile phones if the "Digital Car Key in the smartphone" function is activated via the Mercedes me connect web app. j Park position k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive position 152 Driving and parking Engaging reverse gear R

# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. The transmission position display shows k in the multifunction display. Engaging idle N

# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. The transmission position display shows i in the multifunction display. Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in idle N even if the ignition is switched off:

# Start the vehicle.

# depress the brake pedal and shift to idle i.

# release the brake pedal.

# switch off the ignition.

% if you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in the vehicle, the automatic transmission remains in idle i. Engaging park position P

# Press button j. The transmission position display shows j in the multifunction display. Park position j is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met:

R you switch the engine off with the transmis sion in position h or k. R you open the driver's door when the vehicle is at a standstill or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position h or k.

% At very low outside temperatures from approx. -20 C you may not be able to shift the transmission from j to another trans mission position when the engine is switched off. If this is the case, only change the transmission position while the engine is running. Engaging drive position D

# Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. The transmission position display shows h in the multifunction display. When the automatic transmission is in transmis sion position h, it shifts the gears automati cally. This depends on the following factors:

R the selected drive program R the position of the accelerator pedal R the driving speed Manual gearshifting

& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction.

# To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1. If you pull and hold the steering wheel gear shift paddle 1, the transmission shifts to the lowest possible gear.

# To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2 and hold it in place. The transmission position h appears in the multifunction display.

% If you select the Manual drive setting in drive program I, manual gearshifting is per manently activated. Gearshift recommendation The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.

# Do not shift down on slippery road sur faces to increase the engine braking effect.

# To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1 or 2. Manual gearshifting is activated for a short time. The current gear is displayed in the multifunction display.

% How long manual gearshifting is activated for depends on your driving style.

# To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2. Driving and parking 153

# If gearshift recommendation message 1 is shown on the multifunction display, shift to the recommended gear. Using kickdown

# Maximum acceleration: depress the accel erator pedal beyond the pressure point. During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. The auto matic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached to protect the engine from overrevving. 154 Driving and parking Glide mode function With an anticipatory driving style, glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Glide mode is characterised by the following:

R the combustion engine is disconnected from the drivetrain and the vehicle continues to roll in neutral. R the transmission position h is displayed in green in the multifunction display. Glide mode is activated if the following condi tions are met:

R drive program E is selected. R the speed is within a suitable range. R the road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends. R there is no trailer coupled to the trailer hitch, and no bicycle rack fitted. R you are no longer depressing the accelerator or brake pedal.

% Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive when in drive program I. Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active Brake Assist: glide mode is also deactivated depending on the traffic situation and the vehi cle then switches to overrun mode. Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow ing parameters:

R incline R downhill gradient R temperature R height R speed R operating status of the engine

% Glide mode can be deactivated by actuating the right-hand steering wheel gearshift pad dle ( page 152). Refuelling Refuelling the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly flammable.

# Fire, naked flames, smoking and creat ing sparks must be avoided.

# Switch off the ignition and, if it has been in use, switch off the stationary heater before you refuel your vehicle.

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuel Fuels are poisonous and harmful to your health

# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

# Do not inhale fuel vapour.

# Keep children away from fuel. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with

& WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture soap and water.

# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten tion immediately. Do not induce vomit ing.

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. to electrostatic charge Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and thereby ignite fuel vapours.

# Touch the metal vehicle body before opening the fuel filler cap or touching the pump nozzle. This discharges any electrostatic charge that may have built up. Vehicles with a diesel engine:

If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. While the engine is running, component parts in the exhaust system may overheat without warning.

# Never refuel using petrol.

# Never mix petrol with diesel fuel. Vehicles with a petrol engine:

even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

# Only refuel using unleaded fuel that conforms to EN 228, or an equivalent specification.

# The RON requirement is located in the fuel filler flap.

& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Driving and parking 155 Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10 % ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Do not refuel using the following fuels:

R diesel R E85, E100 R petrol containing methanol (M15, M30, M85, M100) R petrol with additives containing metal If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:

# do not switch the ignition on.

# consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Vehicles with a diesel engine:

even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. 156 Driving and parking

# Only refuel using diesel fuel that con forms to EN 590, or an equivalent spec ification.

# Vehicles with diesel particulate fil ters: in countries outside the EU, only use low-sulphur Euro diesel with a sul phur content of under 50 ppm. Do not refuel using the following fuels:

R petrol R marine diesel R heating oil R bio-diesel R vegetable oil R paraffin R kerosene If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:

# do not switch the ignition on.

# consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi cles with a petrol engine. If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:

R Do not switch on the ignition. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

# Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

* NOTE Do not use petrol to refuel vehi cles with a diesel engine. If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:

R Do not switch on the ignition. Otherwise, fuel can enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

# Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

# Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

* NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by overfilled fuel tanks.

# Only fill the fuel tank until the fuel pump nozzle switches off. If you have added too much fuel because of a defective filling pump:

# do not switch the ignition on.

# consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle.

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Requirements:

R unlock the vehicle.

% Do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. Observe the notes on operating fluids

( page 433). Refuelling 1 Fuel filler flap 2 Bracket for the fuel filler cap Driving and parking 157 3 Fuel type 4 Tyre pressure table 5 QR code for rescue card

# Press on the back area of the fuel filler flap

# Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and 1. remove it.

# Insert the fuel filler cap into bracket 2.

# Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.

# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

% Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is designed for refuelling at diesel fill ing pumps.

% Vehicles with a diesel engine: when the fuel tank is completely empty, top up with at least 5 l of diesel.

% Vehicles with a diesel engine: use a filler neck with a large diameter for vehicles with a diesel engine when topping up fuel from a fuel can. Otherwise the filler neck cannot slide into the tank. AdBlue (diesel engine vehicles only) Notes on AdBlue

* NOTE When you open the AdBlue tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may escape.

# Only fill the AdBlue tank in well-venti lated areas.

# Do not let AdBlue come into contact with skin, eyes or clothes.

# Keep AdBlue away from children.

* NOTE Do not ingest AdBlue. If AdBlue is swallowed:

# Immediately rinse out your mouth thor oughly.

# Drink plenty of water. in AdBlue refill canisters or AdBlue refill bottles. Requirements R Unlock the vehicle. 158 Driving and parking

# Seek medical attention immediately. Please also observe the notes on service prod ucts and fuels ( page 433). AdBlue is a fluid urea solution for exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. In order for the exhaust gas aftertreatment to function properly, only use AdBlue in accordance with ISO 22241. AdBlue is characterised by the following:

R non-toxic R colourless and odourless R non-flammable AdBlue availability:

R AdBlue may be topped up by fast service at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. R AdBlue is available at many filling stations from AdBlue filling pumps. R Alternatively, AdBlue is available at qualified specialist workshops, e.g. Mercedes-Benz Service Centres, and at many filling stations

% Ensure the connection between the refill container and vehicle filler neck does not drip. Topping up AdBlue

* NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue in the fuel fuel tank. tank.

# AdBlue must not be used to fill the

# Only use AdBlue to fill the AdBlue

# Do not overfill the AdBlue tank.

* NOTE Contamination of the vehicle inte rior due to AdBlue leakage

# After topping up, carefully close the AdBlue refill container.

# Avoid carrying AdBlue refill containers permanently in the vehicle. The following messages appear in order in the multifunction display when the AdBlue tank requires refilling:

R Refill AdBlue See Owners Manual. The AdBlue tank is down to the reserve level. R Refill AdBlue No start in XXX miles. You can only drive the vehicle over the distance shown. Refill AdBlue as soon as possible. R Refill AdBlue Eng. start not possible. The vehicle can no longer be started. Opening the AdBlue fuel filler cap Preparing the AdBlue refill canister Topping up AdBlue Driving and parking 159

# Press on the back area of the fuel filler flap

# Screw on the fastener of AdBlue refill canis

# Turn AdBlue fuel filler cap 2 anti-clockwise 1. and remove it.

% You can also store the AdBlue fuel filler cap in the fuel filler cap holder in the in the fuel filler flap hinge arm. ter 2.

# Screw disposable hose 1 onto the opening of AdBlue refill canister 2 until hand-tight.

# Screw disposable hose 1 onto the filler neck of the vehicle until hand-tight.

# Lift up and tip AdBlue refill canister 2. The filling process stops when the AdBlue tank is completely full. AdBlue refill canister 2 can be removed when it has been only partially emptied. 160 Driving and parking

# Unscrew and close disposable hose 1 and AdBlue refill canister 2 in reverse order.

# Switch on the ignition for at least 60 sec onds.

% If the vehicle could not be started as the AdBlue container was empty, it can take up to 60 seconds for the refill to be detected.

# Start the vehicle.

% Avoid storing AdBlue refill containers per manently in the vehicle. Parking Parking the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow.

# Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components.

# In particular, do not park on dry grass land or harvested grain fields.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehi cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

R Releasing the parking brake. R Shifting the automatic transmission out of park position j. R Starting the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip ment and become trapped.

# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away ing away.

# Always secure the vehicle against roll 1 Start/stop button

# On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels towards the kerb.

# apply the electric parking brake.

# select transmission position j.

# switch off the ignition.

# lock the vehicle.

% When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately five minutes when the driver's door is closed. Garage door opener Programming buttons for the garage door opener

& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases causes poisoning.

# Never leave the engine running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.

& WARNING Risk of injury and entrapment when opening the garage door using the garage door opener When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door.

# When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the sweep of the garage door. Requirements:

R The vehicle is parked outside of the garage. R The engine is switched off. Driving and parking 161

# Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow.

% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi cator lamp flashes yellow.

# Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow. 162 Driving and parking

# Point remote control 5 at a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm towards buttons 1, 2 or 3.

# Press and hold button 6 of remote control 5 until:

R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green contin uously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Pro gramming was successful. Additionally, synchronisation of the rolling code with the garage door system must also be car ried out.

# If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure.

# Release all of the buttons.

% The remote control for the garage door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener. Synchronising the rolling code Requirements:

R The garage door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or exterior gate drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects, are located outside the sweep of the garage door.

# Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly, until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com pleted.

% Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door drive. Troubleshooting when programming the remote control

# Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.

# Check if the transmitter frequency of remote control 5 is supported.

# Replace the batteries in remote control 5.

# Hold remote control 5 at various angles at a distance between 1 cm to 8 cm in front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

# Hold remote control 5 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rear view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

# Note that some remote controls transmit only for a limited period, press button 6 on remote control 5 again before transmission ends.

# Align the aerial line of the garage door opener unit with the remote control.

% Support and additional information on pro gramming:

R On the HomeLink Hotline on (0) 08000 466 354 65 or +49 (0) 6838 907-277. R On the Internet at http://

www.homelink.com. Opening/closing the garage door Requirements:

R The corresponding button is programmed to operate the garage door. the previously pressed button again until the garage door opens or closes. Clearing the garage door opener memory Driving and parking 163

# Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the garage door opens or closes.

# If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after approximately 20 seconds: press and hold

# Press and hold buttons 1 and 3. Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow.

# If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release buttons 1 and 3. 164 Driving and parking Radio equipment approval numbers for the garage door opener Radio equipment approval numbers Country Radio equipment approval number Egypt TAC.2511151293.WIR Andorra CE Australia R-NZ Barbados MED1578 CE CE CE European Union Gibraltar Iceland Jordan Kuwait CE TRC/LPD/2015/299 Canada IC: 4112A-MUAHL5 Mexico RCPGEMU15-0448 Liechten stein CE Monaco CE New Zea land R-NZ Norway CE Russian Federa tion Saudi Ara bia Switzer land TA 10525 CE Chile 2488/DFRS20576/F-74 not required Country Radio equipment approval number Country Radio equipment approval number South Africa TA-2015/1386 Turkey not required United Arab Emi rates United States ER41849/15 Dealer No: DA35176/14 FCC ID: NZLMUAHL5 Brazil Electric parking brake Driving and parking 165 function is activated via the Mercedes connect me web app. The electric parking brake is applied if the trans mission is in position j and one of the follow ing conditions is fulfilled:

R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.

% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake. In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also engaged:

R The Active Distance Assistant DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill. R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle tionary. stationary. Electric parking brake function (applying automatically)

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If you leave children unattended in the vehi cle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

R Releasing the parking brake. R Shifting the automatic transmission out of park position j or shifting the manual transmission into neutral. R Starting the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip ment.

# Never leave children and animals unat tended in the vehicle.

# When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to mobile phones if the

"Digital Car Key in the smartphone"

Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito proteo contra interfer ncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Para maiores informaes acessar www.anatel.gov.br Further information on the declaration of con formity for wireless vehicle components

( page 23). 166 Driving and parking This is only the case if one of the following con ditions is also fulfilled:

R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insufficient. R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. When the electric parking brake is applied, the ! indicator lamp lights up in the instru ment cluster. The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Electric parking brake function (releasing automatically) The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled:

R The engine is running. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat. R The transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position j to h or k. R If the transmission is in position k, the boot lid must be closed. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, the follow ing conditions must be fulfilled:

R The driver's door is closed. R You move the transmission out of transmis sion position j or you have previously driven faster than 3 km/h. R If the transmission is in position k, the boot lid must be closed. If the electric parking brake is released, the ! indicator lamp in the instrument clus ter goes out. Applying or releasing the electric parking brake manually Applying

# Push handle 1. The red ! indicator lamp appears in the instrument cluster. Driving and parking 167

% The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the indicator lamp is lit continu ously. Releasing

# Switch the ignition on.

# Pull handle 1. The red ! indicator lamp in the instru ment cluster goes out. Emergency braking

# Press and hold handle 1. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The ! indicator lamp appears in the instrument cluster. Information on detecting damage on a parked vehicle If a collision is detected when the tow-away pro tection is activated on a locked vehicle, you will receive notification:

R On your smartphone. R In the multimedia system when you switch on the ignition. R an impact occurs at low speed R the electric parking brake is not applied You will receive information about the following points:

R The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged. R The force of the impact. The following situations can lead to inadvertent activation:

R The parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a two-

storey garage.

% Deactivate tow-away protection in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti vate tow-away protection, damage detection will also be deactivated. System limitations Detection may be restricted in the following sit uations:

R the vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g. if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key Information on Mercedes me connect and other services: http://www.mercedes.me. Notes on parking up the vehicle If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than four weeks, the disconnected battery may be damaged by deep discharge. If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, it may suffer disuse damage.

% Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Standby mode (extension of the starter bat tery's period out of use) Standby mode function

% This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, the vehicle can be parked for an extended period of time without losing power. 168 Driving and parking Standby mode is characterised by the following:

R the starter battery is preserved. R the maximum non-operational time out of use is displayed in the multimedia system display. R functions such as interior protection or tow-

away protection are not available. R the connection to online services is interrup ted. If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system:

R the engine is switched off. R the ignition is switched on. Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-opera tional time may cause inconvenience, i.e. it can not be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the engine. The starter battery must be charged first in the following situations:

R the vehicle's non-operational time must be extended. R the Battery charge insufficient for standby mode message appears in the MBUX multi media system display.

% Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on. and do not relieve you of your responsibility. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these sys tems. Activating or deactivating standby mode Function of the radar sensors Requirements:

R the engine is switched off. Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Fahrzeug (Vehicle)

# Switch Standby mode on or off. When you activate the function, a prompt appears.

# Select Yes. Standby mode is activated. Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and manoeu vring the vehicle. The driving systems are tools Some driving and driving safety systems use radar sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle (depending on the vehicle's equipment). Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radar sensors are integrated behind the bumpers and/or behind the radiator grille/Mercedes star. Keep these parts free of dirt, ice and slush

( page 384). The sensors must not be covered, for example by bicycle racks, overhanging loads or radar-reflecting stickers. Following an impact and in the event of associated damage, which may not be visible, to the bumpers or radiator grille, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The driver assistance system may no longer work properly. Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving systems and driving safety systems:

R 360 Camera ( page 202) R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ( page 169) R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

( page 183) R Adaptive brake lights ( page 178) R Active Brake Assist ( page 174) R Active Lane Keeping Assist ( page 219) R ATTENTION ASSIST ( page 211) R BAS (Brake Assist System) ( page 169) R DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL ( page 195) R EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)

( page 173) R ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

( page 170) R Hill Start Assist R HOLD function ( page 194) R STEER CONTROL ( page 173) R Active Steering Assist ( page 188) R Limiter ( page 180) R Active Parking Assist ( page 205) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 195) R Reversing camera ( page 199) R Cruise control ( page 179) ( page 179) R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist

( page 179)

( page 216) R Traffic Sign Assist ( page 214) Functions of ABS (anti-lock braking system) ABS regulates the brake pressure in critical driv ing situations:

R During braking, e.g. at maximum full-stop braking or insufficient traction of the tyres, the wheels are prevented from blocking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake Driving and parking 169 pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving. System limitations R ABS is active from speeds of approx. 8 km/h. R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yel low ! ABS warning lamp lights up contin uously in the instrument cluster after the engine is started. Function of BAS (Brake Assist System)

& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist Sys tem) If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased.

# Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. 170 Driving and parking BAS supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated:

R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres sure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Functions of ESP (Electronic Stability Pro gram)

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP checked at a qualified spe cialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is deactivated If you deactivate ESP, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation.

# ESP should only be deactivated in the following situations. ESP can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations, within physical limits:

R When pulling away on wet or slippery carria geways. R When braking. R Vehicles with trailer hitch: in trailer opera tion from speeds of 65 km/h, if the vehicle/

trailer combination begins to sway from side to side. R In strong side winds when you are driving faster than 80 km/h. If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP can stabilise the vehicle by intervening in the following ways:

R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to the situation. ESP is deactivated if the ESP OFF warn ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster:

R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R Vehicles with trailer hitch: stabilisation of the vehicle/trailer combination is no longer active. R Crosswind Assist is no longer active. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.

% When ESP is deactivated, you are still assis ted by ESP when braking. ESP is intervening if the ESP warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster:

R Do not deactivate ESP. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary. R Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions. It may be best to deactivate ESP in the follow ing situations:

R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel.

% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action which provides better grip. If the ESP warning lamp lights up continu ously, ESP is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information:

R warning and indicator lamps ( page 496) R display messages ( page 443) ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery carriageway. Driving and parking 171 ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways:

R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Influence of drive programs on ESP The drive programs enable ESP to adapt to dif ferent weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch ( page 149). 172 Driving and parking ESP characteristics per drive program Drive program C (Comfort) E (Economy) ESP mode ESP Comfort S (Sport) ESP Sport Characteristics These drive programs provide the ideal balance between traction and stability. Select drive program E or C in difficult road con ditions, such as snow or ice, or when the road is wet from rain. This drive program continues to offer stability but with a sporty setup which allows the enthu siastic driver a more active driving style. Only select drive program S in good road condi tions, for example on dry roads and clear stretches of road. Activating/deactivating ESP (Electronic Sta bility Program) Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Quick access

% ESP can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu.

# Select ESP. A prompt appears.

# Select On or Off. ESP is deactivated if the ESP OFF warn ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. Functions of ESP Crosswind Assist ESP Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi cle in the lane:

R ESP Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between 80 km/h and 200 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilised by means of individ ual brake application on one side. Functions of ESP trailer stabilisation

& WARNING Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high centre of gravity may tip over before ESP detects this.

# Always adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather condi tions. When driving with a trailer, ESP can stabilise your vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve from side to side:

R ESP trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of 65 km/h. R Slight swerving is reduced by means of a tar geted, individual brake application on one side. R In the event of severe swerving, the engine output is also reduced and all wheels are braked. ESP trailer stabilisation may be impaired or may not function if:

R The trailer is not connected correctly or is not detected properly by the vehicle. Driving and parking 173 Function of EBD (Electronic Brake force Dis tribution) EBD is characterised by the following:

R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends. STEER CONTROL function STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation. This steering recommendation is given particu larly in the following situations:

R Both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake. R The vehicle starts to skid. 174 Driving and parking System limitations STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R ESP is deactivated. R ESP is malfunctioning. R The steering is malfunctioning. If ESP is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering. Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of:

R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack age: Evasive Steering Assist Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with vehicles or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli sion, you will be warned visually and acousti cally. If you do not react to the visual or acoustic warn ing, autonomous braking can be initiated in criti cal situations. In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the visual and acoustic warning occurs simultaneously with the braking applica tion. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak ing, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max imum full-stop braking if necessary. If the autonomous braking function or the situa tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE) may also be initiated, if the vehicle is equipped with these.

& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa tions. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might:

R Give a warning or brake without reason R Not give a warning or not brake

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec essary. Also observe the system limitations of Active Brake Assist. Driving and parking 175 The individual subfunctions are available in the following speed ranges:

Distance warning function The distance warning function issues a warning at speeds:

R From approximately 30 km/h, if over several seconds the distance maintained to the vehi cle travelling in front is insufficient for the driven speed. The distance warning lamp then lights up in the instrument cluster. R From approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle or pedestrian. An intermittent warning tone sounds and the distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this. The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:

Vehicles travelling in front Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Moving pedestrians Stationary pedes trians up to approx. 80 km/h no reaction up to approx. 80 km/h no reaction Vehicles without Driv ing Assistance pack age up to approx. 250 km/h Vehicles with Driving Assistance package up to approx. 250 km/h up to approx. 100 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 80 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h 176 Driving and parking Autonomous braking function The autonomous braking function may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:

Vehicles travelling in front Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Moving pedestrians Stationary pedes trians up to approx. 50 km/h no reaction up to approx. 60 km/h no reaction Vehicles without Driv ing Assistance pack age up to approx. 200 km/h Vehicles with Driving Assistance package up to approx. 250 km/h up to approx. 100 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h Situation-dependent braking assistance Situation-dependent braking assistance may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:

Vehicles travelling in front Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Moving pedestrians Stationary pedes trians up to approx. 80 km/h no reaction up to approx. 60 km/h no reaction Vehicles without Driv ing Assistance pack age up to approx. 250 km/h Vehicles with Driving Assistance package up to approx. 250 km/h up to approx. 100 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h up to approx. 70 km/h Cancelling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by:

R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown. R Vehicles without Driving Assistance pack age: releasing the brake pedal Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli cation when one of the following conditions is fulfilled:

R You manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle. R There is no longer a risk of collision. R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle. Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac teristics:

R Can detect stationary or moving pedestrians. R Can assist the driver with additional steering assistance if it detects a swerving manoeu vre. R Can be activated by an abrupt steering move ment during a swerving manoeuvre. R Can assist during swerving and straightening of the vehicle. R Can react from a speed of approximately 20 km/h up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h. You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering.

& WARNING Risk of an accident despite Evasive Steering Assist Evasive Steering Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa tions. In addition, the steering support of Evasive Steering Assist is generally not sufficient to avoid a collision. Driving and parking 177 In such cases Evasive Steering Assist can:

R give an unnecessary warning or provide R not give a warning or not provide assis assistance tance

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.

# Be ready to brake and take evasive action, if necessary.

# Prevent the assistance by actively steer ing in non-critical driving situations.

# Drive at an appropriate speed if pedes trians are close to the path of your vehi cle. Also observe the system limitations of Evasive Steering Assist. 178 Driving and parking System limitations The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is R To pedestrians who are hidden by other objects. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be distinguished from the background. glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions. R If a pedestrian is not recognised as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects. R If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged R On bends with a tight radius. or covered. R If the sensors malfunction due to other radar source interference, for example strong radar reflections in multi-storey car parks. R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed. R Full system performance is not available for a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after driving off. The system may not react correctly:

R In complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly identified. R To pedestrians or vehicles if they move quickly into the sensor detection range. Setting Active Brake Assist Requirements:

R The ignition is switched on. Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Assis-

tance . Active Brake Assist The following settings are available:

R Early R Medium R Late

# Select a setting. The setting is retained when the vehicle is next started. Deactivating Active Brake Assist

% It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated.

# Select Off. The distance warning function and the auton omous braking function are deactivated. Vehicles without Driving Assistance pack age: when the vehicle is next started, the medium setting is automatically selected. Vehicles with Driving Assistance pack age: Evasive Steering Assist is not available. When the ignition is next started, the middle setting is selected automatically and Evasive Steering Assist is available.

% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the symbol appears in the status bar of the multifunction display. Adaptive Brake Lights function Adaptive Brake Lights warn following traffic in an emergency braking situation:

R By flashing brake lamps R By activating the hazard warning lights If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above 50 km/h, the brake lamps flash rapidly. This provides traffic travelling behind you with an even more noticeable warning. If the vehicle is travelling at speeds of more than 70 km/h at the beginning of the brake applica tion, the hazard warning lights switch on once the vehicle is stationary. When pulling away again, the hazard warning lights switch off auto matically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lights using the hazard warning button. Cruise control and limiter Function of cruise control Cruise control accelerates and brakes the vehi cle automatically in order to maintain a previ ously stored speed. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. Cruise control is operated using the correspond ing steering wheel buttons. You can store any road speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum road speed or to the set winter tyre limit. If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay ing in lane. Displays in the multifunction display The status of cruise control and the stored speed are shown in the multifunction display. Driving and parking 179 1 Cruise control is selected 2 Speed is saved, cruise control is deactivated 3 Speed is saved, cruise control is activated

% The segments extending from the current stored speed to the end of the scale, or to the set winter tyre limit, light up in the speedometer. System limitations Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular 180 Driving and parking note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheat ing and wearing too quickly. Do not use cruise control in the following situa tions:

R In traffic situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads. R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. R If you are driving when visibility is poor. Function of the limiter The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To reduce the speed swiftly to the set speed, the limiter applies the brakes automatically. You can limit the speed as follows:

R Variable: for speed limits, e.g. in built-up areas. R Permanent: for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. when driving in winter tyre mode. The variable limiter is operated using the corre sponding steering wheel buttons. You can store any road speed above 20 km/h up to the maxi mum road speed or to the set winter tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the vehicle is stationary if the vehicle has been started. If you fail to adapt your driving style, the limiter can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. The limiter is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Displays in the multifunction display The status of the limiter and the stored speed are shown in the multifunction display. 1 Limiter is selected 2 Speed is stored, limiter is deactivated 3 Speed is stored, limiter is activated

% The segments in the speedometer light up, up to the currently stored speed. Kickdown If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter switches to passive mode. The Limiter passivemessage appears in the multifunction display. After completion of kickdown, the variable lim iter is activated again in the following situations:

R If the driven speed drops below the stored speed. R If the stored speed is called up. R If you store a new speed. Operating cruise control or the variable lim iter

& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates.

# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. Requirements:

Cruise control R Cruise control is selected. R ESP must be activated, but not intervening. R The driving speed is at least 20 km/h. R The transmission is in position h.

# To select cruise control: press rocker Variable limiter:

R The vehicle has been started. R The variable limiter is selected. Switching between cruise control and the variable limiter Driving and parking 181

# To select the variable limiter: press rocker switch 1 up. switch 1 down.

% Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the variable limiter is selected by a different button ( page 184). Activating cruise control or the variable lim iter

# Press rocker switch 2 up (SET+) or down

(SET-).

# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current driven speed is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (limiter). Increasing/decreasing speed

# Press rocker switch 2 up/down to the pres sure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 1 km/h. or 182 Driving and parking

# Press and hold rocker switch 2 up/down to

# Press rocker switch 3 up. the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced in increments of 1 km/h. The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains or does not exceed this speed. or

# Press rocker switch 2 beyond the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 10 km/h. or

# Press and hold rocker switch 2 beyond the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced in increments of 10 km/h. or

# Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

# Press rocker switch 2 up. Adopting the detected speed If cruise control/variable limiter is activated and Speed Limit Assist or Traffic Sign Assist has detected a speed restriction sign with a maxi mum permissible speed and this is displayed in the instrument cluster:

Deactivating cruise control or the variable limiter

# Press rocker switch 3 (CNCL) down. When cruise control or the variable limiter is deactivated:

R Rocker switch 2 (SET+) or (SET-) saves the currently driven speed and the vehicle main tains this speed. R Rocker switch 3 (RES) calls up the speed last stored and the vehicle maintains this speed.

% If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated. When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is cleared. Permanent limiter If the vehicle should never exceed a specific speed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), you can set this speed with the permanent limiter. You do this by limiting the speed to a value between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multi media system ( page 182). Shortly before the set speed is reached, it appears in the multifunction display. When you confirm the message with %, display mes sages no longer appear until you switch off the vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again once the vehicle has been restarted. The permanent limiter does not switch to pas sive mode even during kickdown and the driven speed remains below the set speed. Setting the speed limitation for winter tyres Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Fahrzeug (Vehi cle) . Winter tyres limit

# Select a speed or deactivate the function. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles ahead are detected, the set distance is main tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved on the steering wheel on vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package, in the range between 20 km/h and 200 km/h and, on vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, in the range between 20 km/h and 210 km/h. Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:

R Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfort able or dynamic) ( page 149) R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:

reacts to stationary vehicles (except bicycles and motorcycles) in urban speed ranges if conditions are sufficient to enable detection. It also does not detect pedestrians. R Initiates rapid acceleration to the stored speed, if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane. R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:

takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on motorways or on multi-lane roads with separate carriageways. Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driving Assistance Package: if the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on multi-lane, separate carriageways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehi Driving and parking 183 cle in front driving off again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected when driving off, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehi cle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe dis tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. System limitations The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances, for example:

R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions. R The windscreen in the area of the camera is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. R On slippery roads, braking or accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. R In multi-storey car parks or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients. 184 Driving and parking Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.

& WARNING Risk of accident from acceler ation or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel erate or brake in the following cases, for example:

R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed. R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.

# Always carefully observe the traffic con ditions and be ready to brake at all times.

# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf ficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50 % of the maximum possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning.

# In these cases, adjust your speed and keep a sufficient distance.

# Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.

& WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or only partially reacts:

R When driving on a different line to the vehicle ahead or changing lane. R To pedestrians, animals, bicycles or motor bikes, stationary vehicles or unex pected obstacles. R To complex traffic situations. R To oncoming vehicles and crossing traf fic. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can nei ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit uations.

# Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly. Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Requirements:

R The vehicle has been started. R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP is activated and is not intervening. R The transmission is in position h. R All the doors are closed. R Check of the radar sensor system success fully completed (vehicle travelling faster than 20 km/h). Switching between Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the limiter

# Press button 1. Activating the variable limiter or Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC

# To activate without a stored speed: press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down (SET-), or press rocker switch 4 up. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal (Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC). The current driven speed is stored and main tained (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or limited (variable limiter) by the vehicle. or

# To activate with a stored speed: press rocker switch 4 up. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC).

% If rocker switch 4 is pressed up twice while driving, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter is activated with the speed restriction displayed in the instrument cluster. Accepting the displayed speed restriction when Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the lim iter is activated

# Press rocker switch 4 (RES) up. The speed limit displayed in the instrument cluster is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed. Driving and parking 185 Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

# Remove your foot from the brake pedal.

# Press rocker switch 4 (RES) up. or

# Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and dis tinctly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out. Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC still being activated when you leave the driver's seat If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.

# Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi cle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat. Reducing or increasing the specified dis tance from the vehicle in front

# To increase the specified distance: press rocker switch 2 down.

# To reduce the specified distance: press rocker switch 2 up. Function of Active Speed Limit Assist

% The following function is country-dependent and only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package. 186 Driving and parking

# Press rocker switch 4 (CNCL) down. Increasing or reducing the speed

# Press rocker switch 3 up (SET+) or down

(SET-) to the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 1 km/h. or

# Press and hold rocker switch 3 up/down to the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced in increments of 1 km/h. or

# Press rocker switch 3 beyond the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 10 km/h. or

# Press and hold rocker switch 3 beyond the pressure point. The stored speed is increased or reduced in increments of 10 km/h. If a change in the speed limit is detected and Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC assumes this new speed as the stored speed. The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted beforehand. The speed limit display in the Instrument Display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign. If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a motorway), the recom mended speed is adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimi ted stretch of road as the recommended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimi ted stretch of road, the recommended speed is 130 km/h. If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelera tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. Active Speed Limit Assist can be configured in the multimedia system ( page 216). Active Speed Limit Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. The maximum permissible speed also depends on factors such as the road surface and traffic conditions. System limitations Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying for a vehicle with a trailer is not detected by the system. In these sit uations you must adjust your speed yourself.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as:

R In the wet or in fog R When towing a trailer

# Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations.

# Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions. Driving and parking 187 Function of route-based speed adaptation

% The following function is country-dependent and only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package. When Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active, the function adjusts the speed depending on the route events ahead. Depending on the drive pro gram selected, the vehicle negotiates the route event ahead in a fuel-saving, comfortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle ahead, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. Route-based speed adjustment can by config ured in the multimedia system . Route events ahead are:

R Bends R T-junctions, roundabouts and toll stations R Turns and exits

% When the toll station is reached, Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed. 188 Driving and parking Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal to change lanes is switched on and one of the fol lowing situations is detected:

R Turning off at junctions R On slowing-down lanes R On lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and sets of traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a stand still. When route guidance is active, the first speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is confirmed and further speed adjustment is activated. Speed adjustment is cancelled in the following cases:

R If the turn signal indicator is switched off before the route event. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process. System limitations Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed. In difficult conditions (e.g. unclear roads, narrow lanes, wet road surfaces, snow or ice) or when driving with a trailer, the speed adjustment made by the system may not always be suitable. In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.

& WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adjustment Route-based speed adjustment might mal function or be temporarily unavailable in the following situations:

R If map data is not up to date or available R If you do not follow the selected route guidance R If the set route is re-planned R In road construction areas R When towing a trailer R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed

# Adjust the speed to the traffic situation. Active Steering Assist Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist assists the driver at speeds up to 210 km/h and helps the driver to stay in the centre of the lane by means of mod erate steering interventions. The system orients itself using detected lane markings. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead as a reference. If the detec tion of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to pas sive mode. The system does not provide support in the form of steering interventions. R The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. R The status of Active Steering Assist is dis played in the status bar of the multifunction display. Steering and contact detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and to be able to intervene at any time. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time. Driving and parking 189 R The driver presses a steering wheel button or operates Touch Control. Active Steering Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Before changing lanes, the driver must make sure that the neighbouring lane is free (glance over the shoulder). System limitations Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive past exits. Active Steering Assist cannot provide the driver with steering assistance at roundabouts, T-junctions, junctions, toll stations or turns, for example. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances:

R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, direct sunlight, greatly varying light conditions, reflections or strong shadows on the carriageway. R Insufficient road illumination. If the system reaches a system limitation or the driver has not steered the vehicle for a consider able period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, the system will, depending on the situation, first alert the driver with a visual warning. Display 1 appears in the multifunction display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle themself, or still has not taken hold of the steering wheel, a repeated warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message to remind the driver to take control of the vehicle. The warning message does not appear or disap pears if one of the following conditions are met:

R The driver steers the vehicle. 190 Driving and parking R The windscreen in the area of the camera is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered. R Absence of lane markings, or several unclear lane markings, or if the markings change rap idly. R The distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected. R The carriageway is narrow and winding. R Obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane. ing. The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions:

R On tight bends, roundabouts and when turn R When towing a trailer. R If you actively change lane without switching on the turn signal indicator.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func tioning If the system limitations of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane.

# Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the traffic carefully.

# Always steer the vehicle paying atten tion to traffic conditions.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes A malfunction in the detection of lane mark ings and objects can occur. This could cause unexpected steering inter vention.

# Steer according to traffic conditions. Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist Requirements:

R ESP must be activated, but not intervening. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa ted. Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Schnellzugriff

(Quick access)

# Select a Active Steering Assist. Function of Active Lane Change Assist

% The following function is country-dependent and only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package. Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes, by applying steering tor que. Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all the following conditions are met:

R You are driving on a motorway or road with multiple lanes in the direction of travel. R The neighbouring lane is separated by a bro ken lane marking. R No vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane. R The driven speed is between 80 km/h and 180 km/h. R Active Lane Change Assist is activated by the driver with the turn signal indicator. R Active Lane Change Assist is switched on in the multimedia system. R Active Steering Assist is switched on and active. If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and a lane change is permitted, the steering wheel symbol and the arrow are shown in green 2 . The Lane change to the left message appears, for example. If Active Lane Change Assist has been activated with the turn signal indicator but a lane change is not immediately possible, the steering wheel symbol remains green and the arrow appears grey 1. When the lane change support starts, the turn signal indicator is auto matically activated. If a lane change is not possi ble, the arrow fades out after a short period and a new lane change must be initiated. An immedi ate lane change is only possible on motorway sections without speed limits. If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change Assist may be cancelled. If it is cancelled the Lane change cancelled message appears in the multifunction display and a warning tone sounds.

& WARNING Risk of accident from chang ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane Lane Change Assist cannot always detect clearly if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free. Driving and parking 191

# Before changing lanes, make sure that the neighbouring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users.

# Monitor the lane change.

& WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops func tioning If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guar antee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torques.

# Always monitor the lane change and keep your hands on the steering wheel. Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary. System limitations The system limitations of Active Steering Assist apply to Active Lane Change Assist

( page 188). R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. Assistant display 192 Driving and parking Activating/deactivating Active Lane Change Assist Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Assistance . Act. lane chan. assist

# Activate or deactivate the function. Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist If the driver continues to ignore the repeated acoustic warning to put their hands on the steer ing wheel, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. If the driver still does not respond, the Beginning emergency stop mes sage is shown in the multifunction display. The vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill. At speeds below 60 km/h the hazard warning lights switch on automatically. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out:

R The vehicle is secured with the electric park ing brake. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended. R The vehicle is unlocked. The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions:

R Steering R Depressing the brake or accelerator pedal R Pressing a steering wheel button or operat R Activating or deactivating Active Distance ing Touch Control Assist DISTRONIC Overview of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays in the instrument clus ter The assistance graphic and the status display show the status of the following functions in the instrument cluster:

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Route-based speed adjustment R Active Steering Assist 1 Route-based speed adjustment (type of route event) 2 Vehicle ahead 3 Distance indicator 4 Set specified distance Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC status dis play and route-based speed adjustment Driving and parking 193 Active Steering Assist status display 3 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speed stored, no vehicle detected (grey vehi cle symbol) 4 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speed stored, vehicle detected (green vehi cle symbol) 5 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and route-

based speed adjustment active, speed stored

% On motorways or high-speed major roads, the green vehicle symbol is displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull away. Speedometer The stored speed is highlighted on the speedom eter. If the speed of the vehicle ahead or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up. Activation or deactiva tion of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as alterations in the saved speed and the distance to be maintained, are displayed in the individual control feedback of the multifunction display. 1 Grey steering wheel: Active Steering Assist switched on and passive 2 Green steering wheel: Active Steering Assist switched on and active 3 Yellow steering wheel flashing: transition from active to passive status (system limita tion detected or prompt to the driver to actively confirm) During the transition from the active to passive status, symbol 3 is shown as enlarged and flashes yellow. Once the system is passive, sym bol 1 is shown as grey in the multifunction dis play. 1 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected, set specified distance 2 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC deactiva ted, speed stored 194 Driving and parking Information on Hill Start Assist HOLD function Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the fol lowing conditions:

R The transmission is in position h or k. R The electric parking brake is released. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by the vehicle rolling away After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle and it can roll away.

# Therefore, swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never attempt to leave the vehi cle if it is being held by Hill Start Assist. HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. when pulling away uphill. System limitations R The incline must not be greater than 30%. Activating/deactivating the HOLD function

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being activated when you leave the vehicle If you leave the vehicle while only the HOLD function is braking the vehicle, the vehicle can roll away in the following situations:

R If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. R If the electrics in the engine compart ment, the battery or the fuses are tam pered with or if the battery is disconnec ted.

# Always deactivate the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away before leaving the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer tain situations:

R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit uations:

# During towing

# In a car wash Driving and parking 195 The damping is tuned individually for each wheel and is affected by the following factors:

R The road surface conditions R Vehicle load R The drive program selected R The driving style The drive program can be adjusted using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC door is opened. Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Requirements:

R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow ing situations:

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa the driver's side is fastened. ted. R The engine is running or has been automati cally switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The electric parking brake is released. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti vated. R The transmission is in position h, k or i. Activating the HOLD function

# Depress the brake pedal and after a short time quickly depress further until the display appears in the multifunction display.

# Release the brake pedal. Deactivating the HOLD function

# Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or

# Depress the brake pedal until the dis play disappears from the multifunction dis play. R The transmission is switched to position j. R The vehicle is secured with the electric park ing brake. In the following situations, the vehicle is held by the transmission position j or by the electric parking brake:

R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's R The engine is switched off. R There is a malfunction in the system or the power supply is insufficient. DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL function DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL continuously adjusts the characteristics of the suspension dampers to the current operating and driving conditions. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multimedia system Vehicles with Active Parking Assist without a 360 Camera 196 Driving and parking Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors 1 in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows you the distance between your vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur roundings. The responsibility for safe manoeu vring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exiting parking spaces. In the standard setting, an intermittent warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.3 m to an obstacle in front and approximately 1.0 m to an obstacle behind. A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.2 m. Using the "Early warning" setting, the warning tones for front and side impact protection can also be set to sound at a greater distance of approximately 1.0 m ( page 198).

% The "Early warning" setting is always active in the rear of the vehicle. Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and a 360 Camera If Active Parking Assist is not activated and an obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 1 appears in the multimedia system at speeds up to approximately 10 km/h. System limitations Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa rily take into account the following obstacles:

R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects. cle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. The lateral segments light up orange or red, depending on the distance to the obstacle. Segment colour depending on distance Colour Orange Red Lateral distance in cm Approx 30 - 60 Approx. < 30 In order for lateral front or rear segments to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half of the vehicle length. Once the vehicle has travelled the length of the vehicle, all of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis played. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of lorries. The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. Function of the passive side impact protec tion Passive side impact protection is an additional Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which warns the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles are detected between the front and rear detec tion range. In order for an object to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must detect the object while you are driving past it. During the parking procedure or manoeuvring, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected obsta Driving and parking 197 Vehicles without 360 Camera 1 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only opera tional in the front and rear 2 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and can also warn the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle 3 Obstacle detected at the front right (orange) and rear (red) 198 Driving and parking After the engine is restarted, obstacles must be detected again before a new warning can be issued. System limitations The system limitations for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC apply for passive side impact pro tection. The following objects are not detected, for exam ple:

R Pedestrians who approach the vehicle from the side R Objects placed next to the vehicle Deactivating/activating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Vehicles with 360 Camera 1 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only opera tional in the front and rear 2 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and can also warn the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle 3 Obstacle detected at the front right (orange)

* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects and rear (red) at close range Saved lateral obstacles are deleted in the follow ing situations, for example:

R You switch off the vehicle. R You open the doors. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range.

# When parking or manoeuvring the vehi cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flowerpots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth erwise be damaged. If the symbol is shown in the multifunction display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. Multimedia system:

, Settings . Quick access . PARKTRONIC

# Activate or deactivate the function.

% Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started. Adjusting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Assis-

tance . Camera & Park. Assist . Set warn-

ing tone Adjusting the volume of the warning tones

# Select Warning tone volume.

# Set a value. Reversing camera Function of the reversing camera Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones

# Select Warning tone pitch. Set a value. Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obsta cle.

# Select Warn early all-round.

# Activate or deactivate the function. Activating/deactivating audio fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC gives an audible warning.

# Select Audio fadeout during warning tones.

# Activate or deactivate the function. If you have activated the function in the multime dia system, the image from reversing camera 1 is shown in the multimedia system display when reverse gear is selected. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position. This helps Driving and parking 199 you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when reversing. The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and park ing in parking spaces. You can select from the following views:

R Normal view R Wide-angle view R Trailer view The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror. System limitations The reversing camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:

R The tailgate is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. 200 Driving and parking R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or mis ted up. Observe the notes on cleaning the reversing camera ( page 384). R The camera or rear of your vehicle is dam aged. In this case, have the camera and its position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The field of vision and other functions of the reversing camera may be restricted due to addi tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. licence plate bracket or bicycle rack).

% The display contrast may be impaired due to incident sunlight or other light sources. In this case, pay particular attention.

% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. Vehicles without Active Parking Assist The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Normal view Wide-angle view 1 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 2 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx imately 1.0 m from the rear area 3 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle

(dynamic) 4 Bumper 5 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area View of trailer (if trailer hitch is fitted) 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m to the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the warning display fades out. Driving and parking 201 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch Vehicles with Active Parking Assist The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

4 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are at a distance of between approximately 0.6 m and 1.0 m 5 Red warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close

(approximately 0.3 m or less) 6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis tance away (between approximately 0.3 m and 0.6 m)

% If the entire system fails, the inner segments of the warning display are shown in red and the symbol appears in the multifunc tion display. If the system fails in the rear:

R The rear segments are shown in red R The rear segments are hidden when driv when reversing. ing forwards. When Active Parking Assist is active, the lanes are displayed in green. Wide-angle view Normal view 1 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle

(dynamic) 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) The 360 Camera is only an aid. It is not a sub stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and park ing in parking spaces. The system evaluates images from the following cameras:

R Reversing camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors Views of the 360 Camera You can select from different views:

202 Driving and parking View of trailer (if trailer hitch is fitted) 1 Yellow guide line, locating aid 2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m to the ball head of the trailer hitch 3 Ball head of the trailer hitch 360 Camera Function of the 360 Camera The 360 Camera is a system that consists of four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate vehicle surroundings. The system assists you, e.g. when parking or at exits with reduced visibil ity. 1 Wide-angle view, front 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with images from the side cameras in the outside mirrors 4 Wide-angle view, rear 5 Top view with image from the reversing cam 6 Top view with trailer view (if trailer hitch is era fitted) Top view Guide lines Driving and parking 203 When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the segments of the warning display are shown in grey.

% If the entire system fails, the segments of the warning display are shown in red and the symbol appears in the multifunction display. If the system fails at the rear, the display of the segments changes as follows:

R The rear segments are shown in red R The rear segments are hidden when driv when reversing. ing forwards. If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the warning display fades out. 1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position 2 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance of approximately 1.0 m or less 3 Your vehicle from above If the distance to the object lessens, the colour of warning display 2 changes. From a distance of approximately 0.6 m the warning display is shown in orange. From a distance of approx imately 0.3 m the warning display is shown in red. 1 Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle

(dynamic) 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area 4 Mark at a distance of approx. 1.0 m

% When Active Parking Assist is active, the lanes are displayed in green. 204 Driving and parking The guide lines in the multimedia system dis play show the distances to your vehicle. The distances only apply to road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer hitch. Trailer view (if trailer hitch is fitted) The side cameras support the manoeuvring pro cedure with a trailer in this view. If this view is selected, symbol 1 appears. Side view of the mirror cameras The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view. 1 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions with outside mirrors folded out 2 Marker of the wheel contact points System limitations The 360 Camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:

R The doors are open. R The side mirrors are folded in. R The tailgate is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or mis ted up. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which the cameras are fitted, are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not use the 360 Camera under such circum stances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. On vehicles with height-adjustable suspension or if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, leaving the standard height can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images, depending on technical conditions. The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to addi tional attachments on the rear of the vehicle

(e.g. licence plate bracket, bicycle rack). See the notes on cleaning the 360 Camera

( page 384). Selecting a view for the 360 Camera Requirements:

R The Auto reversing camera function is activa ted in the multimedia system ( page 205).

# Engage reverse gear.

# In the multimedia system, select the desired view. Switching reversing camera automatic mode on/off The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. Pay attention to your sur roundings and be ready to brake at all times. Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Fahrzeug (Vehi cle) . Rear view camera

# Switch Auto reversing camera on or off. Opening the camera cover of the reversing camera Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Fahrzeug (Vehi cle) . Rear view camera

# Select Open camera cover.

% The camera cover closes automatically after some time or after an ignition cycle. Setting the camera as a favourite You can call up the camera view directly in the multimedia system by setting it as a favourite.

# Press the button on the touchpad. The main functions are displayed.

# Navigate downwards twice. The Favourites menu appears.

# Select New favourite.

# Select Vehicle.

# Select Camera. Driving and parking 205 Active Parking Assist Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system which uses ultrasound and is automatically activated during forward travel. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 35 km/h. When all the conditions are fulfilled, the c symbol appears in the dis play of the multimedia system and the system automatically searches for and measures park ing spaces on both sides of the vehicle parallel and perpendicular to the direction of travel. If Active Parking Assist is activated, suitable park ing spaces are shown in the display of the multi media system. The symbol appears in the display of the multimedia system. The arrows show on which side of the carriageway free park ing spaces are located. The parking space and, if necessary, the parking direction can be selected as desired. Active Parking Assist calculates a suitable vehicle path and assists you in parking and exiting the park ing space. 206 Driving and parking Active Parking Assist changes gear, accelerates, brakes and steers the vehicle. Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. Active Parking Assist is cancelled if, among other things, one of the following actions is car ried out:

R You deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC. R You deactivate Active Parking Assist. R You begin steering. R You apply the parking brake. R You engage transmission position j. R ESP intervenes. R You open the doors or the boot lid while driv ing. System limitations Objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist are not detected when the parking space is being measured. These are also not taken into account when the parking manoeuvre is calculated, e.g. overhang ing loads, overhangs or loading ramps of lorries or the boundaries of parking spaces. In some cir cumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space prematurely.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise:

R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R Vehicles with automatic transmis sion: The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. This could cause a collision.

# In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground. Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations:

R In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain. R If you are transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle. R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient. R If you have installed snow chains. Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, e.g.:

R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces. Active Parking Assist will not assist you with parking spaces at right angles to the direction of travel in the following situations:

R If two parking spaces are located immedi ately next to each other. R If the parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low kerb. Active Parking Assist will not assist you with parking spaces at right angles to the direction of travel in the following situations:

R If the parking space is on a kerb. R If the parking space is bordered by an obsta cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer. Parking with Active Parking Assist

% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the button may also be located at a different position in the centre console. Driving and parking 207

# If you have driven past a suitable parking space: bring the vehicle to a standstill.

# Select desired parking space 4.

# Where necessary, select the parking direc tion: forwards or reverse. Vehicle path 3 is shown, depending on the selected parking space and parking direc tion.

# Confirm the selected parking space.

# Press button 1. The Active Parking Assist view appears on the multimedia system display. Area 2 dis plays detected parking spaces 4 and vehi cle path 3.

% Vehicle path 3 shown on the multimedia system display may differ from the actual vehicle path. 208 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.

# Pay attention to objects and other road users.

# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

# If, for example, the message appears in the multimedia system display: select the corre sponding transmission position. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.

# After completion of the parking procedure, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.

% You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking pro cedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. The parking procedure can then be continued. If no new vehicle path is available, the transmission position will be changed again. If the vehicle has not yet reached the parking space, the parking pro cedure will be cancelled, should a gear be changed. Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist Requirements:

You can only exit a parking space with Active Parking Assist if you have previously parked the vehicle with Active Parking Assist. Please note that you are responsible for the vehi cle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure.

# Start the vehicle.

# Press button 1. The Active Parking Assist view appears on the multimedia system display.

# If the vehicle has been parked at right angles to the direction of travel: in area 2, select direction of travel 3.

% The vehicle path shown on the multimedia system display may differ from the actual vehicle path.

# Confirm to start the exiting process.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.

# Pay attention to objects and other road users.

# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

# If, for example, the Please engage forward gear message appears in the multimedia sys tem display: select the corresponding trans mission position. The vehicle moves out of the parking space. Driving and parking 209 Example: vehicles with 360 Camera After the exiting procedure has been completed, the Active Parking Assist finished, take control of the vehicle. message appears in the display of the multimedia system. A warning tone and dis play 4 in the multimedia system prompt you to take control of the vehicle. You have to acceler ate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again. Function of Drive Away Assist

% Drive Away Assist is only available for vehi cles with automatic transmission. Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is 210 Driving and parking detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approx. 2 km/h. If a critical situation is detected, the symbol appears on the camera image of the multimedia system.

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden tify objects and traffic situations. In such cases, Drive Away Assist might:

R Warn you without reason and limit the R Not warn you or not limit the vehicle vehicle speed. speed.

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.

# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec essary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take eva sive action. Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit uations, for example:

R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and brake pedals. R If the wrong gear is selected. The Drive Away Assist function is active under the following conditions:

R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. R Every time the gear is changed to k or h when the vehicle is at a standstill. R If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 1.0 m away. R If the manoeuvring assistance function is activated in the multimedia system. System limitations Drive Away Assist is not available on inclines and when driving with a trailer. Function of Cross Traffic Alert

% Also read the instructions on Blind Spot Assist ( page 216). Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: drivers can also be warned of any crossing traffic when reversing out of a parking space. If a critical sit uation is detected, the 1 symbol appears in the multimedia system display. If the driver does not respond to the warning, the vehicle's brakes can be applied automatically. To do this, the function uses the radar sensors in the bumper. The area adjacent to the vehicle is continually monitored. Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: drivers can also be warned of any crossing traffic when reversing out of a parking space. If a critical sit uation is detected, a symbol appears in the mul timedia system display. If the driver does not respond to the warning, the vehicle's brakes can be applied automatically. To do this, the function uses the radar sensors in the bumper. The area adjacent to the vehicle is continually monitored. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. The Cross Traffic Alert function is active under the following conditions:

R If Blind Spot Assist is activated. R If the vehicle is reversing at walking pace. R If the manoeuvring assistance function is activated in the multimedia system. System limitations The Cross Traffic Alert function is not available on inclines and when driving with a trailer. Deactivating/activating manoeuvring assis tance Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Assis-

tance . Camera & Park. Assist

# Switch Manoeuvring assist. on or off.

% Manoeuvring assistance must be active for the function of Drive Away Assist

( page 209) and Cross Traffic Alert

( page 210). ATTENTION ASSIST Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto nous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration until too late. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long jour Driving and parking 211 neys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation. You can choose between two settings. R Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap ted accordingly. If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis play. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes. 212 Driving and parking You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer:

R The length of the journey since the last R The attention level determined by ATTENTION break. ASSIST:

the fuller the circle, the higher the atten tional level determined. as your attention wanes, the circle in the centre of the display becomes smaller.

If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System suspended message appears. If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start naviga tion to this rest area. This function can be activa ted and deactivated in the multimedia system. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display when the engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically when the engine is re-started. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored. System limitations ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all in the following situations:

R If you have been driving for less than 30 minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes). R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor nering speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC is active. R If the time has been set incorrectly. R In active driving situations, if you change lanes and vary your speed frequently. The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness or alertness assessment is deleted and restarted when con tinuing the journey in the following situations:

R If you switch off the engine. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. changing drivers or taking a break). Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Assis-

tance . Attention Assist Setting options

# Select Standard, Sensitive or Off. Suggesting a rest area

# Select Suggest rest area.

# Activate or deactivate the function. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity.

# Select a suggested rest area. You are guided to the selected rest area. Speed Limit Assist Function of Speed Limit Assist

% The availability of the following function is country-dependent. Driving and parking 213 can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well. Display in the Instrument Display Speed Limit Assist detects speed limits with multifunction camera 1 and displays these in the instrument cluster or optionally in the head-

up display. The camera also detects speed limits with a restriction indicated by an additional sign

(e.g. in wet conditions). The system detects stop signs thereby preventing the ECO start/stop function from switching off the engine. Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You 1 Permissible speed 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction

% The illustration shows the Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit 214 Driving and parking System limitations The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, or due to rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R If there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicin ity of the multifunction camera or the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured. R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt or snow, or because they are covered or due to insufficient lighting. Traffic Sign Assist Function of Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with mul tifunction camera 1. It assists you by display ing detected speed limits and overtaking restric tions in the instrument cluster and optionally in the head-up display. Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting traffic signs:

R When the vehicle changes roads, e.g. slip road or motorway exit. R When a village or town boundary is passed which is stored in the digital map.

% Depending on the country, this function is also available without the navigation system. If the system detects that you are driving onto a section of road in the wrong direction of travel, it triggers a warning. The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions). Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well. Display in the Instrument Display Driving and parking 215 Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun tries. If it is unavailable, display 1 is shown in the speedometer. The warning occurs if appropriate traffic signs or road markings are detected and pedestrians are present in the danger zone. 1 Permissible speed 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction

% The illustration shows the Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit Warning when approaching pedestrian cross ings Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:

the system can warn you if you approach a pedestrian crossing with your vehicle. A mes sage appears in the instrument cluster. System limitations The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, or due to rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. 216 Driving and parking R If there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicin ity of the multifunction camera or the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured. R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt or snow, or because they are covered, or due to insufficient lighting. R If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. R If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs on construction sites or in adjacent lanes. Setting Traffic Sign Assist Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Assistance . Traf-

fic Sign Assist Activating/deactivating automatic adoption of speed limits Requirements:

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa ted.

# Select Adopt limit.

# Activate or deactivate the function. The speed limits detected by Traffic Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. Displaying detected traffic signs in the media display

# Select Display in head unit.

# Activate or deactivate the function. Adjusting the type of warning

# Select Visual & audible, Visual or None. Adjusting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded.

# Select Warning threshold.

# Set the desired speed. Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area up to 40 m behind your vehicle and 3 m directly next to your vehicle. If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx imately 12 km/h and this vehicle subsequently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red. If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle in the lateral monitoring range and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a warning tone sounds once. The red warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warning lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed. As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation.

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation and maintain a safe dis tance at the side of the vehicle. Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are only aids. They may fail to detect some vehi cles and are no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles. Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occu pants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary. If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to flash. This additional function is only available when Blind Sport Assist is activated and up to a maxi mum of three minutes after the ignition has been switched off. The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times. The exit warning is only an aid is not a substitute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi cle occupants. System limitations Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations:

R There is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured. R When there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, snow or spray. R If narrow vehicles are within the monitoring range, e.g. bicycles. Driving and parking 217 Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor ders. Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when a trailer is coupled to the vehicle and the electrical connection has been correctly established. The exit warning may be limited in the following situations:

R When the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces R When people approach the vehicle Stationary or slow-moving objects are not indi cated. Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist) If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor recting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. 218 Driving and parking The course-correcting brake application is availa ble in the speed range between approximately 30 km/h and 200 km/h.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision.

# Always steer, brake or accelerate your self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-

correcting brake application.

# Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

& WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the following:

R Overtaking vehicles closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area. R Vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a very different speed. As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit uations.

# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation and maintain a safe dis tance at the side of the vehicle. If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, dis play 1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro priate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. System limitations Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations:

R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate significantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP or Active Brake Assist. R ESP is deactivated. R A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected. R You are driving with a trailer and the electri cal connection to the trailer hitch has been correctly established. Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Assistance

# Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist. ded by a course-correcting brake application back into your lane. You are warned by vibration pulses in the steer ing wheel in the following circumstances:

R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist function markings. R A front wheel passes over the lane markings. You will also be guided back into your lane by means of a course-correcting brake application if the following conditions are met:

R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane R A front wheel drives over a solid lane mark markings. ing. You can activate or deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It can not take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera 1. It serves to protect you against unin tentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and gui Driving and parking 219 vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. if the lane markings are solid lines, a lane-cor recting brake application can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. Vehicles with Driving Assistance package:

Active Lane Keeping Assist can bring the vehicle back into the lane with a lane correcting brake application. In the case of a broken lane marking being detected, a brake application will only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adja cent lane. Oncoming vehicles, overtaking vehi cles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can be detec ted. The brake application is available in the speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h. 220 Driving and parking If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis play 1 appears in the multifunction display. System limitations No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations:

R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel erate. R You have switched on the turn signal indica tor (situation dependent). R A driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of accel eration. R The distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected. R ESP is deactivated. R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con nection to the trailer has been correctly established. R If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, or due to rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections. R If there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicin ity of the multifunction camera or the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured. R No or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. near roadworks. R The lane markings are worn, dark or covered. R The lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R The carriageway is very narrow and winding. Vehicles with Driving Assistance package:

Active Lane Keeping Assist uses radar sensors to monitor several areas around the vehicle. If the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered with snow, the system may be impaired or may not function. If an obstacle in the lane in which you are driving has been detected, no lane-correcting brake application occurs. Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Schnellzugriff

(Quick access) . Active Lane Keeping Assist

# Activate or deactivate the function. Sensitivity of Active Lane Keeping Assist

% The availability of the following function is country-dependent. With the standard or sensitive setting, you can adjust the sensitivity of Active Lane Keeping Assist. In the sensitive setting, there are addi tional situations in which Active Lane Keeping Assist intervenes. The likelihood of intervention is therefore higher. Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Assistance . Act. Lane Keep. Assist Setting the sensitivity

% The availability of this function is dependent on the country.

# Select Standard or Sensitive. Activating/deactivating the haptic warning

# Select Warning. The haptic warning is deactivated. Trailer hitch Trailer operation notes Observe the following notes on the tongue weight:

R use a tongue weight as close as possible to the maximum tongue weight R do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or falls below the permissible tongue weight Do not exceed the following values:

R the permissible towing capacity R the permissible rear axle load of the towing R the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle vehicle R the permissible gross mass of the trailer R the maximum permissible speed of the trailer Make sure of the following before starting a jour ney:

R the tyre pressure on the rear axle of the tow ing vehicle is set for a maximum load Driving and parking 221 R the lighting of the connected trailer is opera tional R Vehicles without LED headlamps or MUL TIBEAM LED headlamps: The headlamps have been set correctly. In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/

trailer combination may not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for car/trailer combinations is above 100 km/h. Folding the ball neck out/in

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.

# Always engage the ball neck as descri bed. Folding the ball neck out 222 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of injury from ball neck swinging outwards The ball neck may swing outwards when unlocking or when it has not been properly engaged. There is a risk of injury within the ball neck's range of movement!

# Unlock the ball neck only when its range of movement is unobstructed.

# Always be sure the ball neck is engaged when folding inwards. Requirements:

Before folding the ball neck out/in, make sure of the following:

R Shift the transmission to position j or i. R The range of movement is clear. R Only when folding in: ensure trailer cables or adapter plugs have been removed.

# Pull release switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks. The ball neck folds out from under the rear bumper. Indicator lamp 1 flashes.

# Pull the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly in a vertical position. Indicator lamp 1 in the ball neck release switch goes out. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Trailer coupling Check lockdisplay message appears on the multifunction dis play.

# Remove the cover from the ball head and Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer Coupling up a trailer store it in a safe place. Make sure that the ball of the ball neck is clean. Check that it is either greased or dry (grease free), depending on the instructions for the trailer. Folding the ball neck in

# Pull release switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks. The ball neck folds up under the rear bumper. Indicator lamp 1 flashes.

# Press the ball neck in the direction of the arrow until it engages audibly behind the bumper. Indicator lamp 1 goes out and the message on the multifunction display disappears. Observe the information on the displays in the instrument cluster:

R Warning and indicator lamps ( page 496) R Display messages ( page 443) Requirements:

R the ball neck must be extended and engaged in the securely locked position. Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connected to the vehicle with the following adapters:

R adapter plug R adapter cable The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehi cle only if the following conditions are met:

R the trailer is connected correctly R the trailer lighting system is in working order The operation of the following systems depends on the trailer being connected correctly:

R Active Lane Keeping Assist R ESP R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC R Active Parking Assist R Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Driving and parking 223

* NOTE Damage to the battery due to full discharge Charging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can damage the battery.

# Do not use the power supply to charge the trailer battery.

# Remove the cover from the ball head and store it in a safe place ( page 98).

# Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle. 224 Driving and parking

# Open the socket cover.

# Insert the plug connector with lug 1 into groove 3 on the socket.

# Turn bayonet coupling 2 clockwise as far as it will go.

# Let the cover engage.

# Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties

(if you are using an adapter cable).

# Make sure that cable is always slack for ease of movement during cornering.

# Push the combination switch upwards and downwards and check whether the corre sponding turn signal light on the trailer is flashing. A display message may appear on the multifunc tion display even if the trailer has been connec ted correctly:

R LEDs have been installed on the trailer light ing system R the current has fallen below the trailer light ing system's minimum current (50 mA)

% Accessories can be connected to the perma nent power supply up to 180 W, and to the power supply that is switched on via the igni tion lock. R adapter cable R adapter plug Uncoupling a trailer

& WARNING Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a trailer When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.

# Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake.

* NOTE Damage to the rear bumper from installing adapter cables or adapter plugs The following parts could be damaged when retracting the ball neck fully electrically:

R bumper

# Always remove the adapter cable or adapter plug before retracting the ball neck fully electrically.

# Safeguard the trailer against rolling away.

# Disconnect the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer.

# Uncouple the trailer.

# Place the cover on the ball head. Bicycle rack function

& WARNING Risk of an accident when using the bicycle rack incorrectly The bicycle rack may become detached from the vehicle in the following cases:

R the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch is exceeded. R the bicycle rack is used incorrectly. R the bicycle rack is secured to the ball neck beneath the ball head. Observe the following for your own safety and that of other road users:

# always adhere to the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch.

# only use the bicycle rack to transport bicycles.

# always properly secure the bicycle rack by attaching it to the ball head.

# only use bicycle racks approved by

# always observe the bicycle rack operat Mercedes-Benz. ing instructions.

* NOTE Damage to, or cracks on, the trailer hitch due to unsuitable bicycle racks or bicycle racks being used incor rectly

# use only bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz. Depending on the bicycle rack's design, up to three bicycles can be transported on the bicycle rack:

R when mounted by attaching to ball head 1, the maximum load capacity is 75 kg. Up to three bicycles can be transported. The load capacity is calculated from the weight of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack load. Driving and parking 225 The vehicle's handling characteristics change when a bicycle rack is fitted. The vehicle:

R is heavier. R is restricted in its acceleration and gradea bility. R has an increased braking distance. This can impair the vehicle's handling character istics. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Drive carefully and maintain a safe distance. When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure for maximum load on the rear axle of the vehicle. Further information on the tyre pressure can be found in the tyre pressure table ( page 410). Notes on loads The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the ball head, the greater the load on the trailer hitch. Observe the following notes:

R mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle as possible. 226 Driving and parking R always distribute the load on the bicycle rack as evenly as possible across the vehicle's longitudinal axis. Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detachable parts from the bicycles, e.g. baskets, child seats or rechargeable batteries, before loading them onto the bicycle rack. This improves the wind resistance and centre of grav ity of the bicycle rack. Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from moving around and check they are secured at regular intervals. Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The han dling characteristics and rear view may be impaired. In addition, the wind resistance and load on the trailer hitch increase. Distribution of the load on the bicycle rack 1 Vertical distance between the centre of grav 2 Horizontal distance between centre of grav 3 The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's cen ity and ball head ity and ball head tral axis Observe the following information when loading the bicycle rack:

Number of bicy cles Max. dis tance 1 Max. dis tance 2 3 420 mm 300 mm Total weight of bicy cle rack and load Up to 75 kg Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for attaching tow-bar systems, which are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow-bar systems can lead to damage on the vehicle. When towing a vehicle with tow-bar systems, safe, dynamic driving behaviour of the towing vehicle and the vehicle being towed is not guar anteed. The vehicle-trailer combination can swerve from side to side. Comply with the per mitted towing methods ( page 400) and the instructions for towing with both axles on the ground ( page 401). Instrument display overview Instrument display (standard)

& WARNING Risk of accident due to an instrument display malfunction If the instrument display has failed or is mal functioning, you may not recognise function restrictions and warning notices of safety rel evant systems. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired.

# If the traffic situation allows it, continue driving carefully.

# Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Instrument Display and on-board computer 227 R Media R Vehicle dynamics R Designs R Service Instrument display in the widescreen cockpit 1 Speedometer (example) 2 Multifunction display 3 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica tor Further content can also be shown on the multi function display 2:

R Assistant display R Telephone R Navigation R Trip R Radio 1 Speedometer (example) 2 Multifunction display 3 Rev counter (example) 4 Coolant temperature display 5 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica tor 228 Instrument Display and on-board computer

% In addition to the multifunction display 2, further content can also be shown on dis plays 1 and 3 ( page 230). The segments on speedometer 1 indicate the status of the following systems:

R Cruise control ( page 179) R Limiter ( page 180) R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

( page 183)

* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range.

# Do not drive with the engine in the over revving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red mark on the rev counter

(overrevving range) is reached. Vehicles with widescreen cockpit: during nor mal operating conditions, the coolant tempera ture display may rise to 120 C.

& WARNING Danger of burns when open ing the bonnet Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine com partment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service. 1 Back button, on-board computer 2 Touch Control, on-board computer 3 Control panel for cruise control/limiter or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 4 Control panel for MBUX multimedia system:

LINGUATRONIC or voice control sys tem Displays favourites VOL: control knob, adjusts the volume or switches the sound off 8 6 Makes/accepts a call

~ Rejects/ends a call 5 Calls up the home screen 6 Touch Control 7 % Back button You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.

% The on-board computer displays appear on the multifunction display ( page 231). Different acoustic signals provide feedback when operating the on-board computer, e.g:

R reaching the end of a list R scrolling through a list Instrument Display and on-board computer 229 Operating the on-board computer

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. The on-board computer can be operated using Touch Control 2 and back button 1 on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The following menus are available:

R Assistenz R Telefon R Navigation R Reise R Radio R Medien R STILE & ANZEIGE R Service The menus can be called up from the menu bar on the multifunction display.

# To call up the menu bar: press back button 1 on the left repeatedly or press and hold once. 230 Instrument Display and on-board computer

% Vehicles without Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer.

# To exit a submenu: press the back button on the left 1.

# Press the left-hand 2 touch control. The selected menu is displayed in full. If you are browsing a submenu and you press and hold the back button on the left 1, the menu bar appears. Selecting head-up display

# Select the HEAD-UP DISPLAY menu: in the menu bar, swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch-Control 2.

# Press the left-hand 2 touch control. Full-surface menu display Vehicles with an instrument display in the widescreen cockpit: the following menus can be shown in full on the instrument display:

R Assistenz R Reise R Performance

# In the corresponding menu, use left-hand Touch Control 2 to scroll to the end of the list. Setting the multifunction display Vehicles with an instrument display in the widescreen cockpit: further display content can be show on the instrument display. 1 Display content, right (example rev counter) 2 Index points

# To select display content: swipe to the right on the left-hand Touch Control.

# To scroll in the menu bar: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control 2.

# To call up the menu or confirm the selec tion: press the left-hand Touch Control 2.

# To scroll through displays or lists on the menu: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control2.

# To call up a submenu or confirm the selection: press the left-hand Touch Control 2.

# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-

hand Touch Control to select the required display content. When the display content is selected 1, it is briefly highlighted. The index points 2 show the selected dis play content. Display content selection, left:

R Speedometer R Time/date R Trip computer From start and From reset R Range R Audio Multifunction display selection:

R Assistant display R Telephone R Navigation R Trip R Radio R Media R Service Instrument Display and on-board computer 231 Overview of displays on the multifunction display Display content selection, right:

R Rev counter R Average fuel consumption R ECO display R Navigation R G-meter R Assistant display 1 Outside temperature 2 Time 3 Display section 4 Drive program 5 Transmission position

% Vehicles with standard instrument dis Maximum permissible speed exceeded

# Turn brightness control 1 up or down.

(for certain countries only) Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs ( page 214). The lighting of the instrument display and in the control elements in the vehicle interior is adjusted. Adjusting the instrument lighting 232 Instrument Display and on-board computer play: the position of the displays differs from those shown here. Further displays on the multifunction display:

Z Active Parking Assist activated Gearshift recommendation ( page 153) Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated

( page 207)

( page 198) Cruise control ( page 179) Limiter ( page 180) Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

( page 183) Active Brake Assist( page 178) ECO start/stop function( page 147) HOLD function ( page 194) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist ( page 121)

( page 121) Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

( page 122) Menus and submenus Functions on the Service menu of the on-

board computer On-board computer:

, Service

# To select the function: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand touch control.

# Press the left-hand touch control. Functions on the Service menu:

R Message memory ( page 443) R AdBlue: Adblue range R Tyres:

Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system ( page 417) Checking tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring system ( page 412)

Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system( page 412) R ASSYST PLUS: Calling up the service due date ( page 374) R Coolant: coolant temperature display R Engine oil level: engine oil level Calling up the assistant display On-board computer:

, Assistenz The following displays are available on the assis tant display menu:

R Assistant display R Attention level ( page 211)

# To switch between the displays: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. Status displays on the assistant display:

R : ATTENTION ASSIST deactivated R Light lane markings: Active Lane Keeping R Green lane markings: Active Lane Keeping Assist activated Assist active R Grey radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist activated R Green radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist active R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays

( page 183) Instrument Display and on-board computer 233 Calling up displays on the Trip menu On-board computer:

, Reise

# To select a display: swipe upwards or down wards on the left-hand Touch Control. Menu Reise in the standard cockpit:

R Speedometer R Rev counter R Range and current fuel consumption R ECO display ( page 148) R Trip computer From start and From reset Menu Reise in the widescreen cockpit:

R Standard display R Current fuel consumption R ECO display ( page 148) R Trip computer From start and From reset R Full-surface menu display 234 Instrument Display and on-board computer Example: standard display 1 Trip distance 2 Total distance R Trip computer From start and From reset R ECO display ( page 148)

# To select the function to be reset: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand touch control.

# Press the left-hand touch control.

# Select Yes .

# Press the left-hand touch control. If you press and hold the left-hand touch control, the function will be reset immediately. Example: trip computer 1 Total distance 2 Driving time 3 Average speed 4 Average fuel consumption Resetting values on the Trip menu of the on-

board computer On-board computer:

, Reise You can reset the values of the following func tions:

R Trip distance Calling up navigation instructions on the on-

board computer On-board computer:

, Navigation Example: no change of direction announced 1 Distance to the next change of direction 2 Distance to the next destination 3 Estimated arrival time at next destination 4 Current road Example: change of direction announced 1 Distance to the change of direction 2 Road to which the change of direction leads 3 Change-of-direction symbol 4 Recommended lane (white) 5 Possible lane 6 Lane not recommended (dark grey) Further possible displays in the Navigation menu:

R Fahrtrichtung: display of direction of travel and road currently being travelled on. R New route... or Calculating route: a new route is calculated. Instrument Display and on-board computer 235 R Strae nicht erfasst: the road is unknown, e.g. for newly built roads. R No route: no route could be calculated to the selected destination. R Off map: the map for the current location is not available. R Area of destination reached: When an inter mediate destination is reached, the inter mediate destination flag is displayed with the number of the intermediate destination

. After this, route guidance is continued. Once the destination is reached, the cheq uered flag is displayed. Route guidance is finished.

# To exit the menu: press the back button on the left. Vehicles with the MBUX multimedia system:

you can also start the navigation to one of the recent destinations on the Navigation menu:

# Press the left-hand touch control.

# Select a destination: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand touch control. 236 Instrument Display and on-board computer

# Press the left-hand touch control. Route guidance is started. If route guidance has already been activated, a request will appear asking whether you wish to end the current route guidance.

# Select Yes.

# Press the left-hand touch control. Route guidance is started. On-board computer:

, Radio Selecting radio stations using the on-board computer

# To select a radio station: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand touch control. Selecting the frequency range or station pre set

# Press the left-hand touch control.

# To select the frequency range/station preset: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand touch control.

# Press the left-hand touch control. 1 Frequency range 2 Station 3 Name of track When you select a station in the memory pre sets, the preset appears next to the station name. When you select a saved station in the frequency range, an asterisk appears next to the station name. Media playback using the on-board computer On-board computer:

, Medien 1 Media source 2 Current track and track number 3 Name of artist (example)

# To change tracks on an active media source: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. Changing a media source

# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

# To select a media source: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Con trol.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control. Dialling telephone numbers using the on-

board computer Requirements:

R The mobile phone is connected to the multi media system. On-board computer:

, Telefon

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Instrument Display and on-board computer 237

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. The most recent telephone connections (dialled, received and missed calls) are displayed on the Medien menu.

# Select an entry: swipe upwards or down wards on the left-hand touch control.

# Press the left-hand touch control. If there is only one telephone number saved to an entry: the telephone number is selected.

# If there are multiple telephone numbers saved to an entry: swipe upwards or down wards on the left-hand touch control to select the desired telephone number.

# Press the left-hand touch control. The telephone number is dialled. The call may be accepted/rejected using the 6 or ~ buttons on the steering wheel. Selecting the head-up display 238 Instrument Display and on-board computer The following displays may appear instead of the telephone numbers dialled:

R Please wait: the application is starting. When a Bluetooth connection to the mobile phone is not established, the menu for authorising and connecting a mobile phone is displayed in the multimedia system ( page 330)

( page 330). R Daten werden aktualisiert: the call list is being updated. R Kontakte werden importiert: the contacts from the mobile phone or from a storage medium are being imported. Accepting/rejecting a call When you receive a call, the Incoming call mes sage appears on the head-up display.

# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-

hand touch control and select 6 (Accept) or ~ (Reject).

# Press the left-hand touch control. Setting the head-up display using the on-

board computer On-board computer:

, HEAD-UP DISPLAY The following head-up display settings can be selected:

R Position R Brightness R Indicators

# To select a setting: swipe upwards or down wards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

# To adjust a value: swipe upwards or down wards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control. R 1 Display area left

- Navigation system

- G-meter R 2 Display area centre

Set speed in the driver assistance system

(e.g. cruise control)

- Warnings from driver assistance systems

(e.g. distance warning) R 3 Display area right Traffic Sign Assist Average consumption

Adjusting the design of the instrument dis play Head-up Display Function of the head-up display

Assistant display R 4 Selects the settings R 5 Index points Non-required display areas 1 to 3 can be hid den.

% In audio mode, the station name or track is temporarily shown when the audio source is being actively operated.

# To select a display: swipe upwards or down wards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control.

# To adjust a value: swipe upwards or down wards on the left-hand Touch Control.

# Press the left-hand Touch Control. On-board computer

, STILE & ANZEIGE Setting the design

# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-

hand touch control.

# Press the left-hand touch control. The instrument display is shown in the selec ted design. The following designs can be selected, depend ing on the vehicle equipment:

R Classic R Sport R Progressive R Understated

Basic displays Instrument Display and on-board computer 239 The head-up display projects important informa tion in the driver's field of vision, e.g. current speed. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, different content can be shown in the three display areas of the head-up display ( page 238). System limitations The visibility of the displays is affected by the following conditions:

R seat position R positioning of the display image R light conditions R wet carriageways R objects on the display cover R polarisation in sunglasses

% In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by deactivating and reactivating the head-up display. Operation Multifunction steering wheel operation over view LINGUATRONIC is operational approximately thirty seconds after the ignition is switched on. 240 LINGUATRONIC Notes on operating safety

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the vehi cle is stationary. For your own safety, always observe the follow ing points when operating mobile communica tions equipment and especially your voice con trol system:

R Observe the legal requirements for the coun try in which you are driving. R While driving, only operate mobile communi cations equipment and your voice control system when the traffic conditions permit it. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions and cause an accident, injuring yourself and others. R Do not use the voice control system in an emergency as your voice can change and your telephone call can be unnecessarily delayed. R Familiarise yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey. 3 Press the rocker switch up: 6 makes/

accepts a call Press the rocker switch down: ~ rejects/

ends a call (ends the dialogue) Conducting a dialogue For the dialogue with LINGUATRONIC, you can use complete sentences of colloquial language as voice commands, such as, for example,

"Please show me the list of the last calls" or

"How warm is it outside?". It is also not neces sary to first change to the relevant application such as "Telephone" or "Vehicle function".

# To activate or continue a dialogue: say a keyword, e.g. "Hello Mercedes". With a voice command such as "Hello Mercedes, show me the maximum permissi ble speed", the desired information can be called up directly with a single voice com mand. or LINGUATRONIC 241

# Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. You can say a voice command after an acoustic signal.

# To correct an entry: say the Correction voice command.

# To select an entry from the selection list:

say the line number or the contents.

# To browse the selection list: say the Next or Back voice command.

# To interrupt the dialogue: say the Pause voice command.

# To jump to the preceding dialogue: say the Back voice command.

# To jump back to the top dialogue level:

say the Home voice command.

# To cancel the dialogue: say the Close voice command or press the 8 or ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. 1 Press the rocker switch up: starts the dialogue 2 Press the control knob: 8 switches the sound off or on (ends the dialogue) Turn the control knob up/down: increases/

decreases the volume 242 LINGUATRONIC

# To interject during the voice output: say a new voice command. This will be recognised by LINGUATRONIC. For this, the corresponding option must be activated in the system setting. Operable functions You can use the LINGUATRONIC voice control system to operate the following functions depending on the equipment:

R Telephone R Text message and e-mail R Navigation R Address book R Radio R Media R Vehicle functions Overview of types of voice commands Information on the language setting A distinction is made between the following voice commands:

R Global voice commands can be said at any time and regardless of the current applica tion, e.g. the voice commands Navigate to, Call or Text message to. R Application-specific voice commands are only available for the active application. On the display next to the active application, examples of global voice commands and the cor responding application-specific voice commands are displayed on an autocue. The lists can be scrolled or can be operated by speech or the controller/touchpad. Number entry functions R The numbers allowed are zero to nine. R Telephone numbers can be entered as single digits. You can change the language of LINGUATRONIC via the system language settings. If the set sys tem language is not supported by LINGUA TRONIC, English will be selected. LINGUATRONIC is available in the following lan guages:

R German R English R French R Italian R Dutch R Polish R Portuguese R Russian R Swedish R Spanish R Czech R Turkish R only operate LINGUATRONIC from the driv R say the Read out station list voice command. LINGUATRONIC 243 Using LINGUATRONIC effectively Help functions You receive information and help for:

R Optimal operation: say the Help voice con-

trol system voice command. R Current application: on the multifunction steering wheel, press the rocker switch up and say the Help voice command. R Continued dialogue: say the Help voice command during a voice dialogue. R Specific function: say the voice command for the desired function, e.g. "Help tele-

phone". er's seat. R say the voice commands coherently and clearly, but do not exaggerate the words. R avoid loud noises that cause interference while making a voice command entry, e.g. the blower. R say the voice tag with the same intonation when creating voice tags. A voice tag in the address book is not recog nised:

R only create sensible address book entries in the system/mobile phone, e.g. enter sur name and first name in the correct field. R do not use any abbreviations, unnecessary Notes on how to improve speech quality spaces or special characters. If LINGUATRONIC does not understand you:

If a station list entry is not recognised:

Essential voice commands Notes on the voice commands Aside from the exact voice commands (see the

"Voice command" column) to call up specific functions, in most cases LINGUATRONIC also understands a great many paraphrases from daily usage. Possible examples for this are given in the "Colloquial alternatives" column. For some languages however these alternatives are only available to a limited extent. Overview of switch voice commands Switch voice commands can be used to open certain applications. 244 LINGUATRONIC Switch voice commands Voice command Colloquial alternatives Function Switch to navigation Can you please open the naviga-

tion system?

Switches to navigation mode Map Show map Switches to map display Switch to address book Open the phone book Switches to the address book Switch to telephone Switch to messages Text message Switch to e-mail Switch to radio Switch to media USB iPod Switch on the telephone Switches to telephone mode Can you switch to messages please?

Switches to the messages application Compose text message Switches to read aloud function and composing of text messages Can you please open email?

Switches to read aloud function and composing of e-mail Switch on the radio Switches to radio mode Open media USB stick iPod Switches to media mode. Switches to USB Switches to the iPod Bluetooth audio Switch Bluetooth audio on Switches to Bluetooth audio Voice command Switch to Internet Colloquial alternatives Function Jump to Internet Switches to Internet services Internet application <name>

Open the Mercedes App Starts a Mercedes-Benz online application. The application must be called up by touch once prior to use. LINGUATRONIC 245 Connect Open Internet services Switches to Internet mode Change to vehicle menu Switch to the car settings Switches to the vehicle settings Switch to system settings menu Open the system settings menu Switches to the vehicle settings Overview of navigation voice commands Using navigation voice commands, you can enter POIs or conventional addresses as well as directly change important navigation settings. 246 LINGUATRONIC Navigation voice commands Voice command Colloquial alternatives Function Navigate to <Address/POI/

Contact>

Drive me to <address/POI/

contact>

Universal search for all types of destinations. A search is also conducted in the address book contacts, the navigation database and on the Internet

(POIs). The order of the details, e.g. city, street or house number, can be changed. Address in <Country>

Enter new address in <country>

Destination entry in a desired country, e.g. address in France Home Work POI <POI>

Navigate home Starts navigation to home address To my office/my job Starts navigation to your workspace Enter POI <POI>

Destination entry for a POI, e.g. the POI Brandenburg Gate. A search is also performed in the navigation database and on the Internet. POI online search <POI>

Conducts a POI search on the Internet only Navigate to contact <Name>

Destination entry to a contact in the address book Find/search in the Internet/web for a <POI>

Drive/bring me to the contact address <name>

Voice command Colloquial alternatives Function Enter country Enter town Enter district Enter street Enter junction Enter house number Search by postcode Enter a new country Enter a town Enter a district/borough Enter a street name I would like to enter a junction Enter a house number Add a new postcode Nearest restaurant Nearest car park Nearest rest area with toilets Nearest filling station Nearest restaurant Nearest car park Nearest service station with toilets Next filling station LINGUATRONIC 247 Enters a country/town/district/street/junction/house number/post code Searches for nearby restaurants, parking spaces, rest areas with toilets and filling stations Last destinations Last destinations Selects a destination from the list of last entered destinations Show alternative routes Start route guidance I would like to have an alternative route displayed I would like to start route guid-

ance/Navigate there Switches route guidance to another route Starts route guidance after entering a valid destination Cancel route guidance Can you quit route guidance?

Cancels route guidance 248 LINGUATRONIC Voice command Colloquial alternatives Function Guidance instructions on Guidance instructions off Switch on guidance instructions Switch off guidance instructions Switches the route guidance voice output on/off Show traffic map Hide traffic map Switch on POI symbols Switch off POI symbols Switching traffic jam messages on Switching traffic reports off Show symbols on the map Hide map symbols Switches the traffic map on/off Switches the POI symbols display on the map on/off Overview of telephone voice commands You can use the telephone voice commands to make phone calls or search through the address book. Telephone voice commands Voice command Call <Name>

Search for contact <Name>

Colloquial alternatives Function Call <Name>

Makes a phone call. All address book names are available. Search for the address book entry for <Name>

Searches for and displays a contact. All address book names are availa ble. Previous calls Show call list Displays all outgoing, incoming and missed telephone calls. LINGUATRONIC 249 Voice command Colloquial alternatives Function Redial Change phone Radio voice commands Radio voice commands Redial/Call last phone number Selects the last phone number dialled Could you please switch to the sec-

ond phone?

Changes the primary telephones Radio voice commands can also be used when the radio application runs in the background and another application is visible in the foreground. Voice command Colloquial alternatives Function Station <station name>

Play station/channel <station name>

To call up receivable or saved stations Select frequency Next station Previous station Save station Play another frequency To enter a radio frequency Find another station/Change sta-

tion To switch to the next station that can be received Return to last station To switch to the previous station Save station name To save the current station in the favourites list 250 LINGUATRONIC Voice command Show station list Read out station list Traffic information on Traffic information off Radio info on Radio info off Colloquial alternatives Function Can you show me the station list?

To show the list of stations that can be received I would like to listen to the station list, please To listen to the names of all receivable stations Switch on traffic information To switch on traffic announcements Switch off traffic information To switch off traffic announcements I want you to turn on additional radio station text I want you to turn off additional radio station text To switch on information about the current station To switch off information about the current station Overview of media player voice commands Media player voice commands can also be used when the media player application runs in the background and another application is visible in the foreground. LINGUATRONIC 251 The names of all available tracks, albums, artists, composers, genres or playlists are accepted during the search. In the case of a clear search result the track found is played back immediately. The names of all available tracks, albums, artists, composers, genres or playlists are accepted during the search. A selection list appears from which you can select the desired music. If you wish to play all the tracks in a selection list, say "Play all tracks". Media player voice commands Voice command Colloquial alternatives Function Play <track/album/artist/

Composer/music genres/track lists>

Search for track <track>

Play <track>

Search for Song/Track/Video

<Title>

Search for album <album>

Look for music album <album>

Search for artist <artist>

Search for composer <composer>

Search for artist/singer/band

<artist>

Search for the songwriter<song-

writer>

Search for music genre <music genre>

Look for music type/music style

<music genre>

Search for playlist <playlist>

Show me tracklist/playlist <play-

list>

Next track Previous track Other track Repeat last song Plays back the next track on the current playlist Plays back the previous track on the current playlist 252 LINGUATRONIC Voice command Colloquial alternatives Function Random track list on Random track list off Show me the current playlist Switch on random mode Switches on random mode Switch off shuffle mode Switches off random mode Let me look at the current playlist/

track list The current playlist is displayed. What am I listening to Which music is currently playing The information about the track currently playing is read aloud. Overview of message voice commands Text messages and e-mails can be created, edi ted and listened to using the message voice commands. Message voice commands Voice command Colloquial alternatives Function Text message to <Name>

New message to <Name>

To create a text message. All address book names are available. E-mail to <Name>

New e-mail to <Name>

To create an e-mail. All address book names are available. Forward text message Forward text To forward selected or open text messages. Forward e-mail Forward electronic mail To forward selected or open e-mails. LINGUATRONIC 253 Voice command Colloquial alternatives Function Read out text messages Read out all texts To have text messages read aloud. Read out e-mails Read out e-mails from <Name>

To have e-mail read aloud. Reply Compose a message/e-mail/text message to the sender To reply to a message Overview of vehicle voice commands You can use the vehicle voice commands to directly call up the corresponding menus for the vehicle settings. Vehicle voice commands Voice command Ambient light menu Ambient light blue Colloquial alternatives Function Can you show me the ambient light menu, please?

I would like to change the interior lighting to ambient light blue Go to display and styles menu set-

tings To display ambient light settings To switch ambient lighting, e.g. to blue Display and styles menu To show display settings Automatic climate control driver on To switch on the automatic climate control settings on the driver's side 254 LINGUATRONIC Voice command Assistance menu Energy flow menu Climate control menu Light menu Massage menu Colloquial alternatives Function Open the driver assistance menu To display assistance settings To display energy flow settings To display climate control settings To display light settings To display massage settings I would like to switch to the energy flow menu. Can I go to the climate control menu, please?

Turn off the climate control on the driver's side Can you show me the light set-

tings?

Can you show me the massage menu?

Switch the driver's side massage off Can you please display the seat settings?

Massage driver's seat on Switch on the driver's massage To switch on the massage function for the driver's seat Massage driver's seat off To switch off the massage function for the driver's seat Seats menu To display seat adjustment settings Voice command Colloquial alternatives Function Seat heating front passenger level 2 Seat heating front-passenger on level 2 To set the seat heating for the front passenger seat to level 2 Outside temperature How cold is it outside?/How warm is it?

To display the outside temperature LINGUATRONIC 255 Engine data Vehicle data Consumption Average consumption Range Current speed limit Next service Can I switch to the motor menu?

To display engine data Can you please display the vehicle data menu?

To display vehicle data Can I switch the consumption menu, please?

Read out the average fuel con-

sumption To show consumption settings To show average consumption Tell me the current range To show range data Tell me the maximum permitted speed Tell me my next service appoint-

ment To show the current speed limit To show the next service due date 256 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Overview and operation Overview of the MBUX multimedia system 1 Touch Control Operates Touch Control( page 259) 2 Multimedia system display with touch func tionality Home screen overview ( page 258) Operates the touchscreen ( page 260) 3 Touchpad 4 Control knob Operates the touchpad( page 261) Press and hold: switches the multimedia sys tem or display on or off Press briefly: switches the mute function on/off Turn: adjusts the volume 5 Buttons for navigation, radio/media and telephone Calls up applications( page 263) 6 Buttons for vehicle functions/system set tings and favourites/moods Calls up applications( page 263) You can operate the MBUX multimedia system with the following central control elements:

R Touch Control 1 and touchpad 3 The operation for both control elements is achieved by cursor control. R Multimedia system display 2 Numerous application, online services, services and apps are available for you. You can call these up using the home screen or using buttons 5 and 6 next to the touchpad. You can conveniently call up and add favourites on the steering wheel using the rocker switch or next to the touchpad using the button. Quick-access in the home screen and in the applications serve to select functions more quickly. If you use the learn function of the multimedia system, you will receive suggestions during oper ation of the most probable navigation destina tions, radio stations and contacts. The configu ration of the suggestions takes place in your pro file. You can compile your profile from various vehicle settings and settings of the multimedia system. For different driving situations, you can set moods within a profile. You can also call up and add moods using the rocker switch or the button. The Notifications Centre collects incoming notifi cations e.g. about an available software update. Depending on the type of notification it offers various actions. With the global search in the vehicle you can search on-board across many categories as well as online in the Internet. Both functions call up the home screen. Anti-theft protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. More detailed informa tion about anti-theft protection can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on the multimedia system display Observe the notes on caring for the interior

( page 386). Automatic temperature-controlled switch-

off feature: if the temperature is too high, the brightness is initially reduced automatically. The multimedia display may then switch off com pletely for a while. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 257

% If you are wearing polarised sunglasses, it may be difficult to read the multimedia dis play. 258 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Home screen overview 1 In the home screen: calls up the status dis 4 Display only when the Mercedes-Benz emer play In other displays: calls up the home screen 2 Calls up the profile 3 Calls up the global search gency call system is not available 5 Displays, for example network display, signal strength of the mobile phone network, time 6 Calls up the Notifications Centre The star indicates new notifications. 7 Calls up an application using the symbol 8 Name of the application, beneath the current selection or display 9 Quick-access A Number of applications and currently selec B Calls up the air conditioning menu C Calls up SUGGESTIONS, MOODS and ted display area

( page 136) FAVOURITES Central control elements overview Touch Control Operating Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system) MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 259 1 Touch Control 2 Multimedia system display with touch func tionality 3 Touchpad 1 button Shows the home screen and calls up appli cations Calls up suggestions, moods and favourites:

when the home screen is shown, swipe down on Touch Control 2. 260 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 2 Touch Control 3 % button

# To enter a character: enter a character Operating the touchscreen using the keyboard. Press briefly: returns to the previous display 4 Control panel for MBUX multimedia system:

direction.

# To move the digital map: swipe in any rocker switch Press down briefly: calls up favourites and moods Press down and hold: adds favourites and moods Turn the control knob: sets the volume VOL Press the control knob: switches off sound 8 6 rocker switch Press up: makes or accepts a call

~ rocker switch Press down: rejects or ends a call You can navigate in menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of Touch Control 2 by using a single-finger swipe.

# To select the menu item or entry: swipe up, down, left or right.

# Press Touch Control 2. Setting the sensitivity for the Touch Control Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Con-

trols . Touch Control sensitivity

# Select Fast, Medium or Slow. Setting acoustic operating feedback for the Touch Control Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Con-

trols The function is supported by the selection in a list.

# Select Acoustic operating feedback.

# Set Normal, Loud or Off. If the function is activated you will hear a clicking sound when scrolling in a list. When the beginning or end of the list is reached you will hear another clicking sound. Tapping

# To select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol or an entry.

# To increase the map scale: tap twice quickly with one finger.

# To reduce the map scale: tap with two fin gers.

# To enter characters with the keyboard:

tap on a button. Single-finger swipe

# To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left

# To move the digital map: swipe in any or right. direction.

# To use handwriting to enter characters:

write the character with one finger on the touchscreen. Two-finger swipe

# To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart. Touchpad Operating the touchpad

# To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two fingers together or apart.

# To turn the map: turn anti-clockwise or clockwise using two fingers. Touching, holding and moving

# To move the map: touch the touchscreen and move your finger in any direction.

# To set the volume on a scale: touch the touchscreen and move the finger to the left or right. Touch and hold

# To save the destination in the map: touch the touchscreen and hold until a message is shown.

# To call up a global menu in the applica tions: touch the touchscreen and hold until the OPTIONS menu appears. 1 % button 2 D button Press briefly: returns to the previous display Calls up the control menu of the last active audio source 3 button MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 261 Shows the home screen and calls up appli cations Calls up suggestions, moods and favourites:

when the home screen is shown, swipe down on touchpad 4. 4 Touchpad You can navigate in menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of touchpad 4 by using a single-finger swipe.

# To select the menu item or entry: swipe up, down, left or right.

# Press touchpad 4.

# To enter a character: enter a character using the keyboard. or

# Write a character on the touchpad.

# To move the digital map: swipe in any direction. Use the following functions with a two-finger swipe:

# To call up the Notifications Centre: swipe down with two fingers.

# To close the Notifications Centre: swipe up with two fingers. Switching the read-aloud function for hand writing recognition on/off 262 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience)

# To call up the control menu of the last active audio source: swipe up with two fin gers.

# To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.

# To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two fingers together or apart. Setting the sensitivity for the touchpad Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Con-

trols . Touchpad sensitivity

# Select Fast, Medium or Slow.

# To set the pressure sensitivity: switch Touchpad tap on or off. If the function is switched on, a tap on the touchpad is enough to select a menu item. Requirements:

R The multimedia system is equipped with a voice control system. R The read-aloud function is available for the selected system language. Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Sys-

tem . Audio . System feedback

# Switch Read out handwriting recognition on or off. When the function is selected, the character input on the touchpad is read aloud. Activating/deactivating haptic operating feedback on the touchpad Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Con-

trols The function supports you when making entries on the touchpad and when selecting menus.

# Switch Haptic operating feedback on or off. When the function is activated, a tactile feed back in the form of a vibration is effected when the touchpad is operated. Setting acoustic operating feedback for the touchpad Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Con-

trols The function is supported by the selection in a list.

# Select Acoustic operating feedback.

# Set Normal, Loud or Off. If the function is activated you will hear a clicking sound when scrolling in a list. When the beginning or end of the list is reached you will hear another clicking sound. Selecting a station and track using the touchpad

# Press the D button on the touchpad. or

# Swipe upwards using two fingers on the touchpad. The control menu appears for the audio source that was last selected.

# Swipe left or right using one finger. Radio: the previous or next station is set. Media source: the previous or next track is selected.

# To hide the control menu: swipe down on the touchpad using two fingers. Alternatively:

# Swipe to the left or right over the D but ton. Radio: the previous or next station is set. Media source: the previous or next track is selected. Main functions Calling up applications 1 CAR button Calls up vehicle functions 2 MAP button Calls up navigation 3 $ button Calls up radio or media 4 % button Calls up the telephone 5 button MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 263 Press briefly: calls up favourites and moods Press and hold: adds a favourite and mood Alternatively in the home screen: when you start the vehicle the home screen is shown in the multimedia system display.

# Select the application by swiping and tap ping. or in any display

# Press the button on the Touch Control or on the touchpad. or

# Briefly press the symbol in the multi media system display. The applications are displayed.

# Select the application by swiping and tap ping. 264 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Profile Notes on profiles

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a profile If the driver's seat is adjusted after selection of a profile, you or other drivers could become trapped.

# To stop adjustment before some body becomes trapped: briefly press on the warning message on the multi media system display. or

# Press one of the memory position but tons or a seat adjustment switch in the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped. Overview of profiles Using the multimedia system up to seven pro files can be created in the vehicle. Profiles store your personal vehicle settings and settings for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their profile before the journey, without changing the settings of other drivers. You can select the profile:

R when entering ( page 266) R on the home screen ( page 258) The profile settings are activated as soon as a profile is selected.

% When you call up your profile, the driver's seat and outside mirrors can be set. You can cancel the setting process with the following actions:

R Briefly press the Positioning seat and steering wheel. Please tap to cancel. warning message in the multimedia sys tem display. R Press one of the seat operating buttons in the driver's door. Profile content Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow ing settings can be stored in your profile, for example:

R Driver's seat and mirror settings R Driver's seat memory R Radio (including station list) R Previous destinations R Climate control R Ambient lighting R DYNAMIC SELECT I (individual) R Instrument Display, Head-up Display and style (display style of the multimedia system) R Favourites, moods and suggestions

% Settings for driver assistance systems are not personalised. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 265 Mercedes me connect profile and synchroni sation If you use a profile from Mercedes me connect, the following online functions are available, for example:

R You can configure the settings in the vehicle Requirements for using Mercedes me connect profiles (additional vehicle users) R You have a Mercedes me user account. R The vehicle owner has invited you to connect your user account on Mercedes me with that of his vehicle. tions based on the navigation destinations visited, numbers called and music preferen ces, select Accept or Reject. Accept allows the data recording and ena bles the suggestions function. Reject rejects data recording. using the Mercedes me app and the Mercedes me portal. R The synchronisation enables the adjustment between the profiles on Mercedes me con nect and the profiles in the vehicle (profile management). R You can add a personal profile photo that is shown in the vehicle. R You can take your profile with you in new vehicles. Requirements for using Mercedes me connect profiles (vehicle owner) R You have a Mercedes me user account. R The vehicle has been connected with the user account. R The personalisation service is activated. R You have accepted the invitation. Creating a new profile Multimedia system:

, . f Profiles

# Select W Create profile .

# Select an avatar.

# Enter the name and confirm with a.

# Select Continuer.

# To select the profile basis: select the set tings with which you want to start your new profile, Current system settings or Factory settings.

# Select Save.

# To accept or reject data recording for sug gestions: when the notification appears that the vehicle will offer personalised sugges Selecting profile options Multimedia system:

, . f Profiles

# Select for a profile.

# To edit a profile: select Edit profile.

# Select an avatar.

# Change the name, if necessary.

# Select Save.

# To configure suggestions: select Sugges-

tions settings ( page 269).

# To reset favourites or moods: select Reset favourites to factory settings or Reset moods to factory settings.

# Select Yes.

# To reset a profile: select Reset profile to

# Press the a button to confirm the mes 266 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) factory settings.

# Select Yes.

# To delete a profile: select Delete profile.

# Select Yes.

% The guest profile cannot be deleted. Selecting a profile Multimedia system:

, . f Profiles

% When you call up your profile, the driver's seat and outside mirrors can be set. You can cancel the setting process with the following actions:

R Briefly press the Positioning seat and steering wheel. Please tap to cancel. warning message in the multimedia sys tem display. R Press one of the seat operating buttons in the driver's door.

# Select a profile. sage. The profile is loaded and activated.

% Alternatively, the profile can already be selected when the vehicle is entered

( page 266). Synchronising a profile Requirements:

R You have a Mercedes me user account. R The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account. R The personalisation service is activated on Mercedes me connect. Multimedia system:

, . f Profiles . General set-

tings Synchronisation enables the following:

R You can configure the vehicle settings using the Mercedes me app. R The profile on Mercedes me connect and the profile in the vehicle are aligned (profile man agement).

# Activate Synchronise profiles automatically. or

# Select Synchronise profiles now. Synchronise profiles now: the profiles are synchronised when this option is selected. Synchronise profiles automatically: the pro files in the vehicle are automatically aligned with the profiles on Mercedes me connect when the ignition is switched on and off. During synchronisation the profile list and the profile functions are blocked. Showing the profile selection when entering Requirements:

R At least one profile has been created. Multimedia system:

, . f Profiles If the option is activated, you can see a profile as soon as you get in.

# Select General settings. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 267

# Activate Show profile selection when enter-

ing. When the vehicle is started, the multimedia system display shows the active profile. the next motorway trip you can then select this mood directly and thereby restore your settings without the need to make each setting sepa rately. Calling up moods Multimedia system:

# When the home screen is shown, swipe up Moods Overview of moods You can configure the vehicle settings according to your preferences and save as a mood. A mood can be called up any time via the home screen. There is then no need to make the desired set tings again. There are pre-defined moods available, e.g. Jour ney, Nature and Lounge. Example for the use of moods For recurring driving situations, such as long drives on the motorway, you can save you prefer red settings in a mood in the vehicle. For exam ple, you can have displays such as the navigation map, the tachometer and the trip computer shown, set your favourite radio station and your preferred drive program. These settings are saved when you set a mood ( page 267) under the name you desire (e.g. "Long journey"). On Elements of a mood Depending on vehicle equipment the following settings can be saved in a mood:

R Setting of the Instrument Display

( page 230) R Setting of the Head-up Display ( page 238) R Setting of the ambient lighting ( page 124) R Starting screen for the multimedia system display R Visual style ( page 281) R DYNAMIC SELECT drive program

( page 149) R Eco start/stop setting ( page 148) R Navigation system settings

% A mood contains the currently active set tings in the vehicle. until MOODS appears.

# Select a mood. Creating a new mood Requirements:

R The settings which are to be saved in the mood are active. The overview shows the available settings

( page 267) Multimedia system:

, . Mood

# Select W Create new mood .

# Select an entry screen.

# Select Continuer.

# Select an image.

# Enter the names into the entry field and con firm with a. 268 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience)

# To save a mood: select Save. Selecting additional settings

# Select Advanced settings.

# Activate or deactivate the settings. When the maximum number that can be saved is reached:

# Select a from the prompt.

# Select a mood that should be overwritten.

# Proceed as described above. Creating using the rocker switch or but ton

# Press and hold the bottom section of the rocker switch on the steering wheel. or

# Press and hold the button next to the touchpad.

# Select Create new mood.

# Proceed as described above. Modifying a mood Multimedia system:

# When the home screen is shown, swipe up until MOODS appears.

# Press on a mood until the OPTIONS menu is

# Tap on . Moving the moods menu in the home screen

# Select .

# Swipe upwards and select Neue Reihenfolge festlegen (Define new order). shown.

# Select a.

# Select an image. Enter the name.

# Select a.

# To save a mood: select Save. Moving a mood Multimedia system:

# When the home screen is shown, swipe up until MOODS appears.

# Press on a mood until the OPTIONS menu is shown.

# Select Move.

# Tap on = or ;.

# Select Moods.

# Tap on 9 or :.

# Tap on . Deleting a mood Multimedia system:

# When the home screen is shown, swipe up until MOODS appears.

# Press on a mood until the OPTIONS menu is shown.

# Select Delete.

# Select Yes. Showing information about moods (DIBA) Multimedia system:

# When the home screen is shown, swipe up until MOODS appears.

# Press on a mood until the OPTIONS menu is shown.

# Select Owner's Manual. Suggestions Suggestions overview The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. Based on previously used functions, the most likely navigation destinations, radio stations or contacts are offered under SUGGESTIONS. Suggestions are shown when the following requirements are fulfilled:

R a profile has been created ( page 265). No suggestions are available in the Guest profile. R a profile has been selected. R you have accepted data recording. R from the beginning of usage, the multimedia system must analyse the user habits. When sufficient data is collected then the sugges tions are available. If the requirements mentioned are not fulfilled, a preview with a description of the function appears in the SUGGESTIONS menu. You can configure data recording ( page 269) or delete the suggestions recorded ( page 270). Calling up suggestions Requirements:

R a profile has been created and is selected

( page 266). If the profile Guest is active, no suggestions can be cancelled. This profile is selected when the vehicle is purchased.

# Briefly press in the multimedia system display. The home screen is shown.

# Swipe up until the SUGGESTIONS menu is shown. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 269

# Select a navigation destination, a radio sta tion or a contact. If route guidance is already active, you can not start a new route guidance or set an intermediate destination for the existing route. Configuring suggestions Multimedia system:

, . f Profiles

# Select Z for a profile.

# Select Suggestions settings.

# To switch the suggestions display on/off:

switch Learn from location history, Allow music suggestions and Allow contact sugges-

tions on or off. If an option is switched on, suggestions for navigation destinations, radio stations or contacts are shown. If the option is switched off, no suggestions are shown. 270 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience)

# To deactivate the learn function for one day: activate Deact. learn. for 24h. For 24 hours no new actions will be trained and no data recorded for the active profile. Suggestions will continue to be shown. The remaining time is shown next to Deact. learn. for 24h. Before the time runs out, a message is shown that the multimedia system will con tinue the learn function shortly. Example: if the option is switched on and a route to a new destination has been calcula ted, this destination would not be taken into account for the learn function.

# Resetting the suggestion history: select Reset suggestion history.

% This process cannot be reversed.

# Select OK.

# To protect settings using a PIN: switch on PIN-Schutz (PIN protection). If PIN protection is switched on, you must enter the Mercedes me PIN to have access to your suggestions. This PIN will be set in the Mercedes me portal for the personalisa tion service to protect your personal set tings.

# Highlight a suggestion and press until the Options menu is shown.

# Select Delete. Renaming suggestions Only navigation destinations can be renamed.

# Briefly press the symbol in the multi media system display. The home screen is shown.

# Swipe up until the SUGGESTIONS menu is shown.

# Highlight a navigation destination and press until the OPTIONS menu is shown.

# Select Rename.

# Enter the name.

# To confirm the entry: select Yes. Deleting a suggestion

# Briefly press in the multimedia system display. The home screen is shown.

# Swipe up until the SUGGESTIONS menu is shown. Deleting suggestions in the applications You can delete suggestions in the previous desti nations, in the radio station list and in the con tacts.

# Select : for a suggestion.

# Select Do not suggest.

# To delete a suggestion from a current list: select Not now. The suggestion will be shown again at a later time in the list.

# To delete a suggestion permanently:

select Never.

# Select Yes. The suggestion will not be shown again in future. All suggestions are reset.

# To cancel the function: select Cancel. Favourites Adding favourites Overview of favourites Favourites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. It is possible to create 20 favourites in total. You can select favourites from categories or you add favourites directly from an application. Calling up favourites In the multimedia system display

# Tap on . The home screen is shown.

# Swipe up until FAVOURITES is shown. On the steering wheel or the touchpad

# Press the rocker switch on the steering wheel down. or

# Press the button next to the touchpad. ten. Selecting favourites from categories

# Briefly press in the multimedia system display. The home screen is shown.

# Swipe up until FAVOURITES is shown.

# Select W New favourite. The categories are displayed.

# Select the category. The favourites are displayed.

# Select a favourite. The favourite is stored at the next available position.

# All positions in the favourites are taken:

confirm the message shown with OK. A list shows all the favourites.

# Select a favourite which should be overwrit Adding a favourite from an application Examples of adding from an application are:

R Saving a contact. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 271 R Storing a radio station. R Adding a media source. R Saving a navigation destination. R Adding an ENERGIZING comfort program (if available).

# To store a radio station as a global favour ite: set a radio station.

# Press on the radio station until the OPTIONS menu is shown.

# Select Save as favourite. The radio station is added as a favourite. Renaming favourites

# Briefly press in the multimedia system display. The home screen is shown.

# Swipe up until FAVOURITES is shown.

# Press on a favourite until the OPTIONS menu is shown.

# Select Rename.

# Enter the name.

# Select OK. 272 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Moving favourites Moving favourites in the favourites menu

# Briefly press in the multimedia system display. The home screen is shown.

# Swipe up until FAVOURITES is shown.

# Press on a favourite until the Options menu is shown.

# Select Move.

# Move the favourite to the desired position.

# Tap on . Moving the favourites menu in the personali sation

# Briefly press in the multimedia system display. The home screen is shown.

# Swipe up until Neue Reihenfolge festlegen

(Define new order) is shown.

# Select Neue Reihenfolge festlegen (Define new order).

# Move Favourites to the new position.

# Tap on .

# To close the menu: select Close. Deleting favourites

# Briefly press in the multimedia system display. The home screen is shown.

# Swipe up until FAVOURITES is shown.

# Press on a favourite until the OPTIONS menu is shown.

# Select Delete.

# Select Yes. Notifications Centre Overview of the Notifications Centre The following communications are collected in the Notifications Centre:

R Communications which are generated by the vehicle or from MBUX. R Communications which are received through the use of services. The following notification types are available for you:

R Navigable destinations and routes R Messages (text messages, e-mail) R Calendar entries and reminders, e.g. from "In R System information, e.g. software update Car Office"

available R Other notifications, e.g. from additional online services that can be subscribed to The Notifications Centre can be found on the home screen, in menus and at the top right of the navigation map j ( page 258). A star in the symbol informs you of new notifica tions. Notifications are briefly shown as they are received. This occurs for nearly every application that you are currently using. If you take no action, these are stored for future access in the Notifications Centre. The notifications are sorted chronologically. The most recent notifications are at the top. Examples of actions include:

R Read aloud R Placing a call R Reply R Calling up a web page R Navigation Some notifications, e.g. a navigation destination, are stored longer. Therefore, it is not necessary to carry out available actions directly on the receipt of the notifications. A route guidance can be started at a later time.

% You can start a global search in the Notifica tions Centre ( page 274). Calling up notifications Opening the Notifications Centre

# On the touchpad: swipe down with two fin gers. or

# On the multimedia system display: press briefly on the j symbol for the Notifica tions Centre. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 273

# On the Touch Control and on the touch pad: mark the j symbol for the Notifica tions Centre by swiping.

# Press on the control element. Selecting a notification

# Swipe up or down.

# Tap or press on the control element. Closing the Notifications Centre

# On the touchpad: swipe up with two fingers. Selecting actions for a notification The following options are available:

R Select the action directly in an application after a notification is received and shown. R Select the action later after calling up in the Notifications Centre.

# An action is available: select the action.

# Several actions are available: if the notifi cation is not open, select the s symbol.

# Select the action. The notification is still available. A notification shows the following information:

R Symbol or image 1 for the application R Title 2, which contains the name, a tele phone number or a navigation destination R The type of notification and additional infor mation 3 R A time stamp 5 R If several actions are available, symbol 4 to open or close the notification. Depending on the type of notification, up to four different actions 6 are available. 274 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Editing notifications

# Calling up the Notifications Centre

( page 273).

# To make settings: select Z.

% If no settings can be made, a message appears.

# Activate or deactivate the setting.

# To delete: select the recycle bin.

# Select Delete or Delete all. Delete deletes a single notification. Delete all deletes all notifications currently shown.

# With Finished you will exit delete mode. Global search Global search overview You can use the global search in the home screen and in the notifications. The global search provides search results for the following categories and their sub-categories:

R Navigation R Media R Telephone, social media, Office in Car R User interface and Digital Owner's Manual R Internet This enables you to search for towns, roads and tourist attractions with the navigation system, for example. During the entry process the most likely sugges tions are shown beneath the search field. When you enter "S", "Stuttgart", "Steak" and "Sandra"

are shown, for example. If you select "Stuttgart", you receive the suggestions "Starbucks", "Steak"

and "City railway", for example. The search results in the list are shown, sorted according to category. Next to the category is the number of results. You will be shown the best results from each category. Additional results can be found after selecting the respec tive category. If you confirm an entry with OK, all categories and the number of results will be shown in a summary. After selecting a category you can select the search results within the category. When you select a search result the detailed view opens. In the detailed view you can choose whether and which actions you want to carry out with the respective search result. For example, you can start route guidance or place a call to somebody. The actions are named correspond ingly. The search can be carried out with the following input methods:

R Entering characters using the on-screen key R Entering characters with handwriting recog board nition R Dictation function Using the global search Multimedia system:

# Select Search . or

# Call up the notifications ( page 273).

# Select Search.

% Alternatively, you can use the o dictation

# To start an action: select an action. After selection of an action, a track is played back or the route to a destination is calcula ted, for example. Switching the sound on/off MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 275 function for the search.

# Enter the search term into the search field. Use the character input function During the entry process the three most likely suggestions are offered beneath the search field. In the list on the right, the top two search results are shown for each category.

# To accept a suggestion: select the sugges tion. The three most likely suggestions are offered.

# Continue the search or accept a suggestion.

# To accept the second search result: select the search result. An action starts or a list is shown.

# Select a search result or an action in the list.

# To show all categories: select OK.

# To show search results for a category:

select a category.

# To show details: select a search result. On the multimedia system

# To mute: press volume control 1. The 8 symbol appears in the status line of the multimedia system display. You will also hear traffic announcements and navigation announcements even when the sound is muted. On the multifunction steering wheel 276 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience)

# To switch on: turn volume control 1 or change the media source. Adjusting the volume On the multifunction steering wheel On the multimedia system

# Turn volume control 1. The volume of the current radio or media source is set. The volume of other audio sources can be adjusted separately. Adjust the volume in the following situations:

R during a traffic announcement R during a navigation announcement The volume of the current media source changes in accordance with the volume of the navigation announcement. R during a telephone call R when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist or

# Press the button.

# Select Settings.

# Select System.

# Select Audio.

# Select a volume setting.

# Set the volume. Entering characters Using the character input function

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Character entry can be carried out with these control elements:

R Touch Control R Touchscreen (multimedia system display) R Touchpad Character entry takes place by cursor control when using the Touch Control and the touchpad. Character entry on the touchscreen is carried out with direct interaction. Character input can be started with a control element and resumed with another.

# When the keyboard is shown, enter the char acters on the control element by swiping and pressing or by tapping (touchscreen). or

# Write the characters on the touchpad or the touchscreen. Entering characters on the touchpad R The handwriting recognition supports charac ter entry with character suggestions. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 277 R If the read aloud function is activated for handwriting recognition then the entered characters are read aloud. Requirements:

The multimedia system is equipped with a voice control system. The read-aloud function is available for the selected system language. Examples of character entry:

R Renaming a favourite R Entering a destination address in the naviga tion system R Entering a web address. Entering characters on the touchpad Requirements:

R If you wish to have the character input read aloud: the read aloud function of the hand writing recognition is switched on

( page 262). R An online connection is required for some functions. 278 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Using the keyboard 1 Input line 2 Suggestions 3 Deletes the entry 4 Switches to voice input 5 Deletes Pressing or pressing briefly deletes the last character entered

# To select a suggestion: select one of the entries.

# Resume character input.

# To enter an alternative character: press and hold a character.

# Select the character.

# To end character input: press the % but ton.

% The available editing functions depend on the editing task, the language set and the character level.

% Entry using the keyboard can also be com pleted using the Touch Control. Pressing and holding deletes the entry 6 Accepts an entry 7 Switches to handwriting input 8 Enters a space 9 Changes the keyboard language A Switches to digits and special characters

(level 2)

#+= switches to additional special charac ters (level 3) ABC switches to letters (level 1) B Pressing or pressing briefly switches between upper-case and lower-case letters Pressing and holding switches to upper-case letters permanently

% When Touchpad tap is switched on, tapping is sufficient to select a character or an option ( page 262).

# Call up the character entry to rename a favourite, for example ( page 271).

# Select the character by swiping and pressing. The character is entered in input line 1. Suggestions are shown in 2. Using handwriting input MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 279 Pressing and holding deletes the entry 6 Enters a space 7 Switches to input using the keyboard 8 Accepts an entry Entering characters on the touchscreen Requirements:

R An online connection is required for some functions.

% When Touchpad tap is switched on, tapping Using the keyboard is sufficient to select an option

( page 262).

# Call up the character entry to rename a favourite, for example ( page 271).

# When the keyboard is displayed, select v.

# Write the character on the touchpad with a finger. The character is entered in input line 1. Suggestions 2 are shown.

# To select a suggestion: select one of the

# Resume character input. The letters can be written next to each other or above each other.

# To end character input: press the % but entries. ton. 1 Input line 2 Suggestions 1 Input line 2 Suggestions 3 Deletes the entry 4 Switches to voice input 5 Deletes Pressing or pressing briefly deletes the last character entered 280 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 3 Deletes the entry 4 Switches to voice input 5 Deletes Pressing briefly deletes the last character entered Pressing and holding deletes the entry 6 Accepts an entry 7 Switches to handwriting input 8 Enters a space 9 Changes the keyboard language A Switches to digits and special characters

(level 2)

#+= switches to additional special charac ters (level 3) ABC switches to letters (level 1) B Pressing briefly switches between upper-

case and lower-case letters Pressing and holding switches to upper-case letters permanently

# Call up the character entry to rename a favourite, for example ( page 271). The keyboard is shown.

# Press briefly on a character key. Using handwriting input The character is entered in input line 1. Suggestions 2 are shown.

# To select a suggestion: select one of the entries.

# Resume character input.

# To enter an alternative character: press and hold a character.

# Select the character.

# To end character input: press the % but ton.

% The available editing functions depend on the editing task, the language set and the character level. 1 Input line 2 Suggestions 3 Deletes the entry 4 Switches to voice input 5 Deletes Pressing briefly deletes the last character entered Pressing and holding deletes the entry 6 Enters a space 7 Switches to input using the keyboard 8 Accepts an entry

# Call up the character entry to rename a favourite, for example ( page 271).

# When the keyboard is displayed, select v .

# Write the character with one finger on the touchscreen. The character is entered in input line 1. Suggestions 2 are shown.

# To select a suggestion: select one of the entries.

# Resume character input. The letters can be written next to each other or above each other.

# To end character input: press the % but ton. Setting the keyboard for character entry Multimedia system:

, Settings . System . Controls . Key-

boards and handwriting

# Confirm Select keyboards. Select the keyboard language in the list. System settings Display Configuring display settings Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Styles Styles

# Select Classic, Sport or Progressive. The multimedia system display changes depending on the style selected. If you revert to the factory settings, the Classic style is set. Adapting the ambient lighting for the style

# Select Adapt ambient lighting. Activate or deactivate the function. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 281 This function adjusts the ambient lighting for the selected display style. Setting the display brightness

# Select Display brightness.

# Select a brightness value. Switching the display off/on

# Off: select Display off.

# On: press a button, %, for example. Selecting the display design

# Select Day/night design.

# Select Automatic, Day design or Night design. play). Switching the temperature display on/off

# Select Temperaturanzeige (Temperature dis

# Select Auentemperatur (Outside tempera ture) or Khlmitteltemp. (Coolant tempera ture). The selected temperature is displayed in the instrument cluster. 282 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Time and date

# Select Time zone:. Setting the time and date automatically Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Time and date

# Deactivate Manual time adjustment. The time and date are set automatically for the selected time zone and summer time option.

% The correct time is required for the following functions:

R Route guidance with time-dependent traffic guidance. R Calculation of expected time of arrival. Setting the time zone Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Time and date Setting the time zone manually Requirements:

R Automatic time zone is deactivated. The list of countries is displayed.

% If there are several time zones available in a country, these will be shown after the coun try is selected.

# Select a country and, if required, a time zone. The time zone set is displayed after Time zone:. Setting the time zone automatically

# Activate Automatic time zone. Setting the time and date format Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Time and date . Set format

# Set the date and time format #. Setting the time and date manually Requirements:

R The Manual time adjustment function is switched on. Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Time and date Setting the time

# Select Set time.

# Set a time.

% For vehicles with GPS the time is set auto matically through the selected time zone. Setting the date Requirements:

R GPS is not installed.

# Select Set date.

# Set a date.

% In vehicles with GPS, a date cannot be set even with active manual time adjustments. The date is then set automatically through the selected time zone. Connectivity R transferring business cards (vCards) into the Switching transmission of the vehicle posi tion on/off Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Wi-Fi &

Bluetooth

# Select Transmit vehicle position.

# Activate or deactivate the function. Bluetooth Information about Bluetooth Bluetooth technology is a standard for short-

range wireless data transfer up to approximately 10 m. You can use Bluetooth to connect your mobile phone to the multimedia system and use the following functions, for example:

R hands-free system with access to the follow ing options:

call lists ( page 338) R Internet connection R listening to music via Bluetooth audio vehicle Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.

% Internet connection via Bluetooth is not available in all countries. Activating/deactivating Bluetooth Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Wi-Fi &

Bluetooth

# Activate or deactivate Bluetooth. Wi-Fi MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 283 The Wi-Fi connection to a Wi-Fi-capable device, e.g. the customer's mobile phone or a tablet PC is established. R multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot Using this function, a tablet PC or notebook can be connected, for example. The connec ted device can use the data tariff of the vehi cle.

% The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries. To establish a connection, you can use the fol lowing methods:

R WPS PIN The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is made via a PIN. Wi-Fi connection overview You can use Wi-Fi to establish a connection with a Wi-Fi network and to access the Internet or other network devices. The following connection options are available:

R Wi-Fi connection R WPS PBC R Security key The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is made by pressing a button (push button). The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is made via a security key. 284 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Setting up Wi-Fi Requirements:

R The device to be connected supports one of the three means of connection described. Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Wi-Fi &

Bluetooth The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.

% The connection procedure may differ depending on the device. Follow the instruc tions that are shown in the display. Further information (see the manufacturer's operat ing instructions). Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi

# Switch Wi-Fi on or off. If Wi-Fi is deactivated, communication via Wi-

Fi to all devices is interrupted. This also means that a connection to the communica tion module cannot be established. Then some functions such as dynamic route guid ance with Live Traffic Information are not available. Connecting the multimedia system with a new device via Wi-Fi This function is available if a communication module is not installed.

# Select Internet settings.

# Select Connect via Wi-Fi.

# Select Add hotspot. Using a security key:

# Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network.

# Select Connect using security key.

# Have the security key displayed on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

# Enter this security key on the multimedia sys tem.

# Confirm the entry with .

% All devices support a security key as a means of connection. Using a WPS PIN:

# Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network.

# Select Connect using WPS PIN input. The multimedia system generates an eight-

digit PIN.

# Enter this PIN on the device to be connected.

# Confirm the entry. Using a button:

# Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network.

# Select Connect via WPS PBC.

# Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options on the device to be connected (see the man ufacturer's operating instructions).

# Press the WPS button on the device to be connected.

# Select Continue in the multimedia system. Activating automatic connection

# Select Connect via Wi-Fi.

# Select the options r of the desired Wi-Fi network.

# Activate Permanent Internet connection. Connecting with a known Wi-Fi

# Select Connect via Wi-Fi.

# Select a Wi-Fi network. The connection is established again. Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Wi-Fi &

Bluetooth Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi-

Fi hotspot The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connec tion established must be selected on the multi media system and on the device to be connec ted.

# Select Vehicle hotspot.

# Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot. Connecting using WPS PIN generation

# Select Connect using WPS PIN generation.

# Enter the PIN shown in the multimedia sys tem display on the device to be connected and confirm. Connecting using WPS PIN entry

# Select Connect using WPS PIN input.

# Enter the PIN that is shown on the external device's display on the multimedia system. Connecting using a button

# Select Connect via WPS PBC.

# Press the push button on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

# Select Continue. Connecting using a security key

# Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot. A security key is displayed. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 285

# Select the vehicle from the device to be con nected. It will be shown with the DIRECT-MB Hotspot 12345 network name.

# Enter the security key which is shown in the multimedia system display on the device to be connected.

# Confirm the entry. Connecting using NFC

# Select Connect via NFC.

# Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

# Bring the mobile device into the NFC area of the vehicle ( page 332).

# Select Finished. The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC. Generating a new security key:

# Select Vehicle hotspot.

# Select Generate security key. A connection will be established with the newly created security key. 286 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience)

# To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab lished, the new security key must be entered. System language Notes on the system language This function allows you to determine the lan guage for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all lan guages. If a language is not available, the naviga tion announcements will be in English. Setting the system language Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Lan-

guage

# Set the language.

% If you are using Arabic map data, the text information can also be shown in Arabic on the navigation map. To do so, select as the language from the language list. Naviga tion announcements are then also made in Arabic.

% Please note that the NTFS file system is not supported. The FAT32 file system is recom mended. Setting the distance unit Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Units

# Select km or mi.

# In the multifunction display of the instrument display, switch the Additional speedometer display on. Data import and export Data import/export function The following functions are possible:

R transferring data from one system or vehicle to another system or vehicle. R creating a backup copy of your personal data and loading it again. R protecting your personal data against unwan ted export with PIN protection. Importing/exporting data

* NOTE Data loss

# Do not remove the data storage medium when data is being exported. Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data. Requirements:

R The vehicle is stationary. R The ignition is switched on. R A USB device is connected. Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . System backup

# Select Import data or Export data. Activating/deactivating PIN protection

# Select Protect data export. Importing

# Select a data storage medium. A prompt appears asking whether you really wish to overwrite the current data. If data originates from another vehicle, this is recog nised during data reading. The multimedia system is restarted once the data has been imported.

% Current vehicle settings can be edited after the import. Exporting If PIN protection is activated, your PIN is reques ted.

# Enter the four-digit PIN.

# Select a data storage medium. The data is exported. The data export may take several minutes.

% After successful export, the data is saved in the "MyMercedesBackup" directory which can be found on the storage medium. Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . PIN pro-

tection Setting the PIN

# Select Set PIN.

# Enter a four-digit PIN.

# Enter the four-digit PIN again. If both PINs match, PIN protection is active. Changing the PIN Requirement:

R A current PIN must be set.

# Select Change settings.

# Enter the current PIN.

# Select Change PIN.

# Set a new PIN. Activating PIN protection for data export

# Select Change settings. Confirm with the PIN. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 287 Activate or deactivate the function. Unblocking the PIN Requirements:

R There is an Internet connection. R A Mercedes me account exists at http://

www.mercedes.me. R An individual user profile is active

( page 266). If the PIN has been entered incorrectly three times, the PIN will be blocked. You can have a single-use password sent to you via the Mercedes me connect online portal to reset the PIN protection.

# Select Unblock PIN.

# Enter the single-use password. PIN protection is reset, and you can set a new PIN.

% Alternatively, you can have PIN protection reset at a Mercedes-Benz service centre. 288 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Software update Information on software updates A software update consists of three steps:

R Downloading or copying of the data required for installation R Installation of the update R Activation of the update by restarting the system The multimedia system provides a message when an update is available. Depending on the source, you can perform vari ous updates:

Source of the update Internet External storage medium, e.g. USB flash drive Update type Navigation map, sys tem updates, Digital Owner's Manual Navigation maps Software updates ensure your vehicle's technol ogy is always up-to-date. In order to constantly improve the quality of our services you will receive future updates for your multimedia system, the Mercedes me connect services and your vehicle's communication mod ule. These will conveniently be sent to you via the mobile phone connection in your vehicle and, in many cases, installed automatically. You can monitor the status of your updates at any time on the Mercedes me portal and find infor mation about potential innovations. Your advantages at a glance:

R conveniently receive software updates via the mobile phone network R the long-term quality and availability of Mercedes me connect is guaranteed R keep your multimedia system and communi cation module up-to-date Further information about software updates can be found at http://me.mercedes-benz.com Performing a software update Requirements:

R An Internet connection is required for updates which are obtained online

( page 352). Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Soft-

ware update Automatically Requirements:

R Your vehicle has a built-in communication module.

# Activate Automatic online updates. The updates will be downloaded and installed automatically. The current status of the updates is dis played. Manually

# Deactivate Automatic online updates.

# Select an update from the list and start the update. Activating the software update

# Restart the system. The modifications from the software update will be active. Important system updates Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured.

% If automatic software updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded auto matically ( page 288). As soon as an update is available for download, a corresponding message appears on the multi media system display. You have the following selection options:

R Accept and install The update will be downloaded in the back ground. R Information Information about the pending system update is displayed. R Later The update can be downloaded manually at a later time ( page 288). Deep system updates Deep system updates access vehicle or system settings and can therefore only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off. If the download of a deep system update is com pleted and the update is ready for installation, you will be informed of this after the next igni tion cycle, for example.

% Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location before starting the installation. Requirements for the installation:

R The ignition is switched off. R Notes and warnings have been read and accepted. R The electric parking brake is applied. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 289 operated while the update is being installed and vehicle functions are restricted. If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the multimedia system display. Please consult a qualified specialist workshop to resolve the problem. Reset function Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Reset Personal data is deleted, for example:

R station presets R connected mobile phones R individual user profiles

% The guest profile is reset when the settings are restored to the factory settings. If all requirements are met, the update will be installed. The multimedia system cannot be

# Select Yes. 290 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) If PIN protection is activated, a prompt appears asking if you also wish to restore this to the fac tory settings during a reset.

# Select Yes.

# Enter the current PIN. The PIN is reset. Or

# Select No. The current PIN stays the same after reset ting.

% If you have forgotten your PIN, a Mercedes-

Benz service centre can deactivate the PIN protection for you. Alternatively, you can request a one-time password via the Mercedes me connect online portal, in order to reset the PIN protection ( page 287). A prompt appears again asking whether you really wish to reset.

# Select Yes. The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. Navigation Switching navigation on Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Navigation) MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 291 Example: digital map with menu 1 To enter a POI or address and additional des tination entry options 2 To interrupt route guidance (if route guid ance is active) 3 To repeat a navigation announcement and switch navigation announcements on/off 292 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) To activate/deactivate announcements using the Advanced settings option:

Announcement of street names which should be turned into Announcement of traffic warnings Audible indication when approaching a POI 4 To call up a route menu Route Alternative routes Route overview Showing/hiding the navigation menu

, . Navigation (Navigation) If no route guidance is active the map and the menu appear. If route guidance is active the map appears in full-screen mode and the menu is hidden. Route list Avoidance options Route settings Traffic Traffic reports Local area messages Report a traffic incident Live Traffic subscription information Position To store a position To show the compass To show Qibla (available in selected coun tries) 5 To call up the menu settings To use or switch options on/off:

To show traffic information To show motorway information To show augmented reality objects Settings for map content and traffic

# Alternatively: press the button.

# To show: tap on the multimedia system dis Destination entry The map appears. The current vehicle posi tion is shown. The menu is shown. play. or

# Press the Touch Control or the touchpad.

# To hide: the menu is hidden automatically. Notes on destination entry

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating integrated communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Entering a POI or address

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 293 and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Where to?

Method 1: on-board search 294 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Destination entry uses the on-board search of the database stored in the multimedia system. The country in which the vehicle is located is set 1.

# Enter the POI or the address using the key board (in the image) or using handwriting recognition 6 in 2. The entries can be made in any order. During destination entry, suggestions are made by the multimedia system. Destination selection takes place in list 3 or with a. The following entries can be made, for exam ple:

R City, street, house number R Street, city R Postcode R POI name R POI category, e.g. Tankstelle (Filling sta tion) R Town, POI name R Telephone number, if this is available for the POI R Contact name Example of quick address entry:

R If you are searching for Knigsstrae in Stuttgart, for example, you can enter STUT and KN. R If you are searching for a POI in the Uni ted Kingdom, for example, you can enter THE SHARD. If you would like to try out both examples, you may also need to change the country.

# As an alternative, voice input 8 can also be

# To switch to handwriting recognition:

used. select 6.

# Write the character on the touchpad. The let ters can be written next to each other or above each other ( page 277).

# To return to entry using the keyboard:

select _. or

# Press the touchpad.

# To delete an entry: select 4. The characters are deleted individually. or

# If characters have been entered in 2, select next to the input line. The complete entry is deleted.

# To switch to upper-case or lower-case let

# To switch to special characters and sym ters: select B. bols: select A. characters.

# With #+= you can switch to additional special

# To enter a space: select 7.

# To set the language: select 9.

# Select the language.

% This function is useful for countries in which several character sets are supported. An example is Russia, which uses Cyrillic and Latin characters.

# To change the country: select country indi cator 1. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 295

# Enter the country indicator, e.g. F for France. The list is filtered.

# Select the country on list 3. The destination can be entered.

# To accept a destination: select the destina tion in list 3.

# If the destination is ambiguous, select the destination in the list. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. Method 2: on-board search Destination entry uses online map services. If the on-board search finds no suitable destina tions or if you change countries, the online search is available.

# Select country indicator 1.

# Select the provider for the online service from the countries list. or

# If the on-board search delivers no search results, select Online search.

# Enter the destination or the POI in the input line. The entry order is not relevant, e.g. 296 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) street and town. Use the functions described for the on-board search. The search results are displayed.

# Select the destination or the POI in the list. The detailed view for the route is displayed.

% Online search is not available in all coun tries. Requirements:

R You have a user account for the Mercedes me portal. R The service is activated. You can carry out the activation yourself or have it carried out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Further information can be found at: http://

www.mercedes.me Selecting previous destinations Requirements:

R Previous destinations are stored. R For destination suggestions: you have cre ated a profile ( page 265). The Learn from location history option is acti vated for your profile ( page 269). The multimedia system has already gathered sufficient data in order to show destination suggestions. Selecting a POI Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Where to? . POIs Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Where to? . PREV. DESTINA-

TIONS The following destinations can be selected:

R Previous destinations and routes R Destination suggestions R Stored destinations and routes( page 306) R External destinations and routes ( page 312)

# Select the destination or route The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated.

% If you save a previous destination or a sug gestion as a favourite ( page 312), you can select these from the favourites ( page 299). Searching using categories (no route guid ance)

# Select the category. or

# Select ALL CATEGORIES.

# Select the category and the sub-category (if available).

# When searching, filter with the search field according to categories or within the search results. The search takes place in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position. The search result are sorted by distance in ascending order. The POIs show the following information:

R direction of the linear distance to the POI

(arrow) R name of POI R linear distance to the POI

# Select a POI with a or select from the list. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. Searching using categories (route guidance active)

# Select the category. or

# Select ALL CATEGORIES.

# Select the category and the sub-category (if available).

# When searching, filter with the search field according to categories or within the search results.

# Select the search positions In the vicinity, Near destination or Along the route.

# If there are intermediate destinations for the route and Near destination has been selec ted, select the POI in the route overview.

# Select a POI with a or select from the list. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. Searching for personal POIs Requirements:

R A USB device is connected with the multime dia system. R Personal POIs with the GPS Exchange format

(.gpx) have been saved in the "PersonalPOI"

folder on the USB device.

# Select Personal POIs.

# Select a category.

# If route guidance is active, select a search position In the vicinity, Near destination or Along the route.

# Select a personal POI. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. or

# Enter a search entry into the search field and filter the list.

# Select a personal POI. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 297 Editing personal POI categories

# Select a personal POI category from the list s. A menu opens.

# To change a name: select Change name.

# Enter the name.

# Select a.

# To change a symbol: select Change icon.

# Select a symbol.

# To delete a personal POI category: select Delete.

# Select Yes. Configuring categories for quick-access Up to five categories can be configured for quick-access.

# Select ALL CATEGORIES.

# Select the category and the sub-category (if available).

# Select f or . f adds the category. removes the category. 298 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience)

# If there are already five categories, select the

# Select the address. category which should be replaced. Selecting a contact Requirements:

R A mobile phone is connected to the multime dia system ( page 330). Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Where to? . Contacts Using the contact list

# Select a contact. The contact details are displayed.

# Select the address. Using search entry

# Enter names or telephone numbers, for example, into the search field.

# Select a.

# Select the contact. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated.

% Route guidance to a contact address is relia ble in the following cases:

R The contact address is complete. R The contact data matches the map data in the digital map. Entering geo-coordinates Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Where to? . Geo-coordinates

# Select Latitude or Longitude.

# Select geo-coordinates as latitude and longi tude coordinates in degrees, minutes and seconds. To do this swipe up or down respectively. The map shows the position.

# Confirm the entry with a.

# To set the destination: select the arrow or the arrow with f. Selecting from the map Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Navigation)

# Move the map ( page 320).

# When the crosshair marks the destination, press and hold on the control element. If a destination is located exactly on the crosshair, the destination address is dis played. If several destinations are located around the crosshair, a list shows the available roads and POIs.

# Select the destination in the list. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. Showing POIs in the vicinity of the map If several destinations are located around the crosshair, the function is available.

# Select .

# Select POIs in the vicinity. The map appears.

# Swipe left or right on the control element. The previous or next POI is highlighted on the map. The name or the address is shown.

# Select the POI symbol.

# Alternatively, to filter the display accord ing to the POI category: scroll on the con trol element.

# Select the POI category.

% User defined permits the selection of per sonal POI symbols ( page 321). Selecting from favourites Requirements:

R Destinations are saved as favourites. Save a previous destination or a destination suggestion as a favourite ( page 312). Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Where to? . Aus Favoriten

(From favourites)

# Select a favourite. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. Route Calculating a route Requirements:

R The destination has been entered. R The destination address is shown. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 299 Route guidance is not active

# Select 1. The route to the destination is calculated. The map shows the route. Route guidance then begins. Route guidance is active

# Select 1. The arrow shows a f. A prompt is shown.

# Select Add to route or Single destination. Single destination: the selected destination address is set as the new destination. The previous destinations and intermediate desti

 

 

300 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) nations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins. Add to route: the selected destination address is set as the next intermediate desti nation. Route guidance begins. If there are already four intermediate destina tions, the multimedia system asks whether intermediate destination 4 should be deleted. Confirm the prompt with Yes. Searching for POIs in the vicinity

% The POI symbols to the right of POIs in the vicinity show the first three categories for quick-access. You can configure these cate gories ( page 296).

# Select a POI symbol. The search results are displayed.

# Select a POI. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated. or

# Select POIs in the vicinityr.

# Search using categories, enter a search entry or search for a personal POI ( page 296).

# Select a POI. The destination address is shown. The route can be calculated.

# Hold the mobile phone near to the multime dia system and scan the QR code.

# To call up an Internet address: if a web address is available, select www.

# To show on the map: select Display on Other menu functions

# To save the destination: select f .

# Select an option. The following options are available for you:

R Save in "Previous destinations"

R Save as favourites R Save as "My home"

R Save as "Work" address

# To call the destination: if a telephone num ber is available, select Call.

# To share the destination using NFC or QR code: select Share via NFC or QR code.

# Hold the NFC area of the mobile phone (see manufacturer's operating instructions) on the mat or place the mobile phone on it

( page 332). or map. Selecting a route type Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Route Icon . Route . Route set-

tings

# Select the route type. If no route has been created, the next route is calculated on the basis of the new route type. If a route has already been created, the route is calculated on the basis of the new route type. R Fast route A route with a quick journey time is cal culated. R Short route A route with a short driving distance is calculated. Live Traffic Information and FM RDS-TMC are not available in all countries. R Eco route R AFTER ASKING An economical route is calculated. The journey time may be somewhat longer than for quicker routes. R Trailer mode Requirement: the option is available if a trailer has been coupled with the vehicle. A prompt is shown in the multimedia sys tem. Confirm the prompt. The route is optimised for trailer opera tion. The dynamic route can be switched on or off for the route types named. R Automatic The route is calculated with the currently set route type. Traffic messages via Live Traffic Informa tion or FM RDS-TMC are taken into account ( page 313). A prompt appears when a new route is detected with a shorter journey time based on traffic reports. You can con tinue to use the current route or use the dynamic route instead ( page 317). R Off No traffic reports are taken into account for the route. The following additional route settings can be activated or deactivated:

R Suggest alternative route If the option is switched on ( page 304), then an alternative route is calculated for each route. R Activate commuter route Requirements:

You have created a profile ( page 265). The Learn from location history option is activated for your profile ( page 269). MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 301 The multimedia system has gathered suf ficient data in order to show destination suggestions. Routes have been learned for these desti nation suggestions. If the option is activated ( page 304), navi gation starts route guidance for the learned routes automatically without voice output. Alternative for calling up route types

# Select M Navigation (Naviga tion)MZM Advanced settingsM Route settings. Selecting route options Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Route Icon . Route . Avoid options Avoiding areas

# Select Avoid areas ( page 323). 302 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Avoiding motorways, ferries, tunnels, moto rail trains, unpaved roads

# Switch on the avoid option. Using toll roads

# Select Use toll roads.

# Switch the Payment by cash or card and Electronic billing options on or off. The route takes into account roads that require the payment of a usage fee (toll) cor responding with the payment type selected. These route options are not available in every country. The selected route options cannot always be implemented. Therefore, a route may include a ferry, for instance, even though the avoid Ferries option is enabled. A message appears and you will hear a corresponding message. Using routes requiring a special toll sticker

# Select Use vignette roads.

# Activate All. or

# Switch on the countries that should be taken into account. The route takes into account roads in the selected countries which require you to pay a time-based fee (vignette). A vignette allows for the use of a route network for a limited time period. Alternative for calling up route options

# Select M Navigation (Navigation) M Z M Advanced settings M Avoid options. Selecting notifications Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . ! . Advanced settings

# Switch an announcement on or off. R Announce street names The multimedia system announces the names of the roads that will follow the upcoming change of direction. This function is not available in all coun tries and languages. R Announce traffic warnings Showing destination information for the route Requirements:

R A destination is entered. Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Route Icon . Route

# Select Route overview. When route guidance is active, the destina tion and intermediate destinations are shown, if these have been entered and not yet been passed. The route can include up to four intermediate destinations.

# Select a destination or an intermediate desti nation. The following information is displayed:

R Remaining driving distance R Time of arrival R Remaining journey time R Name, destination address R Phone number (if available) R Web address (if available) Planning routes Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Route Icon . Route overview

# Select Set intermediate destination.

# Enter the intermediate destination as a POI or address, for example ( page 293).

# Select the intermediate destination. After selection of an intermediate destina tion, the route overview is shown again.

# Calculating the route with intermediate desti nations( page 303)

% If there are already four intermediate desti nations, delete an intermediate destination

( page 303). Editing a route with intermediate destina tions Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Route Icon . Route overview

# To change the sequence of destinations:

select : for a destination. A menu opens.

# Select Move. is highlighted.

# Move the intermediate destination or the destination with 4 or s to the desired position.

# Tap on .

# To delete a destination: select : for an intermediate destination or destination.

# Select Delete. The destination is deleted. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 303 Calculating a route with intermediate desti nations Requirements:

R The destination and at least one intermediate destination have been entered. Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Route Icon . Route overview

# Select Start route guidance. or

# If the route has been edited, select To Navi-

gation.

# Confirm the prompt with Yes. The route is calculated. Route guidance begins. 304 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Displaying the route list Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Route Icon . Route

# Select Route list. The list shows the route sections. The cur rent vehicle position is marked on the map. The current vehicle position is shown with the following information:

R The symbol for the current vehicle posi tion is displayed. R The name of the road on which you are currently driving is shown. R The road number of the road on which you are currently driving is shown. The route list is updated during the journey.

# To show route sections: swipe up or down on the control element. The route section is shown on the map. Selecting an alternative route Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Route Icon

# Select Alternative route. The routes are displayed in accordance with the setting made in the route settings. The routes are numbered.

# Select the alternative route. Activating a commuter route Requirements:

R The Learn from location history option is acti vated for your profile ( page 269). R The multimedia system has gathered suffi cient data in order to show destination sug gestions. R Routes have been learned for these destina tion suggestions. Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Route Icon . Route . Route set-

tings

# Activate Activate commuter route. The navigation system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. It automatically starts a route guidance without voice output. For the daily commuter route, traffic inci dents on the route are also reported when driving without active route guidance. Switching the automatic filling station search on/off Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Fahrzeug (Vehicle)

# Switch Reserve fuel level on or off. When the fuel reserve level is reached, and the option is switched on, a prompt appears asking whether you want to start searching for filling stations. Starting an automatic filling station search

# If there are already four intermediate des

# Calculate the route ( page 299). Requirements:

R The automatic filling station search is activa ted ( page 304) . Driving situation The fuel level in the fuel tank reaches the reserve fuel level. The Fuel tank reserve level Do you want to start the search for filling stations? message is shown.

# Select Yes. The automatic filling station search begins. The available filling stations along the route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current posi tion are displayed.

# Select a filling station. The address of the filling station is displayed.

# Calculate the route ( page 299). The filling station is set as the destination or the next intermediate destination. tinations: select Yes in the prompt. The filling station is entered in the route overview. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route guidance begins. Starting the automatic service station search Requirements:

R ATTENTION ASSIST and the Suggest rest area function are activated ( page 213). R There are service stations along the route section ahead. Driving situation The Suggest rest area. Do you want to start the rest area search? message is shown.

# Select Yes. The service station search starts. The availa ble service stations along the route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position are displayed.

# Select a service station. The service station address is displayed. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 305 The service station is set as the destination or the next intermediate destination.

# If there are already four intermediate des tinations: select Yes in the prompt. The service station is entered in the route overview. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route guidance begins. Showing a stored route on the map Requirements:

R A USB device with stored routes is connec ted with the multimedia system ( page 365). R The route is stored in the "Routes" folder with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx). Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Where to? . Stored routes

# Select a route.

# Select Display on map.

# Move the map ( page 320). 306 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Starting a saved route Requirements:

R A USB device with stored routes is connec ted with the multimedia system ( page 365). R The route is stored in the "Routes" folder with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx). Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Where to? . Stored routes

# Select a route.

# Select Start route guidance from the begin-

ning or Start route guidance from current location. Route guidance starts.

% The route can be saved with f in the menu ( page 299). Recording a route Requirements:

R A USB device is connected with the multime dia system ( page 365). Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Where to? . Stored routes

# To start recording: select Start to record new route. A red recording symbol is shown. The route is stored on the USB device.

# To stop recording: select End recording. Saving a recorded route Requirements:

R A USB device is connected with the multime dia system ( page 365). Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Where to? . Stored routes

# Select a route.

# Select f.

# Select Store in "Previous destinations". The route is stored in the "Previous destina tions" memory and can be called up from there for route guidance. Editing a stored route Requirements:

R A USB device with stored routes is connec ted with the multimedia system ( page 365). Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Where to? . Stored routes

# Select a route with :.

# To enter a name: select Change name.

# Enter the name.

# Select OK. or

# When the name has been changed, press the

% button.

# Select Yes.

# To delete a route: select Delete.

# Select Yes. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 307 Changing direction overview Changes of direction are shown in the following displays:

R Detailed image of the junction The display appears when you drive into a junction. R 3D image The display appears when driving on junc tion-free, multi-lane roads, for example on motorway exits and motorway interchanges. Route guidance Notes on route guidance

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating integrated communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. Route guidance begins once a route has been calculated. The road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving rec ommendations. Driving recommendations are:

R Navigation announcements R Route guidance displays R Lane recommendations If you do not follow the navigation announce ments or if you leave the calculated route, a new route is calculated automatically. Driving recommendations may differ from the actual road and traffic conditions if:

R The route is diverted R The direction of a one-way street has been changed For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. The route may differ from the ideal route due to the following:

R Roadworks R Incomplete digital map data 308 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Example: detailed image of the crossing with upcoming changes of direction 1 Current distance to the change of direction 2 Changing direction 3 Current vehicle position 4 Manoeuvre point Example: 3D image of the upcoming change of direction 1 Current distance to the change of direction 2 Changing direction 3 Current vehicle position 4 Manoeuvre point There are three phases when changing direction:

R Preparation phase If there is enough time between the changes of direction, the multimedia system prepares you for the upcoming change of direction. A navigation announcement, e.g. "Prepare to turn right", is issued. The map appears in full-screen mode. The status line shows: the direction informa tion or the name of the road which is to be turned into and the distance to the change of direction. R Announcement phase The multimedia system announces the upcoming change of direction, e.g. by announcing "Turn right in 100 m". The display is split into two parts. The map is displayed on the left; on the right, there is a detailed image of the junction or a 3D image of the upcoming change of direction. R Change-of-direction phase The multimedia system announces the immi nent change of direction, e.g. by announcing

"Now turn right". The display is split into two parts. The change of direction takes place when the distance to manoeuvre point 4 is shown with 0 m and the symbol for vehicle position 3 has reached manoeuvre point 4. When the change of direction is complete, the map appears in full-screen mode. R Recommended lane 1

% Changes of direction are also shown in the Instrument Display. Lane recommendations overview This display appears for multi-lane roads. The multimedia system can show lane recom mendations if the digital map contains the rele vant data. In this lane, you will be able to complete both the next change of direction and the one after that. R Possible lane 2 In this lane, you will only be able to complete the next change of direction. R Lane not recommended 3 In this lane, you will not be able to complete the next change of direction without chang ing lane. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added.

% Bus lanes are also shown. Lane recommendations can also be dis played in the Instrument Display and in the Head-up Display. Using motorway information Requirements:

R The Motorway information option is switched on ( page 322). 1 Recommended lane (white arrow, blue back ground) 2 Possible lanes (white arrow) 3 Lanes not recommended (grey arrow) MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 309 When driving on the motorway, upcoming motor way facilities 1 and available service facilities 2 are shown in the overview. These include fill ing stations, car parks, service stations and motorway exits, for example.

# To open the display: select r. The entries are sorted according to increas ing distance from the current vehicle posi tion.

# Select an entry.

# Select a service facility from the list. The details are displayed. The map shows the position and the driving time to this location. 310 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) The following functions can be used in the detailed display, for example:

R Search for a POI in the vicinity. R Save the destination. R Place a call at the destination.

# Calculate the route ( page 299). Destination reached Once the destination is reached, you will see the chequered flag. Route guidance is finished. When an intermediate destination has been reached, you will see the intermediate destina tion flag with the number of your inter mediate destination. After this, route guidance is continued. Switching navigation announcements on/off

# To switch off: turn the volume control on the steering wheel or next to the touchpad during a navigation announcement

( page 275). The Spoken driving recommendations have been deactivated. message appears. or

# Show the navigation menu ( page 292).

# Select !. The symbol changes to #.

# To activate: select # . The current navigation announcement is played. The symbol changes to !.

% This function can be added and called up from the favourites within the navigation cat egory. Switching navigation announcements on/off during a phone call

# Press the button on the steering wheel or on the touchpad. or

# Briefly press in the multimedia system display.

# Select Settings.

# Select System.

# Select Audio.

# Select Navigation and traffic announce-

ments.

# Switch Driving recommendations during call on or off. Adjusting the volume of navigation announcements Multimedia system:

, . Settings . Sys-

tem . Audio . Navigation and traffic announcements

# Select Fahrempfehlungslautstrke (Driving recommendation volume).

# Set the volume. Route guidance is active

# Turn the volume control on the steering wheel or next to the touchpad during a navi gation announcement. Switching audio fadeout on/off during navi gation announcements

# Press the button on the steering wheel or on the touchpad. or

# Briefly press in the multimedia system display.

# Select Settings.

# Select System.

# Select Audio.

# Switch Audio fadeout on or off. Repeating navigation announcements Requirements:

R a route has already been created. R route guidance is active. Multimedia system:

, Navigation (Navigation)

# Select !.

# Select #. The current navigation announcement is repeated.

% This function can be added and called up from the favourites within the navigation cat egory. Cancelling route guidance Requirements:

R a route has been created. R route guidance is active.

# Show the navigation menu.

# Select !. Route guidance to an off-road destination An off-road destination is within the digital map. The map contains no roads that lead to the des tination. You can enter geo-coordinates or off-road desti nations on the map. Route guidance guides you for as long as possible with navigation announcements and displays on roads that are known to the multimedia system. Shortly before you reach the last known position on the map, you will hear the "Please follow the direction arrow" announcement, for example. The display shows a direction arrow and the lin ear distance to the destination. Route guidance from an off-road location to a destination In an off-road position, the current vehicle posi tion is located within the digital map on roads that are not available. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 311 The following displays appear when route guid ance begins:

R A message appears that the road is not on R A direction arrow showing the linear direc the map. tion to the POI. When the vehicle is back on a road known to the multimedia system, route guidance continues as normal. Off-road status during route guidance Due to roadworks, for example, there may be dif ferences between the data on the digital map and the actual course of the road. In such cases, the multimedia system will temporarily be unable to locate the vehicle's current position on the digital map. The vehicle is off-road. The following displays appear when the vehicle is off-road:

R A message appears that the road is not on R A direction arrow showing the linear direc the map. tion to the POI. 312 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) When the vehicle is back on a road known to the multimedia system, route guidance continues as normal. Destination Saving the current vehicle position Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Route Icon . Position

# Select Store position. The current vehicle position is saved to the

"Previous destinations" memory. Editing the previous destinations Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Where to? . PREV. DESTINA-

TIONS The following destinations can be edited:

R Previous destinations and routes R Destination suggestions Requirements: the Learn from location his-

tory option is activated for your profile

( page 269). The multimedia system has gathered suffi cient data in order to show destination sug gestions.

# To save as "Work" address: select Save as

"My work" . Deleting a previous destination

# To delete a destination: select : for the previous destination. R External destinations and routes

# To no longer display a destination sugges tion: select : for a destination sugges tion.

# Select Do not suggest.

# Select Delete.

# Select Yes.

# To delete all destinations: select Z.

# Select Delete all.

# Select Yes. Saving the last destination as a favourite

% After saving, the destination can be called up via the favourites ( page 271).

# Select : for a destination.

# Select Save as favourite.

# To save as a favourite: select Save as

# To save as "Home" address: select Save favourite . as "My home" . Using external destinations and routes External destinations and routes can be received from the following sources, for example:

R Mercedes-Benz Apps R door-to-door navigation A prompt appears on the multimedia display. Received destinations and routes are saved in the previous destinations.

# A destination has been received: select Yes. Route guidance with current traffic reports R The traffic situation is updated at short, regu

# Calculate the route.

# If route guidance is already active, select Set as intermediate dest. or Start new route guidance. or

# If a destination was received with photo information, select Start route guidance.

# Calculate the route. or

# If a destination has been received from an app, select Details.

# Calculate the route.

# A route has been received: select Yes.

# Select Start route guidance from the begin-

ning or Start route guidance from current location. Route guidance starts from the selected position. Traffic information overview

% The services are not available in every coun try. Traffic reports can be received with the following services:

R Live Traffic Information R FM RDS-TMC It is not possible to use both services simul taneously. Live Traffic Information or FM RDS-TMC is displayed with a symbol.

% Hazard warnings can be received using the Car-to-X service.

% There may be differences between the traffic reports received and the actual road and traffic conditions. Important information on Live Traffic Informa tion:

R Current traffic reports are received via the Internet connection (for selected countries). MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 313 lar intervals. R In selected countries, the subscription service is available free of charge for a period of three years from the manufacturing date. Subscription information shows the status

( page 314). Registering Live Traffic Information R The service must be registered with Mercedes me ( page 314):

This secures the free-of-charge period of three years. Information on the vehicle's position is regularly sent to Daimler AG. The data is immediately ren dered anonymous by Daimler AG and forwarded to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traf fic reports relevant to the vehicle's position are sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor for the flow of traffic and helps to improve the quality of the traffic reports. 314 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) If you do not want to transmit the vehicle posi tion, you have the following options:

R You deactivate the service in the Mercedes me portal. R You have the service deactivated at a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Useful information on FM RDS-TMC:

R A FM RDS-TMC radio station broadcasts traf fic reports alongside the radio programme. R FM RDS-TMC is not available in all countries. Displaying subscription information Requirements:

R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information. Multimedia system:

, . Navigation . Route Icon . Traffic

# To display manually: select Live Traffic Sub-

scription Info. Depending on the status, one of the following messages appears:

R the traffic data supplier's logo and the validity of the subscription are displayed. R the logo of the traffic data provider is shown. The subscription is valid. R the logo of the traffic data provider is shown. The subscription has expired. The subscription expiry date is automatically dis played:

R one month before the expiry date R one week before the expiry date R on the expiry date

% The subscription can be extended

( page 315). Registering Live Traffic Information Requirements:

R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic R You have a user account on the Mercedes Information. me website. The Live Traffic Information service must be reg istered. This secures the full period of three years.

# Create a user account at Mercedes me at:

http://www.mercedes.me. A valid email address is required for this.

# Register the vehicle using the vehicle identifi cation number (VIN).

# To carry out the registration yourself: con nect the vehicle with your Mercedes me user account in the Mercedes me portal. A code is sent to the multimedia system.

# Enter the code into the multimedia system.

# Accept the general and specific terms of use.

# Registration in the Mercedes-Benz Showing traffic information service centre: have the connection carried out in a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Extending a subscription Requirements:

R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic R You have a user account on the Mercedes Information. me website.

# Call up the Mercedes me website.

# Call up the Mercedes me user account.

# Switch to the Mercedes me connect online store via the linked vehicle.

# Select the Live Traffic Information service.

# Select the renewal period.

# Add the product to the shopping basket.

# Accept the general and specific terms of use. Live Traffic Information remains activated for the selected extension period. Activation begins on the date of extension. Requirements:

R The Traffic display is switched on ( page 316). R The following traffic displays are switched on

( page 316):

Incidents Freier Verkehrsfluss (Free traffic flow) Delay Multimedia system:

# Select Navigation (Navigation). The map shows the following traffic informa tion:

R traffic incidents, for example:

roadworks road blocks

- warning messages When route guidance is active, the sym bols for traffic incidents will be shown in MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 315 colour on the route. Off the route they are grey. R warning message symbols:

symbol d road safety notes, e.g. when approaching the end of a traffic jam If the vehicle approaches a danger area on the route, a warning message is displayed on the map. In addition, an audible notification can follow a hazard warning.

R traffic flow information:

traffic jam (red line) congested traffic conditions (orange line) slow-moving traffic (yellow line) free-flowing traffic (green line) R display for traffic delays on the route last

ing at least one minute 316 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Displaying traffic incidents Requirements:

R The Incidents display is switched on

( page 316). Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Route symbol . Traffic

# Select Traffic messages 3. The list is sorted according to distance and shows the traffic incidents received. The traffic incidents on the route are shown first. A traffic incident shows the following infor mation:

R Street number R Traffic incident symbol R Cause R Distance from current vehicle position

# Select a traffic incident. The detailed information, for example the route section, is shown. Showing traffic incidents in the vicinity of the map

# Select a traffic incident symbol on the map. The details about the traffic incident are dis played.

# Select .

# Select Traffic incidents in vicinity. The map shows the traffic incident symbols in the vicinity. Traffic incident information is displayed in the status line:

R Traffic incident symbol R Cause of the traffic incident, e.g. con struction work R Warning message (highlighted red)

# To select a traffic incident symbol: select q or r.

# To select the map section: tap on the mul timedia system display. or

# Press the Touch Control or the touchpad.

# Move the map

# To return to the navigation map: tap on

%. or

# Press the % button on the Touch Control or on the touchpad. Switching the traffic information display on Multimedia system:

, . Navigation . Z

# Activate Traffic. With this option additional traffic flow infor mation and delays can be shown. Activating Incidents, Free Flow and Delay

# Select Advanced settings.

# In the TRAFFIC category, activate the Inci-

dents, Freier Verkehrsfluss (Free traffic flow) and Delay entries. If traffic information has been received, then traffic incidents such as roadworks, road blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warn ing messages are displayed. The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration.

% The notification is shown in another applica tion. Confirm the notification.

# To accept the new route: select Accept rec-

Showing local area messages Multimedia system:

, . Navigation . Route Icon . Traffic

# Select Area messages. Local area messages are shown, for example fog or heavy rain.

# Select a local area message. The details are displayed. Accepting a detour recommendation after a prompt Requirements:

R AFTER ASKING is activated ( page 300). R route guidance is active. R there are traffic reports for the current route. If a new route with a shorter driving time is determined, the current and new routes will be shown.

# To maintain the current route: select Keep ommended detour. to current route. Car-to-X-Communication Car-to-X-Communication overview Requirements:

R The vehicle is equipped with a multimedia system featuring navigation and a communi cation module with an activated, integrated SIM card. R Car-to-X-Communication is activated.

% Car-to-X-Communication is available in selected countries. The communication module automatically estab lishes an Internet connection once the ignition is switched on. If there are any hazard warnings, they will be provided shortly thereafter. Depend ing on the mobile phone connection, the provi MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 317 sion takes place from within a second up to about a minute. R Hazards are recognised automatically be the vehicle or may be reported by the driver. These are then sent to vehicles with Car-to-X-

Communication in the immediate vicinity. R Current and precise details relating to hazard spots near the vehicle's current position are received. This gives you sufficient time to adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. The use of Car-to-X-Communication requires the regular transmission of vehicle data to Daimler AG. The data is then immediately pseudony mised by Daimler AG. The vehicle data is deleted after an appropriate amount of time has elapsed

(several weeks) and is not stored permanently.

% Data which serves as identification is replaced during the pseudonymisation proc ess. In this way, your identity is protected against access by unauthorised third parties. 318 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Displaying hazard warnings Multimedia system:

# Select Navigation (Navigation). If hazard warnings are available these will be shown on the map. The following hazard warnings are shown on the map:

R broken-down vehicles R accidents R hazardous weather R general hazards R hazard warning lights, if activated R mobile roadworks The display is not available in all regions. In the Federal Republic of Germany the dis play is currently available in the Federal State of Hesse.

% If the vehicle is approaching a hazard spot with a vehicle speed of at least 60 km/h, the voice output "Traffic incident ahead" is issued. The voice output is not issued for hazardous weather. Sending hazard warnings Automatically detected hazard warnings are sent by the vehicle.

# To send hazard warnings yourself: select M Navigation (Navigation) M Route Icon M Traffic.

# Select Traffic incident. A prompt is shown.

# Select Yes. The Thank you for supporting accident pre-

vention. message appears. Route guidance with augmented reality (AR) Activating route guidance with augmented reality Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Z

# Activate Augmented Reality. When the option is activated, the video image from the camera shows the driver's view in the multimedia system display. You can also select the following options:

R The video image will always be shown with the visible objects during route guidance. R The video image will be shown with the visi ble objects instead of the navigation map before a turning manoeuvre. After the turning manoeuvre, the navigation map will be shown again. Examples of objects could be driving manoeuvre arrows, street names and house numbers, for example.

# Select Advanced settings.

# Select Augmented Reality.

# Select Always or When cornering. Switching on display of POIs with augmen ted reality for route guidance Requirements:

R Augmented reality is activated ( page 318). Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Z . Advanced settings . Aug-

mented Reality

# Activate POI symbols. When the option is switched on, the same POI symbols are shown in the video image as those configured for the navigation map. Selecting a POI for route guidance with aug mented reality Requirements:

R Augmented reality is activated ( page 318). R The display of POIs is activated

( page 318). Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Navigation) Selection of a POI is possible up to a vehicle speed of 50 km/h.

# Briefly press on a POI symbol. or

# Select a POI when the next POIs are shown in a list during route guidance. The detailed view appears.

# Calculate the route ( page 299). Activating displays of street names and house numbers for route guidance with aug mented reality Requirements:

R Augmented reality is activated ( page 318). Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Z . Advanced settings . Aug-

mented Reality

# Activate Street names and Show house num-

bers. During route guidance, street names and house numbers are shown as objects in the video image. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 319 Switching on display of traffic lights with augmented reality for route guidance Requirements:

R Augmented reality is activated ( page 318). Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Z . Advanced settings . Aug-

mented Reality The video image will be enlarged to show traffic lights under the following conditions:

R The vehicle is standing at a junction in first position in the lane. R The option is switched on. When the vehicle pulls away the navigation map is shown again.

# Scroll up until TRAFFIC LIGHT INDICATOR is shown.

# Select Off, AFTER ASKING or Automatic. If AFTER ASKING is set and a traffic light dis play is available, a message is shown. When the message is confirmed the video image shows a traffic light. 320 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) If Automatic is set the video image shows a traffic light if available. Map and compass Setting the map scale Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Navigation) Zooming in

# When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with one finger on the multimedia system display or the touchpad. or

# Move two fingers apart on the multimedia system display or on the touchpad. Zooming out

# Tap with two fingers on the multimedia sys tem display or the touchpad. or

# Move two fingers together on the multimedia system display or on the touchpad.

% You can set the unit of measurement of the map scale ( page 286). Moving the map Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Navigation)

# On the multimedia system display: move a finger in any direction when the map is dis played.

# On the touchpad: call up the navigation menu by pressing.

# Swipe your finger up. Symbol 1 appears on the map. The map can be moved.

# Touch the control element and move your fin ger in any direction. The map moves in the corresponding direc tion under the crosshair. The more you move your finger away from the starting position, the faster the map moves. The position of 2 shows the direction and the speed the map is moving. When the map has been moved the following information appears in the status line, for example:

R The distance from the vehicle's current position is shown. R Information about the current map posi tion, e.g. the name of the road, is shown. If you select 3, the map with the current position is shown again. The following functions can be used:

R Select a destination on the map

( page 298). R Select a POI ( page 296). R Show traffic incidents on the map

( page 316). Rotating the map

# Move the map a little on the multimedia sys Alternative using quick-access

# Repeatedly tap or press on the com tem display with your finger.

# With two fingers, rotate anti-clockwise or clockwise. Selecting the map orientation Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Z . Advanced settings

# Swipe up until MAP ORIENTATION is shown.

# Select the map orientation. The # dot indicates the current setting. R 2D north up: the 2D map view is dis played so that north is always at the top. R 2D heading up: the 2D map view is aligned to the direction of travel. R 3D: the 3D map view is aligned to the direction of travel. pass symbol on the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D heading up to 2D north up. If the map is moved, it can switch between 3D and 2D north up. Selecting POI symbols for the map display Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Z . Advanced settings POIs include filling stations and hotels, for exam ple. These can be displayed as symbols on the map. Not all POIs are available everywhere. Personal POIs are destinations which you have saved on a USB device, for example.

% The display of POI symbols on the map can be activated or deactivated as a favourite.

# Activate POI symbols. Configuring the map display

# Select r POI symbols. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 321

# Switch Show all on or off.

# Switch the categories (Quick POI) on or off.

# Select r ALL CATEGORIES.

# Switch Show all on or off. or

# Select the categories and sub-categories (if available) r.

# Switch the categories and sub-categories (if available) on or off. The POI symbols for the selected categories are displayed. Configuring personal POIs

# Select r Personal POIs.

# Activate or deactivate the categories. When the category is switched on and the vehicle approaches a personal POI in this category, a visual and audible notification can be issued.

# To set a notification when approaching:

select a category or a personal POI :. A menu opens.

# Switch Visual and Audible on or off. 322 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Resetting personal POIs

# Select Z.

# Select RESET. The settings are reset to the standard set tings. Selecting text information Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Z . Advanced settings

# Scroll up until TEXT INFORMATION is shown.

# Select Current street, Geo-coordinates or None. Current street shows the street you are cur rently driving on at the bottom of the display. When the map is moved, the street name, the POI name or the area name appears under the crosshair. Geo-coordinates displays the following infor mation:

R longitude and latitude R elevation The elevation shown may deviate from the actual elevation. R number of satellites from which a signal can be received When the map is moved, this information does not appear. None switches the display off. Switching motorway information on/off Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Z

# Switch Motorway information on or off. When the option is switched on, additional information about the motorway facilities ahead appears during the motorway journey. These include car parks, service stations and motorway exits, for example. Displaying the next intersecting street Requirements:

R Route guidance is not active. Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Z . Advanced settings

# Swipe up until TEXT INFORMATION is shown.

# Activate Next intersecting street. If the function is switched on and the journey continues without route guidance, the name of the next intersecting street will be dis played at the upper edge of the display. Displaying the map version Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Z . Advanced settings

# Swipe upwards and select Map version.

% Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Overview of avoiding an area You can define areas along a route that you would like to avoid. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 323

# To change the map scale: move two fingers apart or together on the multimedia system display or on the touchpad. The map is zoomed in or out.

# To set an area: press on the central control

# Press on the central control element. Taking the area for the route into account

# Select an area in the list.

# Activate Avoid area. Motorways or multi-lane expressways, which are routed through an area to be avoided are taken into account for the route. Avoiding a new area Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Route Icon . Avoid options . Avoid areas

# Select Avoid new area.

# To start in the map: select Using map.

# Move the map ( page 320).

# To start via destination search: select Search destination.

# Enter the address ( page 293).

# Select the destination in the list or accept with a. The map appears. element. The area is entered into the list. Changing an area Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Route Icon . Avoid options . Avoid areas

# Select an area in the list.

# Select Edit. Moving the area on the map

# Swipe in any direction on the central control

# To show an area: tap or press on the control element. A red rectangle appears. This designates the area that should be avoided. Changing the size of the area

# Press on the central control element.

# Swipe up or down on the central control ele element. ment. If route guidance is active, a new route is cal culated. If there is no route yet, the setting is carried over to the next route guidance. The route can include an area that is to be avoided in the following cases:

R the destination is located in an area that is to be avoided R there is no sensible alternative route Deleting one or all areas Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Route Icon . Avoid options . Avoid areas Deleting an area

# Select an area in the list.

# Select Delete. 324 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience)

# Confirm the prompt with Yes. Deleting all areas

# Select Z.

# Select Delete all.

# Confirm the prompt with Yes. Updating the map data Updating at the Mercedes-Benz Service Centre The digital maps generated by the map software become outdated in the same way as conven tional road maps. Optimal route guidance can only be provided by the navigation system in conjunction with the most up-to-date map data. Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre. You can receive updates to the digital map there. Online map update

% The online map update service is not availa ble in all countries. The online map update service from Mercedes me connect can be used to update the map data. You can use the following update options:

R for one region (automatic map update) R for several or all regions (manual map update) The map data will first be downloaded onto a storage medium and then updated on the multimedia system. do not require an activation code for the map data which is provided with your vehicle. If the map data on your vehicle has been instal led at the factory and you wish to reinstall it, you do not need to enter the activation code. An activation code is required for purchased map data. Observe the following when entering the activa tion code:

R The activation code can be used for one vehi The service must be activated at a Mercedes-

Benz service centre in order to use automatic updates. Further information on the online map update http://www.mercedes.me. Further information on updates: http://

manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/connectme/

de_DE/index.html. Map data Your vehicle is supplied with map data at the fac tory. Depending on the country, map data for your region is either pre-installed or the map data is supplied on a data storage medium. You cle R The activation code is not transferable R The activation code has six digits In the event of the following problems, please contact a Mercedes-Benz service centre:

R The multimedia system does not accept the activation code R You have lost the activation code The number of satellites received is shown.

% This function is not available in all countries.

% The satellite maps for these map scales are not available in all countries. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 325 Displaying the compass Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Route Icon . Position

# Select Compass. The compass display shows the following information:

R the current direction of travel with bear ing (360 format) and compass direction R longitude and latitude coordinates in degrees, minutes and seconds R height (rounded) R number of GPS satellites from which a signal can be received Displaying Qibla Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Route Icon . Position

# Select Qibla. The arrow on the compass shows the direc tion to Mecca in relation to the current direc tion of travel. Setting the map scale automatically Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Z . Advanced settings The map scale is set automatically depending on your driving speed and the type of road.

# Activate Auto zoom.

% The automatically selected map scale can be changed manually. After a few seconds, this is automatically reset. Displaying the satellite map Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Z . Advanced settings

# Switch Satellite map on or off. If the option is activated, satellite maps are displayed in map scales from 2 km. If the option is deactivated, satellite maps are not displayed in map scales from 2 km to 20 km. Showing the range Requirements:

R The function is available. Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Z . Advanced settings When the function is active the range is shown on the map. R For petrol and diesel vehicles: green display R For hybrid vehicles:

Total range: green display Electrical range: blue display When the lower reserve capacity is reached then the range display on the map is switched off.

# Swipe upwards and switch on Range. 326 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Displaying weather information and other map contents Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Z . Advanced settings

# Select ONLINE MAP CONTENTS. The available services are displayed. The services are provided by Mercedes me con nect.

# Switch on a service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover. The service information, e.g. weather symbols, is not shown in all map scales. Further information about available services and about displaying information in the map scales: http://www.mercedes.me The services are not available in every coun try.

% Requirements:

R You have a user account for the Mercedes me portal. R The service is available. R The service is activated. Further information can be found at: http://

www.mercedes.me Showing map view in the multifunction dis play of the instrument cluster Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Z . Advanced settings

# Swipe upwards and select Map view in instrument cluster.

# To set the map scale automatically: switch Auto zoom on or off. When the option is activated, the map scale is set automatically depending on your driv ing speed and the type of road.

# To select the map orientation: select the map orientation. The # dot indicates the current setting. R 2D heading up: the 2D map view is aligned to the direction of travel. R 2D north up: the 2D map view is dis played so that north is always at the top. R 3D: the 3D map view is aligned to the direction of travel. Parking service Selecting parking options Requirements:

R The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me portal. The parking service is within the scope of the navigation service. R Parking is activated ( page 327). Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Navigation)

# Tap on j in the map.

# Select a parking option. The following information is displayed (if available):

R Destination address, distance from cur rent vehicle position and arrival time R Information on the multi-storey car park/car park For example, opening times, parking changes, current occupancy, maximum parking time, maximum access height. R Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards) R Details on parking tariffs R Number of available parking spaces R Payment method (e.g. at the parking machine) R Services/facilities at the parking option R Telephone number

# Calculating the route ( page 299). The following functions can also be selected (if available):

R Search for POIs in the vicinity. R Save the destination. R Place a call at the destination. R Share the destination using NFC or QR code. R Call up the web address. R Show the destination on the map. Displaying parking options on the map Requirements:

R The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me portal. Telephony MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 327 The parking service is within the scope of the navigation service. Multimedia system:

, . Navigation (Naviga tion) . Z

# Activate Parking. The parking options within the vicinity of the current vehicle position are shown. Telephone 328 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Telephone menu overview 1 Battery status of the connected mobile phone 2 Bluetooth device name of the currently connected mobile phone/the mobile phone in the foreground (two phone mode) 3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network 4 Options 5 Device manager 6 To switch mobile phones (two phone mode) 7 Numerical pad 8 contact search Bluetooth profile overview Bluetooth profile of the mobile phone Function PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Contacts are auto matically displayed in the multimedia sys tem MAP (Message Access Profile) Message functions can be used Telephony operating modes overview The following telephone operating modes are available:

R A mobile phone is connected to the multime dia system via Bluetooth ( page 330). R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth (two phone mode).

You can use all the functions of the multi media system with the mobile phone in the foreground.

You can receive incoming calls and mes sages with the mobile phone in the back ground. You can interchange the mobile phone in the foreground and background any time

( page 331).

% Irrespective of this, Bluetooth audio func tionality can by used with any mobile phone

( page 365). Notes on telephony

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating integrated communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 329 and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the vehi cle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. Further information can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: http://

www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. 330 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Information on telephony The following situations can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion:

R there is insufficient network coverage in the area R you move from one transmission/reception station to another and no communication channels are free R the SIM card used is not compatible with the network available R a mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time HD Voice:

R To improve voice quality, the multimedia sys tem supports telephone calls in HD Voice. R In order to use this function, the mobile phones and the mobile phone network pro vider of the person you are calling must sup port HD Voice. Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate. Connecting a mobile phone Requirements:

R Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone

(see the manufacturer's operating instruc tions). R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia system ( page 283). Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . Searching for a mobile phone

# Select Connect new device. Connecting a mobile phone (authorisation using Secure Simple Pairing)

# Select a mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

# If the codes match: confirm the code on the mobile phone.

% For older mobile phone models, enter a one to sixteen-digit number code on the mobile phone and on the multimedia system for authorisation.

% Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorised on the multimedia system. Authorised mobile phones are reconnected automatically. Connecting a second mobile phone (two phone mode) Requirements:

R At least one mobile phone is already connec ted to the multimedia system via Bluetooth. Multimedia system:

, . Telephone .

# Select Connect new device.

# Select the mobile phone.

# Select With <Mobile phone>. The selected mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system. Functions of the mobile phone in two phone mode Functions overview Functions of the mobile phone in the foreground Functions of the mobile phone in the background Full range of func tions Incoming calls and messages Interchanging mobile phones (two phone mode) Multimedia system:

, . Telephone

Select

. You can also interchange the two connected mobile phones in the following submenus:

R Contacts R Call list R Messages After interchanging the mobile phones in one of the submenus, the mobile phone in the fore ground is replaced by the mobile phone in the background. Changing the function of a mobile phone Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . Activating a function

# Select a grey symbol in the line of a mobile phone. The corresponding function is activated. Deactivating a function

# A function is active: select the coloured symbol in the line of a mobile phone. The mobile phone is disconnected from the multimedia system.

# Several functions are active: select a col oured symbol in the line of a mobile phone. The corresponding function is deactivated. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 331 Disconnecting/deauthorising a mobile phone Multimedia system:

, . Telephone .

# Select in the line of the mobile phone.

# To disconnect: select Disconnect. If applicable, the mobile phone will be auto matically reconnected when the vehicle is next started.

# To deauthorise: select De-authorise. Information on Near Field Communication

(NFC) NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer or (re)connection of a mobile phone with the multimedia system. The following functions are available without having authorised a mobile phone:

R Transferring a URL or a contact to be viewed in the multimedia system (see the manufac turer's operating instructions). R Setting up the vehicle's Wi-Fi access data via the system settings ( page 285). Further information can be obtained at: http://

www.mercedes-benz.com/connect er's operating instructions) on mat 1 or place the mobile phone on it. Setting the reception and transmission vol ume 332 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Using the mobile phone with Near Field Com munication (NFC) Requirements:

R NFC is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions) R The mobile phone's screen is switched on and unlocked (see the manufacturer's oper ating instructions)

# To connect a mobile phone: hold the NFC area of the mobile phone (see manufactur

# Follow the additional prompts on the multi media system display to connect the mobile phone. Connect the mobile phone in single telephone mode ( page 330). Connect the mobile phone in two phone mode

( page 330).

# To replace a mobile phone: hold the NFC area of the mobile phone (see manufactur er's operating instructions) on mat 1 or place the mobile phone on it.

# Follow the additional prompts on the multi media system display to replace the mobile phone in one or two phone mode

( page 331).

# If required, confirm the prompts on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper ating instructions). Further information can be found at: http://

www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Requirements:

R A mobile phone is connected ( page 330). Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . This function ensures optimal language quality.

# Select in the line of the mobile phone.

# Select Reception volume, Transmission vol-

ume or Ringtone.

# Set the volume. Further information on the recommended recep tion and transmission volume: http://

www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Setting the ringtone Multimedia system:

, . Telephone .

# Select in the line of the mobile phone.

# Select Ringtone.

# Set the ringtone.

% If the mobile phone supports the transfer of the ringtone, you will hear the ringtone of the mobile phone instead of that of the vehi cle. Calls Telephone operation Multimedia system:

, . Telephone Starting/stopping mobile phone voice recog nition Requirements:

R The mobile phone in the foreground is con nected with the multimedia system

( page 330). Starting mobile phone voice recognition

# Press and hold the button on the multi function steering wheel for more than one second. You can use mobile phone voice recognition. Stopping mobile phone voice recognition

# Press the 8 or ~ button on the multi function steering wheel.

% If a mobile phone is connected via Smart phone Integration, the voice recognition of this mobile phone is started or stopped. Making a call by entering the numbers

# Select _.

# Enter a number.

Select The call is made. Accepting a call Select Accept. Rejecting a call Select Reject. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 333 Activating functions during a call The following functions are available during a call:

Ending a call Select

R R End call Microphone off R _ Numerical keypad (show to send DTMF tones) R W Add call R Transfer to phone (an active call in hands-free mode is transferred over to the telephone)

# Select a function. 334 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Conducting calls with several participants Accepting/rejecting a waiting call Requirements:

R There is an active call ( page 333). R Another call is being made. Switching between calls

# Select the contact. The selected call is active. The other call is on hold. Activating or ending a call on hold

# Select Continue call or End call. Conducting a conference call Create conferen. call. Select The new participant is included in the confer ence call.

Ending an active call Select End call.

Requirements:

R There is an active call ( page 333). If you receive a call while already in a call, a message is displayed. Depending on the mobile phone and network operator you will hear a call-waiting sound. In addition, in two phone mode you will hear an acoustic signal when the call goes through to the other (not yet active) mobile phone. Accept. Select The incoming call is active. If only one mobile phone is connected with the multimedia system, the previous call will be put on hold. If during a call you accept a call with the other mobile phone when in two phone mode then the existing call is ended.

% On some mobile phones, the call on hold is activated as soon as the active call is ended. Select Reject.

% This function and behaviour depends on your mobile phone network provider and the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper ating instructions). Contacts Information about the contacts menu The contacts menu contains all contacts from existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone or memory card. Depending on the data source, you have the fol lowing number of contacts:

R Permanently saved contacts: 3,000 entries R Contacts loaded from the mobile phone:

5,000 entries per mobile phone From the contacts menu, you can perform the following actions:

R Make a call, for example call a contact

( page 336) R Navigation ( page 298) R Compose messages ( page 339) R Additional options( page 336) MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 335 Calling up contacts Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . g The following options can be used to search for contacts:

R searching by initials R searching by name R searching by phone number Editing the format of a contact's name Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . Z . General settings . Name format The following options are available:

R Surname, first name R Surname First name R First name Surname

# Select an option. If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system ( page 330) and automatic call up

( page 335) is activated, the mobile phone's con tacts are displayed in the address book. The multimedia system can show suggestions based on frequently used contacts as well as incoming and outgoing calls. ( page 269). These are shown at the top of the contact list. Downloading mobile phone contacts Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . Z . Device settings Synchronise contacts auto-

Automatically

Activate matically. Manually Deactivate matically. Synchronise contacts auto-

# Select Synchronise contacts.

# Enter characters into the search field.

# Select the contact. A contact can contain the following details:

R phone numbers R navigation addresses R geo-coordinates R Internet address R E-mail address R Voice Tag (if set) R Relation (if set) 336 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Overview of importing contacts Contacts from various sources Source Requirements:

USB device Bluetooth con nection The USB device is connected with the USB port. If the sending of vCards via Bluetooth is supported, vCards can be received on mobile phones or net books, for example. Bluetooth is activa ted in the multimedia system and on the respective device

(see the manufactur er's operating instruc tions). Importing contacts into the contacts menu Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . Z . General settings . Import contacts

# Select an option. Saving a mobile phone contact Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . g

# Select r in the line of the mobile phone contact.

# Select .

# Select Save in vehicle.

# Select Yes. The contact saved in the multimedia system is identified by the symbol. Calling a contact Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . g

# Select Search contacts .

# Enter characters into the search field.

# Select the contact.

# Select the telephone number. The number is dialled. Selecting further options in the contacts menu Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . g

# Select r in the line of the contact.

# Select . Depending on the stored data, the following options are available:

R Add voice tag/Delete voice tag R Set relationship/Remove relationship R Send DTMF tones (for a number with DTMF tones) The function is available when a call is active.

# Select an option. Selecting options for suggestions in the con tacts menu Deleting contacts Requirements:

R a profile has been created ( page 265). R the Allow contact suggestions setting is switched on ( page 269). Requirements:

R The contacts are saved in the vehicle. R To delete an individual contact, this has been imported manually into the vehicle. Multimedia system:

, . Telephone Select Call list .

in the line of a suggested con Select tact. The following options are available:

R Save as favourite The suggestions are saved as global favourites and do not appear on the home screen. R Do not suggest

# Select an option. Multimedia system:

, . Telephone Deleting all contacts

# Select Z.

# Select General settings.

# Select Delete contactsr.

# Select an option. Deleting a contact

# Select g.

# Select r in the line of the contact.

# Select .

# Select Delete contacts.

# Select Yes. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 337 Saving a contact as a favourite Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . f Add favourite

# Select a contact.

# Select r in the line of the contact.

# Select the telephone number. The contact is stored as a favourite on the home screen. Deleting favourites Multimedia system:

, . Telephone

# Select a favourite on the home screen.

# Press and hold the favourite.

# Select Delete.

# Select Yes. Deleting all favourites

# Select Z.

# Select Device settings.

# Select Delete all favourites.

# Select OK. 338 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Call list Overview of the call list Depending on whether your mobile phone sup ports the PBAP Bluetooth profile or not, this can have different effects on the presentation and functions of the call list. If the PBAP Bluetooth profile is supported, the effects are as follows:

R The call lists from the mobile phone are dis played in the multimedia system. If the PBAP Bluetooth profile is not supported, the effects are as follows:

R The multimedia system generates a call list independently as soon as calls are made in the vehicle. R The call list is not synchronised with the call lists in the mobile phone. The multimedia system can show suggestions based on frequently used contacts as well as incoming and outgoing calls ( page 269). These are shown at the top of the call list. Selecting options for suggestions in the call list Making a call from the call list Multimedia system:

, . Telephone Select Call list .

# Select an entry. The call is made.

Select Call list .

# Select r in the line of an entry. The following options are available:

R Open Contact (if the contact is saved) R Send message Requirements:

R A profile has been created ( page 265). R The Allow contact suggestions setting is switched on ( page 269). Multimedia system:

, . Telephone Select Call list .

in the line of a suggested entry. Select The following options are available:

R Save as favourite R Do not suggest

# Select an option. R When connecting the mobile phone, you may have to confirm the connection for the PBAP Bluetooth profile. Calling up additional options in the call list Multimedia system:

, . Telephone MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 339 Deleting the call list Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . Z . Device settings

# Select Delete call lists.

# Select Yes.

% This function is only available if your mobile phone does not support the PBAP Blue tooth profile. Text messages Overview of message functions In the messages menu you can receive and send text messages. If the connected mobile phone supports the Bluetooth MAP profile, the message function can be used on the multimedia system. You can obtain further information about set tings and supported functions of Bluetooth-

capable mobile phones from a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: http://www.mercedes-

benz.com/connect Some mobile phones require further settings after being connected to the multimedia system

(see manufacturer's operating instructions). Reading a text message

# Select a message. Configuring displayed messages Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . Messages

# Select Z. The following options are available:

R All messages R New and unread messages R Messages while the vehicle is in motion R Off (the message function is no longer available.)

# Select a setting. Reading messages Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . Messages

# Select a contact. The messaging history with this contact is shown. Using the read-aloud function

# Select a message.

Select

. The message is read aloud. Dictating and sending a new message Requirements:

R There is an Internet connection. Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . Messages Select a new message. Adding a recipient

# Select f.

# Select a contact. 340 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Dictating text

# Dictate the text and send the message

( page 339).

Select The dictating function is started.

# Say the message. After the voice message has been processed, it is shown as text.

Using templates Multimedia system:

, . Telephone Select

# Select Messages. Sending a message Select

% When the vehicle is stationary you can use the keyboard to write a message. No Inter net connection is required to use the key board. Replying to a message in the messaging his tory Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . Messages

# Select a contact. The messaging history opens. Using a template as a new message

Select in the menu for a new message.

# Select a template. Answering a message with a template

# Select a message sequence with a contact.

# Select .

# Select a template. Forwarding a message Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . Messages

# Select a contact.

# Select a message.

# Select .

# Select Forward. Calling a message sender Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . Messages

# Select a contact.

# Select .

# Select Call. Using telephone numbers or URLs from a text message Requirements:

R An Internet connection is required to call up a URL. Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . Messages

# Select a contact.

# Select a message.

# Select a telephone number or a URL in the message. If a URL is selected the web browser opens. If a telephone number is selected the follow ing options are available:

R Call R Write new text message

# Select an option. Deleting a message Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . Messages

# Select a contact.

# Select a message.

# Select .

# To delete the message: select Delete. In Car Office

"In Car Office" functions Using "In Car Office", you can connect your online services with the multimedia system. The following functions are available:

R Display of upcoming meetings in the calen dar navigation ence R Selection of a meeting as a destination in the R Display of upcoming telephone conferences R Display of participants in a telephone confer R Display and selection of calls to be made

% Please note that certain functions are only available when the vehicle is stationary. Calling up In Car Office Requirements:

R A mobile phone is connected to the multime dia system as the main telephone. R You have a user account on the website from Mercedes me (http://www.mercedes.me). MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 341 R The "In Car Office" service is activated in the Mercedes me portal. R You have a user account with an online service, for example Office 365.

# Select In Car Office. You will see an appointments overview for the current day. You can find the following displays in the appointments overview:

R All day: all-day appointment R Lightning: appointment clash Selecting a calendar entry function in "In Car Office"

Multimedia system:

, . In Car Office . Calen-

dar . &

# Select an appointment. The following functions are available:

R Read aloud 342 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) R R Call Navigate R Reject

# Select a function. Selecting the functions of Tasks & Calls Multimedia system:

, . In Car Office . Tasks & calls

# Select an entry. The following functions are available:

R Read aloud R No translation R Call This option is only available for calls. R Delete

# Select an option. Apple CarPlay Overview of Apple CarPlay

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. iPhone functions can be used via the multime dia system using Apple CarPlay. They are oper ated using the touchscreen, touchpad, Touch Control or the Siri voice-operated control sys tem. You can activate the voice-operated control system by pressing and holding the button on the multifunction steering wheel. When using Apple CarPlay via the voice-oper ated control system, the multimedia system can still be operated via LINGUATRONIC

( page 240). Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec ted via Apple CarPlay to the multimedia sys tem. Also for use of Apple CarPlay with two phone mode, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth with the multimedia system. The availability of Apple CarPlay may vary according to the country. The service provider is responsible for this appli cation and the services and content connected to it. Information on Apple CarPlay When Apple CarPlay is being used, the iPod media source is not available for the respective iPhone. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 343 Only one route guidance can be active at a time. If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys tem, it is closed when route guidance is started on the mobile phone. Connecting an iPhone via Apple CarPlay Requirements:

R The current version of your device's operat ing system is being used (see the manufac turer's operating instructions). R The full range of functions for Apple Car Play is only available with an Internet con nection.

# Connect the iPhone to the USB port on the multimedia system using a suitable cable ( page 365). Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg ulations A message with the data protection regulations appears.

# Select Accept & start.

% When the Apple CarPlay connection is Android Auto active, you can switch Start automatically on or off. Android Auto overview Exiting Apple CarPlay

# Press the button.

% If Apple CarPlay was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the appli cation starts in the background when recon nected. You can call up Apple CarPlay in the main menu. Calling up Apple CarPlay sound settings

Select Smartphone tion. under the applica Ending Apple CarPlay

# Disconnect the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Mobile phone functions can be used with Android Auto using the Android operating sys tem on the multimedia system. It is operated 344 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) using the touchscreen or the voice-operated control system. You can activate the voice-oper ated control system by pressing and holding the button on the multifunction steering wheel. When using Android Auto via the voice-operated control system, the multimedia system can still be operated via LINGUATRONIC ( page 240). Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec ted via Android Auto to the multimedia system. Also for use of Android Auto with two phone mode, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth with the multimedia system. The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto Apps may vary according to the country. The service provider is responsible for this appli cation and the services and content connected to it. Information on Android Auto If a mobile phone is used with Android Auto, USB access using the media menu is not possi ble for this mobile phone. Only one route guidance can be active at a time. If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys tem, it is closed when route guidance is started on the mobile phone. Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto Requirements:

R The first activation of Android Auto on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary for safety reasons. R The mobile phone supports Android Auto R The Android Auto app is installed on the from Android 5.0. mobile phone. R In order to use the telephone functions, the mobile phone must be connected to the mul timedia system via Bluetooth ( page 330). If there was no prior Internet connection, this is established with the use of the mobile phone with Android Auto. R The mobile phone is connected to the multi media system via the USB port using a suitable cable ( page 365). R The full range of functions for Android Auto is only possible with an Internet connection. Multimedia system:

, Smartphone . Android Auto Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg ulations A message with the data protection regulations appears.

# Select Accept & start.

% When the Android Auto connection is active, you can switch Start automatically on or off. Exiting Android Auto

# Press the button.

% If Android Auto was not displayed in the fore ground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Android Auto in the main menu. Calling up the Android Auto sound settings

Select Smartphone tion. under the applica Ending Android Auto

# Disconnect the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary. Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Android Auto or Apple CarPlay, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted:

R Software release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymised) The transfer of this data is used to optimise communication between the vehicle and the mobile phone. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly generated. This has no connection to the vehicle identifica tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi media system is reset ( page 289). The following driving status data is transmitted:

R Transmission position engaged R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling R Day/night mode of the instrument cluster The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted:

R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction Transferred vehicle data with Android Auto and Apple CarPlay and driving MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 345 This data is only transferred while the navigation system is active, in order to improve it (e.g. so it can continue functioning when in a tunnel). Mercedes me connect Information on Mercedes me connect Mercedes me connect provides the following services:

R Accident and breakdown management (me button or automatic accident or breakdown detection) R Concierge Service (when the service is acti vated), appointment requests or similar (me button) R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (SOS button) Mercedes me connect accident and breakdown management, the Mercedes me connect Con cierge Service and the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call centre are available for you around the clock. 346 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) The me button and the emergency call system can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel ( page 346). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system ( page 346). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, always call the national emergency services first using the standard national emergency service phone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

( page 349). Further information on Mercedes me connect, the provided service scope and operation:

http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/cars/

connectme/de_DE/index.html Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system Requirements for using Mercedes me con nect services in the vehicle:

R You have access to a GSM network. R The contract partner's GSM network cover age is available in the respective region. R The ignition must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automati cally. Multimedia system:

, . Telephone . g

# Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the multimedia system display. Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Further information on Mercedes me connect, the provided service scope and operation are available at: http://manuals.daimler.com/baix/

cars/connectme/en_GB/index.html Making a call via the overhead control panel 1 Service call button (me button) 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button

# To make a service call: press me button 1.

# To make an emergency call: press SOS button cover 2 briefly to open. R Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre R Other products and services from Mercedes-

# Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least Benz one second. If a service call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls. Information about the service call using the me button A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has been initiated via the me button in the over head control panel or the multimedia system. In the event of a breakdown, you will get sup port:

R A qualified Mercedes-Benz technician carries out repairs on site and/or the vehicle will be towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre. You may be charged for these services. You can find information on the following topics:

R Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle Data is transmitted during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre ( page 348). Information on Mercedes me connect acci dent management The Mercedes me connect accident manage ment is an extension of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ( page 349). An emergency call is made to the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call centre after an accident:

R A voice connection is made to a contact per son at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. R If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre for wards the call to Mercedes me connect acci dent management. R If necessary, the vehicle will be towed to a Mercedes-Benz service centre. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 347 If the vehicle detects a minor accident, a mes sage appears in the multimedia system. The message is confirmed in the multimedia sys tem:

R A voice connection is made to a contact per son at Mercedes me connect accident man agement. R If necessary, the vehicle will be towed to a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Mercedes me connect service message If you have activated the maintenance manage ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You will then receive individual recom mendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multi media system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. 348 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience)

# To arrange a service appointment: select Call. After your agreement the vehicle data is sent and a Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre employee deals with your appointment. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This service outlet will then contact you within 24 hours.

% If you select Later after the service message appears, the message is hidden and reap pears after a certain period of time. Consenting to data transfer for Mercedes me connect Requirements:

R There is an active service call via the multi media system or the me button in the over head control panel ( page 346).

% In certain countries you must confirm the data transfer. If the accident and breakdown service and Mercedes me connect Concierge Service are not activated on Mercedes me, the Do you want to transmit vehicle data and the vehicle's position to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre in order to improve the processing of your request? mes sage appears.

# Select Yes. Relevant identification data is transmitted automatically. More information on Mercedes me: http://

www.mercedes.me ber Transferred data during a service call When you make a service call via Mercedes me connect, various data will be transmitted. Depending on which service is activated, the fol lowing data is transmitted when a call is made:

R Vehicle identification number R Mercedes me customer identification num ber R Reason for the initiation of the call R Language set in the multimedia system R Confirmation of the data protection prompt R Current vehicle location R Service and workshop code R Selected data about the status of the vehicle The following data is transmitted if no service is activated and the data protection prompt has been confirmed:

R Vehicle identification number R Mercedes me customer identification num R Reason for the initiation of the call R Language set in the multimedia system R Confirmation of the data protection prompt The following data is transmitted if the data pro tection prompt has been rejected:

R Reason for initiating the call R Rejection of the data protection prompt Mercedes me and apps Information about Mercedes me When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 349 Availability is country-dependent. For more information consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre or visit the Mercedes me portal:

http://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Calling up the Mercedes me user account Multimedia system:

, . Mercedes me & Apps Your vehicle is connected with a user account

# Select Mercedes me. Information about the connected user account appears. Your vehicle is not yet connected with a user account

# Select Mercedes me.

# The instructions for creating a user account and connecting the vehicle with this follow on the multimedia system display.

% If the Mercedes me app is available on a mobile phone, the vehicle connection can be accomplished using the QR code shown. Calling up the Mercedes me services Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Requirements:

R The vehicle is connected with the user account. Multimedia system:

, . Mercedes me & Apps

# Select Services. Within the various categories you can see the Mercedes me services you have already pur chased and also those still available to pur chase. To activate or deactivate the services, log in to your user account in the Mercedes me portal. Deleting a connection between a user account and the vehicle Multimedia system:

, . Mercedes me &

Apps . Mercedes me

# Select Delete vehicle assignment.

# Enter the PIN of the connected user account. Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call system The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the relevant contract partner. Insufficient network coverage from the relevant contract partner may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. The ignition must be switched on before an auto matic emergency call can be made. Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system can help to decisively reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. The emergency call can be made automatically

( page 350) or manually . Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation. 350 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Notification in the multimedia system dis play:

SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or there is a malfunction with the emergency call system. As soon as the emergency call system is availa ble, the notification disappears. During an active emergency call, G appears in the display. You can find more information on the regional availability of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/

connect_ecall.

% If an emergency call is unavailable, a mes sage to this effect also appears in the multi function display of the instrument cluster. Triggering an automatic emergency call Requirements:

R The ignition is switched on. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. If restraint systems such as airbags or seat belt tensioners have been activated after an acci dent, the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system may automatically initiate an emergency call. The emergency call has been made:

R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call centre. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the public emergency services call cen tres. R Under certain circumstances data is also transmitted in the voice channel to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. This allows measures for rescue, recovery or towing to a Mercedes-Benz service centre to be initiated quickly. If your vehicle is equipped with an SOS button in the overhead control panel, it flashes until the emergency call has been completed. It is not possible to immediately end an auto matic emergency call. If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system cannot connect to the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call centre, the emergency call is automat ically sent to the public emergency services call centre. If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the display.

# Dial the emergency number 999 or 112 on your mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated:

R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer gency call centre operator. R On the basis of the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu lance is sent to the vehicle immediately. Triggering a manual emergency call

# If the vehicle has an SOS button in the over head control panel: press and hold the but ton for at least one second. The emergency call has been made:

R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-

Benz emergency call centre. R If the road and traffic conditions permit, remain in the vehicle until a voice connection is established with the emergency call centre operator. R On the basis of the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the public emergency services call cen tres. R In certain situations data is also transmitted in the voice channel to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. This allows measures for rescue, recovery or towing to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to be initiated quickly. If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system cannot connect to the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call centre, the emergency call is automat ically sent to the public emergency services call centre. If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the display of the multimedia system.

# Dial the emergency number 999 or 112 on your mobile phone. Transmitted data with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system In the event of an automatic or manual emer gency call, as well as for a 112 emergency call, data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call centre or the public emergency serv ices call centre. The following data is transmitted:

R the vehicle's GPS position data MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 351 R the last GPS position data on the route (a few 100 metres before the incident) R direction of travel R vehicle identification number R the vehicle drive type R the estimated number of people in the vehi R whether Mercedes me connect is available or R whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R the time of the accident R the language setting on the multimedia sys cle not tem For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated:

R the current vehicle position can be called up R a voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established 352 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience)

% For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving traffic information, cannot be performed for up to two hours after sending an emergency call. Self-diagnosis display of the emergency call system (Russia) Your car verifies the operability of the emer gency call system each time the ignition is ON. In case of system failure, you will be informed with text message on the instrument cluster and with red indicator SOS NOT READY on the multi media display. Please, make sure, that during 3-10 seconds after switching ignition ON the red indicator SOS NOT READY in the upper right corner of the multimedia display is switched OFF, this means the emergency call system passed diagnostics successfully. If necessary, switch ON the multi media display, if it was switched OFF before. Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode

(Russia) Requirements:

R The starter battery has sufficient charge. R the ignition is switched on. R The vehicle has been stationary for at least one minute.

# To start the test mode: press and hold the

~ button on the multifunction steering wheel for at least five seconds. The test mode is started and automatically ends after the language test has been per formed.

# To end the test mode manually: switch off the ignition. The test mode is ended. Online and Internet functions Internet connection Information on connecting to the Internet

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. To use Mercedes-Benz Apps and access the Internet, Mercedes me connect must be activa ted and operational. Furthermore, Mercedes me connect must be activated for Internet access. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, you can establish an Internet connection in the following ways:

R Vehicles with a communication module:

Internet use including Mercedes me connect services and data roaming ( page 353). R Vehicles without a communication mod ule:

via Bluetooth with a data-enabled mobile phone ( page 353) via Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile phone ( page 353) via business telephony The Internet functions can only be used to a limi ted degree whilst driving. Internet connection via communication mod ule On vehicles with a built-in communication mod ule, the Internet connection is established via an integrated SIM card. If the data volume limit is reached, the availabil ity of Mercedes me connect services is limited. The data volume must be purchased on Mercedes me connect. Setting up an Internet connection via Wi-Fi Requirements:

R the Wi-Fi function is activated on the multi media system ( page 284). R the Wi-Fi function is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). R Internet access via Wi-Fi is activated (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Internet connection via Wi-Fi is restricted or does not function if:

R the mobile phone is switched off R mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile R the Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the multi R the Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the phone media system mobile phone the mobile phone Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Wi-Fi &

Bluetooth . Internet settings . Connect via Wi-Fi

# Select the network. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 353

# Log in to the Wi-Fi network ( page 284). Setting up an Internet connection via Blue tooth Requirements:

R The mobile phone support the Bluetooth profile PAN (Personal Area Network) R The mobile phone is connected to the multi media system via Bluetooth ( page 330). The Internet connection via Bluetooth is restric ted or does not function if:

R the mobile phone is switched off R the mobile phone is connected a an addi tional mobile phone ficient phone R mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile R the Bluetooth function on the multimedia system is switched off and the mobile phone is to be connected via Bluetooth R Internet access via Wi-Fi is deactivated on R the mobile phone network coverage is insuf 354 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) R the Bluetooth function is switched off on the mobile phone and the mobile phone is to be connected via Bluetooth R neither the mobile phone network nor the mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a telephone and an Internet connection R the mobile phone has not been enabled for Internet access via Bluetooth If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system for the first time via Bluetooth, you will be assisted through the process of setting up an Internet connection. The Internet connection can also be configured manually. Further information can be obtained at http://

www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Wi-Fi &

Bluetooth . Internet settings . Connect via Bluetooth

# Select the mobile phone. The Internet connection is established. Establishing an automatic Internet connec tion Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Wi-Fi &

Bluetooth . Internet settings

# Highlight the mobile phone.

# Select r.

Activate tion. Permanent Internet connec-

Cancelling Internet access permission for a mobile phone Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Wi-Fi &

Bluetooth . Internet settings

# Select r in the line of the mobile phone.

# Select Delete configuration.

# Select Yes. Displaying mobile phone details Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Wi-Fi &

Bluetooth . Internet settings

# Select r in the line of the mobile phone.

# Select Details. Establishing an Internet connection Multimedia system:

, . Mercedes me & Apps

# For example, select Free Browser. Connection status Connection status overview

% The multimedia system usually establishes the Internet connection automatically. If the multimedia system is not connected to the Internet, the Internet connection is estab lished when an Internet application is used. Setting automatic disconnection of the Inter net connection Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Wi-Fi &

Bluetooth . Internet settings

# Select r in the line of the mobile phone.

# Select Disconnect when inactive. The following options are available:

R 5 minutes R 10 minutes R 20 minutes R Unlimited

# Select an option. 1 Display of existing connection and reception field strength of the communication module or of the connected Bluetooth device MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 355 Displaying the connection status Multimedia system:

, . Settings . System . Wi-Fi &

Bluetooth

# Select Internet status.

% When connected via Wi-Fi or a Bluetooth device, the approximate data volume trans mitted is displayed. The exact values can be requested from your mobile phone network provider. Web browser Calling up a web page

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. 356 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience)

# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.

# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Multimedia system:

, . Mercedes me &

Apps . z Browser Calling up a new web page

# Select .

# Enter a web address.

# Select .

% The function is country-dependent.

% Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion. Calling up a website from the browser his tory

# To call up the previous or next page from the history: select X or Y. Web browser overview MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 357 1 URL entry 2 Bookmarks 3 Web page, back 4 Web page, forwards 5 To refresh/stop 6 Options 358 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Calling up web browser options Multimedia system:

, . Mercedes me &

Apps . z Browser . Z The following functions are available:

R Bookmarks R Options with the settings:

Browser settings

- Delete browser data

# Select an option.

# Change the settings.

# Switch a function on O or off . Deleting Internet history Multimedia system:

, . Mercedes me &

Apps . z Browser . Z . Delete browser data The following options are available:

R All R Cache R Cookies R Entered URLs Calling up the web browser settings Multimedia system:

, . Mercedes me &

Apps . z Browser . Z . Browser settings The following functions are available:

R Block popups R Enable Javascript R Enable cookies

# Select an option.

# Select Yes. Managing bookmarks Multimedia system:

, . Mercedes me &

Apps . z Browser

Select

. Selecting a bookmark

# Select an entry. Creating a bookmark

# Select Aktuelle Seite zu Lesezeichen hinzuf-

gen (Add current page to the bookmarks).

# Enter a name.

# Select Besttigen (Confirm). Editing a bookmark

after a bookmark. Select

# Select Edit.

# Enter a name.

# Select Besttigen (Confirm). Deleting a bookmark Select after a bookmark.

# Select Delete.

# Select Yes. Closing the browser Multimedia system:

, . Mercedes me &

Apps . z Browser

# Select . Internet radio Calling up Internet radio Requirements:

R There is an account on http://

www.mercedes.me. R The Internet radio service is activated. R The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. R A fast Internet connection for data transmis sion free of interference.

% The functions and services are country-

dependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 359 Multimedia system:

, . Radio

# Select TuneIn Radio. The Internet radio menu appears. The last station set starts playing.

% The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception. 360 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Internet radio overview 1 Additional information on the current station 2 Display (if connected to private user account) 3 Data transfer rate 4 Options 5 Favourites 6 To start/end 7 To browse 8 Search 9 Selected category A Internet radio provider Selecting and connecting to Internet radio stations Multimedia system:

, . Radio . TuneIn radio

Select

# Select a category.

# Select a station. The connection is established automatically. or

# Select the search field.

# Enter a station name using the entry field.

% A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using Internet radio. Saving/deleting Internet radio stations as favourites Multimedia system:

, . Radio . TuneIn radio

# Select a station.

# Select . The list of saved favourite stations appears. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 361

# Select Add to favourites. or

# Create an account for the online provider

(TuneIn radio) and then log in on the multi media system. Your favourites are imported to the multime dia system. Showing the station list for the last category selected Multimedia system:

, . Radio . TuneIn radio

# Press the cover of the current station. Depending on how the station was selected, a station list is shown. Deleting favourites

# Select a station.

# Select .

# Select Delete favourite. Setting Internet radio options Multimedia system:

, . Radio . TuneIn radio . Z The following options are available:

R Select stream: select the stream quality. R Login to TuneIn account: log in to your TuneIn user account. R Log out of account: log out of your TuneIn user account.

# Select an option. Media Information about media mode Information about supported formats and data storage media

& WARNING Risk of distraction when han dling data storage media If you handle a data storage medium while driving, your attention is diverted from the traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

# Only handle a data storage medium when the vehicle is stationary. 362 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) The multimedia system supports the follow ing formats and data media:

FAT32, exFaT, NTFS Permissible file systems Permissible data carriers Supported formats:

USB devices, iPod/iPhone, MTP devices, Bluetooth audio equipment Audio: MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, FLAC, ALAC Video: MPEG, AVI, DivX, MKV, MP4, M4V, WMV R The multimedia system supports a total of up to 50,000 files. R Data storage media up to 2 TB are supported

(32bit address space).

% Observe the following notes:

R Due to the large variety of available music and video files regarding encod ers, sampling rates and data transfer rates, playback cannot always be guaran teed. R Due to the wide range of USB devices available on the market, playback cannot be guaranteed for all USB devices. R Videos up to FullHD (1920x1080) are supported. R Copy-protected music and video files or DRM (Digital Rights Management) encrypted files cannot be played back. R MP3 players must support Media Trans fer Protocol (MTP). Information on copyright protection and trademarks Audio files that you create or reproduce yourself for playback are generally subject to copyright protection. In many countries, reproductions, even for private use, are not permitted without the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make sure that you know about the applicable copy right regulations and that you comply with these. Manufactured under licence from Dolby Labora tories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and the double-D sym bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 363 the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype,

"Powered by Gracenote", MusicID and Playlist Plus are either registered trademarks or trade marks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. For DTS Patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under licence from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and 364 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Overview of the media menu 1 Previous track or fast rewind 2 Next track or fast forward 3 Album cover 4 Active media source 5 Current track/track in the playback list 6 Active data storage medium 7 Track title 8 Artist 9 Repeat A Options (video mode only) B Additional options C Controls playback D Timeline E Categories F Music search G Random playback Connecting the data storage medium to the multimedia system Connecting USB devices

* NOTE Damage caused by high tempera tures High temperatures can damage USB devices.

# Remove the USB device after use and take it out of the vehicle. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 365 Searching for and authorising Bluetooth audio equipment Requirements:

R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia system and audio equipment. R The audio equipment supports the Blue tooth audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP. R The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices. Multimedia system:

, . Media . Bluetooth . Authorising new Bluetooth audio equipment

# Select Connect new device. Detected equipment is displayed in the device list.

# Select an audio device. Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

# If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment. The multimedia connection unit is found in the stowage compartment under the armrest and has two USB ports. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, additional USB ports can be found in the stowage compartment of the centre console or rear folding compartment.

# Connect the USB device to the USB port. 366 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience)

# Select Only as Bluetooth audio device. The Bluetooth audio equipment is connec ted with the multimedia system. Connecting Bluetooth audio equipment that has already been authorised

# Select a Bluetooth audio device from the list. Establishing a connection. Starting media playback A data storage medium is connected to the mul timedia system. Multimedia system:

, . Media

# Select USB or Bluetooth as the media source. Controlling media playback Multimedia system:

, . Media

# To pause playback: select .

# To continue playback: select X.

# To show the current track list: select the track image shown. To repeat a track: select For the repeat function there are the follow ing settings:

R Select once: the active playlist is repea

. Additional options Multimedia system:

, . Media ted. ted. R Select twice: the current track is repea R Select three times: the repeat function is deactivated.

# To play back tracks in random order:

Calling up additional options

# Select f. The additional options are shown. The following options are available:

R Play similar tracks select

# To wind a track forwards or backwards:

tap on the desired point on the timeline.

# To select the next track: select |.

# To select the previous track: select |.

# To scroll through tracks quickly: press and hold | or |. Select during playback of a track in order to create a playlist with similar tracks R Surprise mix A playlist with randomly selected tracks is created. R Add to favourite songs The current track is added to the favourite songs. R Delete from favourite songs The current track is removed from the favour ite songs.

# Select an option. Media search Information about the search function in cat egories Under My Music you can search through all available media files. There are several cate gories available for selection. The categories shown depend on the connected device and data format. Available categories with Bluetooth audio:

R Current tracklist The folders and categories of the connected device are shown. Available categories with audio files:

R Current tracklist R Playlists R Folder R Albums R Artists R Tracks R Favourite songs R Frequently played R Most recently added R Mood ( page 368). R Music genres R Year R Composers R Select by cover R Podcasts (Apple devices) R Audiobooks (Apple devices) Available categories with video files:

R Folder R Videos

% The categories are available as soon as the entire media content has been read in and analysed. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 367 Starting a search in categories Multimedia system:

, . Media . My Music

# Select a category. The media files are shown corresponding to the selected category, e.g. all albums will be shown for the Albums category. Sorting results shown or playing back all media found

# Select .

# To play back all results found in the cate gory: select Play all. If, for example, the album category is active, all albums found by the desired artist will be played back.

# To sort results alphabetically: select Sort from A-Z.

# To sort results in reverse alphabetical order: select Sort from Z-A.

% The available options depend on the selec ted category and the connected device. 368 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Using the keyword search Multimedia system:

, . Media . My Music My Music you can In the categories under use the keyword search with free text input to look for content.

# Select a category.

# Select Search. A keyboard for character entry appears.

# Enter the term searched for.

% The search begins with the first character entered. The more characters entered the more concrete the search results become.

# Select the desired entry from the result list. If the selected result is an album, song or a playback list then playback is started. If the selected result is a new category then this is opened in the search. Searching for a track according to mood Multimedia system:

, . Media . My Music Using the My Music search, you can find music tracks suitable for a mood.

# Select Mood. Making video settings Multimedia system:

, . Media . Z

# Select Video settings.

# Select an aspect ratio. Setting full screen

# Select G. A grid with the following moods appears:

R Positive R Calm R Dark R Energetic

# Pull the controller to the desired position. The system searches for tracks that are suit able for the mood entered. Radio Switching on the radio Multimedia system:

, . Radio

# Alternatively: press the $ button. The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last frequency band selected. Radio overview MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 369 1 Active frequency band 2 Station name or set frequency 3 Artist, title, album and radio text 4 Options 5 Full screen/DAB slideshow 6 Mute function 7 Station list 8 Search 370 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Setting the frequency band Multimedia system:

, . Radio

# Select a frequency band. Sorting station lists according to categories

(only for FM/DAB)

# Select Category.

# Select a category. Memory slots are available in station presets

# Select W. Replacing an entry in the station presets

# Press and hold on an entry in the station pre Selecting a radio station Multimedia system:

, . Radio

# Swipe to the left or right on the control ele ment. Calling up the radio station list Multimedia system:

, . Radio

Select

. The station list appears.

# Select a station. Searching for radio stations using station names or direct frequency entry Multimedia system:

, . Radio

. Select

# Select .

# Enter a station name or frequency.

# Select a station. Storing radio stations Multimedia system:

, . Radio

# Select a radio station. sets.

# Select Yes. Editing station presets Multimedia system:

, Radio Moving stations:

# Press and hold a stored station.

# Select Move.

# Move the station to the new position. Deleting stations:

# Press and hold a station.

# Select Delete. Replacing a station:

# Press and hold a station.

# Select Replace radio station. Calling up a slide show (FM/DAB radio mode) Multimedia system:

, . Radio The slide show displays additional information provided by the station as an image. This can include logos, album covers, music tracks, pro grammes, news or service information, for exam ple.

# Select #. Activating or deactivating the frequency fix function ments. Multimedia system:

, . Radio . Z

# Select Frequency fix to switch on or off. If the function is activated, the set frequency is kept even if the reception is poor. Activating/deactivating traffic announce ments Multimedia system:

, . Radio . Z

# Switch Traffic announcements on or off. Setting the traffic information service vol ume increase Multimedia system:

, . Radio . Z . Sound

# Select Other sound settings.

# Select Navigation and traffic announce-

# Select TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENTS VOL-

UME INCREASE.

# Set a value.

# To adopt the value: select q. MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 371 Editing the voice tag function Multimedia system:

, . Radio . Z

# Select Voice tag.

# Select Hinzufgen (Add), Lschen (Delete) or Anhren (Listen to). Displaying radio text Multimedia system:

, . Radio . Z

# Switch Display radio text information on or off. Sound Tone settings Information about the sound system The sound system has a total output of 100 watts and is equipped with 6 speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. 372 MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) Calling up the sound menu Multimedia system:

, . Media . Sound The following functions are available:

R Equaliser R Balance and Fader R Auto. volume adjustment R Other sound settings

# Select a sound menu. Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set tings Multimedia system:

, . Media . Sound

# Set TREBLE, MID or BASS. Activating/deactivating automatic volume adjustment Multimedia system:

, . Media . Sound . . A uto. volume adjustment Automatic volume adjustment compensates for differing volumes when changing between audio sources.

# Switch Auto. volume adjustment on or off. Adjusting the balance/fader Multimedia system:

, . Media . Sound

# Adjust the balance and fader. Burmester surround sound system Information about the Burmester surround sound system The Burmester surround sound system has a total output of 590 watts and is equipped with 12 speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. Calling up the sound menu in the Burmester surround sound system Multimedia system:

, . Media . Burmester The following functions are available:

R Soundsets R Equaliser R Sound focus R Automatic volume adjustment

# Select a function. Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settings on the Burmester surround sound system Multimedia system:

, . Media . Burmester

# Set TREBLE, MID or BASS. Activating/deactivating volume adjustment in the Burmester surround sound system Multimedia system:

, . Media . Burmester . Auto. volume adjustment Automatic volume adjustment compensates for differing volumes when changing between audio sources.

# Activate or deactivate the function. Adjusting the balance/fader in the Burmester surround sound system Multimedia system:

, . Media . Burmester

# Adjust the balance and fader. Switching surround sound on/off in the Burmester surround sound system Multimedia system:

, . Media . Burmester . O S urround sound

# Select Pure or Surround. Adjusting the sound focus in the Burmester surround sound system Multimedia system:

, . Media . Burmester . SF

# Select a position for the sound focus or All seats. Advanced sound system Information about the Advanced sound sys tem The Advanced sound system has a total output of 225watts and is equipped with 10 speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. Calling up the sound menu in the Advanced sound system Multimedia system:

, . Media . Sound The following functions are available:

R Equaliser R Balance and Fader R Auto. volume adjustment MBUX (Mercedes-Benz User Experience) 373 R Other sound settings

# Select a function. Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set tings in the Advanced sound system Multimedia system:

, . Media . Sound . Equaliser

# Set TREBLE, MID or BASS. Switching volume adjustment in the Advanced sound system on/off Multimedia system:

, . Media . Sound . . A uto. volume adjustment Automatic volume adjustment compensates for differing volumes when changing between audio sources.

# Switch Auto. volume adjustment on or off. Setting the balance/fader in the Advanced sound system Multimedia system:

, . Media . Sound

# Adjust the balance and fader. 374 Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display The ASSYST PLUS service interval display in the instrument display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service message using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. You can obtain further information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Displaying the service due date On-board computer:

, Service . ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed.

# To exit the display: press the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Be sure to observe the following related topic:

R Operating the on-board computer

( page 229). Carrying out maintenance work at regular intervals

* NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates Service work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle.

# Always observe the prescribed service intervals.

# Always have the prescribed service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on nor mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work will need to be performed more often if the vehi cle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads. Examples of arduous operating conditions:

R regular city driving with frequent intermedi ate stops R mainly short-distance driving R frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces R when the engine is often left idling for long periods R operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. The tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur ther information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. The active bonnet is not available in all coun tries. Resetting the active bonnet

& WARNING Danger of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart ment Certain component parts in the engine com partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.

# Let the engine cool down and only touch the component parts described below:

Battery disconnection periods The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can only calculate the service due date when the battery is connected.

# Note down the service due date displayed on the instrument display before disconnecting the battery ( page 374). Engine compartment Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Operation of the active bonnet (pedestrian protection) In certain accident situations, the risk of injury to pedestrians can be reduced by the actuation of the active bonnet. The rear area of the engine bonnet is raised by approximately 70 mm. For the drive to the workshop, reset the trig gered active bonnet yourself. After the active bonnet has been triggered, pedestrian protection may be limited. A qualified specialist workshop must re-instate the full functionality of the active bonnet. Maintenance and care 375

# With your hand flat, push down active bonnet 1 in the area around the hinges on both sides (arrows). In doing so, the actuator is depressurised and you may hear a hissing sound. The engine bonnet must engage in position.

# If the active bonnet can be raised slightly at the rear in the area of the hinges, repeat the step until it engages correctly. 376 Maintenance and care Opening/closing the bonnet

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driv ing with the engine bonnet unlocked An unlocked engine bonnet may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view.

# Never unlock the engine bonnet when driving.

# Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the engine bonnet When opening or closing the engine bonnet, it may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the engine bonnet's range of movement.

# Only open or close the engine bonnet when there are no persons in the engine bonnet's range of movement.

& WARNING Danger of burns when open ing the bonnet If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine com partment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts Certain components in the engine compart ment may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the cooler fan. Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment:

# Switch the ignition off.

# Never touch the danger zone surround ing moving component parts, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.

# Remove jewellery and watches.

# Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

& WARNING Risk of injury from touching component parts under voltage The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch component parts which are under voltage, you could receive an electric shock.

# Never touch components of the ignition system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.

& WARNING Danger of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart ment Certain component parts in the engine com partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.

# Let the engine cool down and only touch the component parts described below:

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers while the engine bon net is open When the engine bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage.

# Always switch off the windscreen wip ers and ignition before opening the engine bonnet. Maintenance and care 377

# To open: pull lever 1 to release the engine

# Push the yellow handle 1 of the bonnet bonnet. catch to the left as far as it will go and lift the bonnet until it is automatically raised by the pneumatic strut.

# To close: lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm.

# If the bonnet can still be lifted slightly, open the bonnet again and close it with a little force until it engages correctly. 378 Maintenance and care Engine oil Checking the engine oil level with an on-

board computer The engine oil level is determined during driving. The oil level display is only available after a driv ing time of up to 30 minutes and if the ignition is switched on, depending on the driving profile. It is not possible to correctly measure the oil level if:

R the vehicle is not level during the measuring process. R the bonnet was previously opened. The engine must be restarted and the engine oil level will be determined again when driving. On-board computer:

, Service . Engine oil level:

You will see one of the following messages in the multifunction display:

# Engine oil level Measuring now: measure ment of the oil level is not yet possible. Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving.

# Engine oil level OK and the bar display for indicating the oil level in the multifunction display is green and is between "min" and

"max": the oil level is correct.

# Engine oil level Add 1,0 l and the bar display for indicating the oil level in the multifunction display is orange and is below "min": top up with 1 l of engine oil.

# Reduce engine oil level and the bar display for indicating the oil level in the multifunction display is orange and is above "max": drain off the excess engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# For engine oil level turn on ignition: switch on the ignition to check the engine oil level.

# Engine oil level System inoperative: sensor faulty or not inserted. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Engine oil level System currently unavail.:

close the bonnet. Topping up engine oil

& WARNING Danger of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart ment Certain component parts in the engine com partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.

# Let the engine cool down and only touch the component parts described below:

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart ment, it may ignite.

# Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the filler opening.

# Allow the engine to cool off and thor oughly clean the engine oil from compo nent parts before starting the vehicle.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi tives

# Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.

# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.

# Do not use additives.

# Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change.

* NOTE Damage caused by topping up too much engine oil Topping up too much engine oil can cause damage to the engine or the catalytic con verter.

# Have excess engine oil removed at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Turn cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.

# Top up the engine oil.

# Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise as far as it will go.

# Check the oil level again Checking the engine oil level with an on-board com puter( page 378). Maintenance and care 379 Checking the coolant level

& WARNING Danger of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart ment Certain component parts in the engine com partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.

# Let the engine cool down and only touch the component parts described below:

& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant The engine cooling system is pressurised, particularly when the engine is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out.

# Let the engine cool down before open

# When opening the cap, wear gloves and ing the cap. safety glasses. 380 Maintenance and care

# Open the cap slowly to release pres sure.

# Park the vehicle on a level surface.

# Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 70 C.

# Slowly turn cap 1 anti-clockwise to relieve

# Continue turning cap 1 anti-clockwise and overpressure. remove it. The coolant level is correct:

R if the engine is cold, up to marker bar 2. R if the engine is warm, up to 1.5 cm over marker bar 2.

# If necessary, top up with coolant that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. R Further information on coolant ( page 438) Topping up the windscreen washer system

& WARNING Danger of burns from hot component parts in the engine compart ment Certain component parts in the engine com partment may be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.

# Let the engine cool down and only touch the component parts described below:

& WARNING Danger of burns when open ing the bonnet If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine com partment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

# Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening. Cleaning and care Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to R in car washes with a towing mechanism: neu reduced braking power after washing the vehicle tral i is engaged. Maintenance and care 381 R the blower for the ventilation/heating is R the windscreen wiper switch is in position switched off. g. R The key is at a distance of at least 3 m away from the vehicle, otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally.

% If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise. Information on using a high-pressure cleaner

& WARNING Risk of an accident when using high-pressure cleaners with circu lar jet nozzles The water jet of a circular jet nozzle (dirt grinder) can cause externally invisible dam age to the tyres or chassis parts. Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle.

# After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored. To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand:

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the HOLD function are deactivated. R the 360 camera or the reversing camera is switched off. R the side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed.

# Remove cap 1 by the tab.

# Top up the washer fluid. 382 Maintenance and care Components damaged in this way may unex pectedly fail.

# Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle.

# Have damaged tyres or chassis parts replaced immediately. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol lowing when using a high-pressure cleaner:

R Keep the key at least 3 m away from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally. R Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the vehicle. R Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around whilst cleaning. R Observe the information on the correct dis tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper ating instructions. R Do not point the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner directly at sensitive parts such as tyres, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sources and ventilation slots. Washing the vehicle by hand Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays.

# Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.

# Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.

# Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois. Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. Maintenance and care 383 Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care Observe the following information:

Cleaning and care Avoiding paintwork damage Paintwork R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the R Do not attach stickers, films or similar. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible. treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. R Coolant, brake fluid, tree resins, oils, fuel and greases:

remove by gently rubbing with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover. Matt finish R Only use care products approved by Mercedes-Benz. R Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels. R Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engi R Do not use car wash programmes with a final hot wax neering standards. treatment. R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax. R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 384 Maintenance and care Notes on care of car parts

& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windscreen wipers are switched on while the windscreen is being cleaned If the windscreen wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. Observe the following information:

# Always switch off the windscreen wip ers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades.

& WARNING Risk of burns from tailpipes and tailpipe trim The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.

# Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trim.

# Allow the vehicle parts to cool down before you touch them. Notes on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage Wheels/rims Use water and acid-free wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and brake pads warm up and dry out. Windows Clean the windows on the inside and outside using a damp cloth and cleaning agents recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows. Maintenance and care 385 Notes on cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage Wiper blades Fold out the wiper blades and clean them using a damp cloth. Do not clean the wiper blades too often. Exterior lighting Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic covers. Sensors Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumper and in the radiator trim with a soft cloth and car shampoo. When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum dis tance of 30 cm. Reversing camera and 360 Camera

( page 205). R Open the camera cover with the multimedia system Do not use a high-pressure cleaner. R Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens. Clean with cleaning agents recommended by Mercedes-Benz, particularly in the winter and after washing the vehicle. Do not use acidic cleaning agents. Exhaust pipes Trailer tow hitch Do not clean the ball coupling with a high-pressure cleaner or solvent. R Remove traces of rust on the ball, e.g. with a wire brush. R Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth. R After cleaning, oil or grease the ball coupling lightly. R Observe the notes on care in the trailer tow hitch manu facturer's operating instructions. 386 Maintenance and care Notes on care of the interior

& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol vent-based care products Care and cleaning products containing sol vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. Observe the following information:

When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away.

# Do not use any care or cleaning prod ucts containing solvents to clean the cockpit.

& WARNING Risk of injury or death from bleached seat belts Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident.

# Never bleach or dye seat belts. Cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage Seat belts Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry seat belts by heating them to over 80 C or exposing them to direct sunlight. Display Plastic trim Clean the surface carefully with a microfibre cloth and TFT/LCD display care product. R Switch off the display and let it cool down. R Do not use any other cleaning products. R Clean with a damp microfibre cloth. R For heavy soiling: use care product recommended by R Do not attach stickers, films or similar. R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to Mercedes-Benz. come in contact with the plastic trim. Cleaning and care Avoiding vehicle damage Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes. Maintenance and care 387 Real wood/trim ele ments R Clean with a microfibre cloth. R Piano-lacquer black look: clean with a damp cloth and R For heavy soiling: use care product recommended by soap solution. Mercedes-Benz. Roof lining Clean with a brush or dry shampoo. Carpet Use carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Genuine leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth. R Leather care: use leather care agents that have been rec Do not allow the leather to become too damp. Do not use a microfibre cloth. ommended by Mercedes-Benz. Clean with a damp cloth. Do not use a microfibre cloth. DINAMICA seat cov ers Artificial leather seat covers Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. Do not use a microfibre cloth. Cloth seat covers Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water and allow to dry. 388 Breakdown assistance Emergency Removing the reflective safety jacket The reflective safety jackets are located in the safety jacket compartments in the driver's and front-passenger door stowage compartments.

# Open safety jacket bag 1 and pull out the safety jacket.

% There are also safety jacket compartments in the rear door stowage compartments in which safety jackets can be stowed. The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety jacket is the correct size and is fully closed. Replace the safety jacket if:

R it is damaged or dirt on the reflective strips can no longer be removed R the maximum number of washes is exceeded R the fluorescence of the safety jacket has faded Warning triangle Removing the warning triangle 1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature 3 Do not bleach 4 Do not iron 5 Do not use a laundry dryer 6 Do not dry-clean 7 This is a class 2 jacket

# To remove: pull out safety jacket bag 1 by loop 2.

# Remove 1warning triangle. First-aid kit (soft sided) Removing the fire extinguisher Setting up the warning triangle Breakdown assistance 389

# Fold side reflectors 1 upwards to form a tri angle and attach at the top using press-stud 2.

# Fold legs 3 down and out to the side. The first-aid kit 1 is in the luggage compart ment in the left-hand stowage net.

% Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the first-aid kit is in the recess in the side trim.

# Left-hand-drive vehicle: Pull tab 1 upwards.

# Remove fire extinguisher 2. 390 Breakdown assistance Flat tyre Notes on flat tyres

& WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tyre A flat tyre severely affects the driving charac teristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tyres without run-flat characteristics:

# Do not drive on with a flat tyre.

# Change the flat tyre immediately with the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tyres with run-flat characteristics:

# Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres). In the event of a flat tyre, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equip ment:

R Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is pos sible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)

( page 390). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the tyre so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit ( page 391). R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown ( page 346). R All vehicles: change the wheel ( page 422).

% The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries. Notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)

& WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode When driving in emergency mode the han dling characteristics are impaired. e.g. when cornering, when accelerating strongly and when braking.

# Do not exceed the specified maximum speed.

# Avoid any abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres as well as driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle.

# Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice:

R banging noise R vehicle vibration R smoke which smells like rubber R continuous ESP intervention R cracks in tyre side walls

# After driving in emergency mode have the rims checked by a qualified special ist workshop with regard to their further use.

# The defective tyre must be replaced in every case. With MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. How ever, the tyre affected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tyre. Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning sys tem: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure loss warning system. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring sys tem: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure mon itoring system. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display:

R Check the tyre for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes. Driving distance possible in limp-home mode after the pressure loss warning:

Load condition Driving distance pos sible in limp-home mode Partially laden Fully laden 80 km 30 km R The driving distance possible in limp-home mode may vary depending on the driving style. R Maximum permissible speed 80 km/h. If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, you can use a stand ard tyre as a temporary measure. Breakdown assistance 391 Using the TIREFIT kit Requirements Have the following tools readily available:

R tyre sealant bottle R TIREFIT sticker R tyre inflation compressor You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perfora tion damage of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -20 C.

& WARNING Risk of accident when using tyre sealant In the following situations, the tyre sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis tance, as it is unable to seal the tyre prop erly:

R there are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than those previously mentioned. R the wheel rim is damaged. 392 Breakdown assistance R you have driven at very low tyre pres sures or on a flat tyre. induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.

# Do not drive on.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tyre sealant Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and cau ses irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep the tyre sealant away from children. Observe the following if you come into con tact with the tyre sealant:

# Rinse off the tyre sealant from your skin using water immediately.

# If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thor oughly rinse them using clean water immediately.

# If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thoroughly rinse out your mouth imme diately and drink plenty of water. Do not

# Change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant immedi ately.

# If an allergic reaction occurs, seek med ical attention immediately.

* NOTE Overheating due to the tyre infla tion compressor running too long

# Do not run the tyre inflation compres sor for longer than ten minutes without interruption. Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor. Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a quali fied specialist workshop every five years.

# Do not remove any foreign objects which have entered the tyre.

# Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.

# Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.

# Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the

# Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7.

# Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your faulty tyre. vehicle.

# Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out of the tyre inflation compressor housing.

# Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 6 of tyre sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages.

# Place tyre sealant bottle 1 head downwards into recess 2 of the tyre inflation compres sor.

# Switch the ignition on.

# Press on and off switch 3 on the tyre infla tion compressor. The tyre inflation compressor is switched on. The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pum ped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Breakdown assistance 393 Do not switch off the tyre inflation compres sor during this phase.

# Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tyre should then have attained a tyre pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/

29 psi). If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected areas as quickly as possible. It is pref erable to use clean water. If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy lene. If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been ach ieved:

# switch off the tyre inflation compressor.

# unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose.

# very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx

# unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre. 394 Breakdown assistance imately 10 m.

# Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/

29 psi).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being ach ieved If the specified tyre pressure is not achieved after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair braking and handling characteristics.

# Do not drive on.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tyres A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds.

# Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.

# Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tyre that has been sealed using tyre sealant.

# Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant 80 km/h.

# Fasten the upper section of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster where it will be easily seen by the driver.

# Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre sponsible disposal Tyre sealant contains pollutants.

# Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

# Store the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre infla tion compressor and the warning triangle.

# Pull away immediately.

# Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure using the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been achieved:

# switch off the tyre inflation compressor.

* NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant After use, excess tyre sealant may leak out from the filling hose.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being ach ieved If the specified tyre pressure is not achieved after a brief drive, the tyre is too badly dam aged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre pressure that is too low can significantly impair braking and handling characteristics.

# Do not drive on.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Countries that have Mercedes-Benz Service24h: a sticker with the telephone num ber can also be found in your vehicle, e.g. on the Bpillar on the driver's side.

# Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pres sure table on the fuel filler flap for values.

# To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor.

# To reduce the tyre pressure: press pres sure release button 1 next to manometer 2.

# When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tyre.

# Screw the valve cap onto the tyre valve of the sealed tyre.

# Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filling hose stays on the tyre sealant bot tle. Breakdown assistance 395

# Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work shop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there. Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat tery Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can lead to function restrictions in safety-rel evant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS

(anti-lock braking system) or ESP (Elec tronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations:

R when braking R in the event of abrupt steering manoeu vres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions 396 Breakdown assistance

# In the event of a short circuit or a simi lar incident, contact a qualified special ist workshop immediately.

# Do not continue driving.

# Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. R Further information on ABS ( page 169) R Further information on ESP( page 170) For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tes ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-

Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be dam aged in the event of an accident.

& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec trostatic charge Electrostatic charge can cause sparks which may ignite the highly flammable gas mixture in the battery.

# To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the bat tery. The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance.

& WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid

Battery acid is caustic.

# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.

# Do not lean over the battery.

# Do not inhale battery gases.

# Keep children away from the battery.

# Immediately rinse battery acid off thor oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat teries Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. If you have to connect the 12 volt battery, con tact a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion. Observe this Owner's Manual. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corro sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear safety glasses. Keep children away. Breakdown assistance 397

# Only use battery chargers with a maxi mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

& WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro gen gas igniting A battery generates hydrogen gas during the charging process. If there is a short circuit or sparks start to form, there is a danger of the hydrogen gas igniting.

# Make sure that the positive terminal of the connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.

# Never place metal objects or tools on a

# When connecting and disconnecting the battery, you must observe the descri bed order for the battery clamps.

# When giving starting assistance, always make sure that you only connect bat tery terminals with identical polarity.

# During starting assistance, you must observe the described order for con If you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time:

R Activate standby mode, or R Connect the battery to a battery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz, or R Consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery battery.

# When charging the battery and during start ing assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment.

* NOTE Damaging the battery through overvoltage When using a battery charger without a maxi mum charging voltage, the battery or the vehicle electronics may be damaged. 398 Breakdown assistance necting and disconnecting the jump lead.

# Do not connect or disconnect the bat tery clamps while the engine is running.

& WARNING Risk of explosion during charging process and starting assistance During the charging process and starting assistance, the battery may release an explo sive gas mixture.

# Avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking.

# Make sure that there is sufficient venti lation during the charging process and during starting assistance.

# Do not lean over a battery. If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has fro zen.

& WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro zen battery A discharged battery may freeze at tempera tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charg ing, battery gas may be released.

# Always thaw a frozen battery out first before charging it or performing start ing assistance. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. It is recommended that you have a thawed bat tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel.

# Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine. Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery:

R Only use undamaged jump lead/charging cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump lead/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start connec tion point. R The jump lead/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running. R Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. R Keep away from fire and naked flames. R Do not lean over the battery. R When charging: only use battery chargers tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz and read the battery charger's operating instruc tions before charging the battery. Observe the additional following points during starting assistance:

R Starting assistance may only be provided using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Petrol engine: only accept starting assis tance if the engine and exhaust system are cold.

# Secure the vehicle by applying the electric

# Automatic transmission: shift the transmis parking brake. sion to position j.

# Make sure that the ignition and all electrical consumers are switched off.

# Open the bonnet.

# Slide cover 1 of positive clamp 2 on the jump-starting connection point in the direc tion of the arrow.

# Connect positive clamp 2 on your vehicle to positive pole of the donor battery using the jump lead/charging cable. Always begin with positive clamp 2 on your own vehicle first. Breakdown assistance 399

# During the starting assistance proce dure: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed.

# Connect the negative pole of the donor bat tery and earth point 3 of your own vehicle by using the jump lead/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery first.

# During starting assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle.

# During the charging process: start the charging process.

# During starting assistance: let the engines run for several minutes.

# During starting assistance: before discon necting the jump lead, switch on an electrical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting. When the starting assistance/charging process is complete:

# First, remove the jump lead/charging cable from earth point 3 and negative pole of the donor battery, then from positive clamp 2 and positive pole of the donor battery. Begin 400 Breakdown assistance each time with the contacts on your own vehicle first.

# After removing the jump lead/charging cable, close cover 1 of positive clamp 2. Further information can be obtained at a quali fied specialist workshop. Replacing the 12 V battery

# Observe the notes on the 12 V battery

( page 395). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself:

R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery which meets the specific vehicle require ments. R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow fittings or terminal covers from the battery being replaced. For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar sys tems.

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow ing away incorrectly

# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away. R Make sure that the vent hose is always con nected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Fit any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. R Make sure that detachable parts are recon nected in the same way. Tow-starting or towing away Permitted towing methods Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. Breakdown assistance 401 Permitted towing methods Vehicle equipment/towing method Vehicles with automatic transmis sion Both axles on the ground Front axle raised Rear axle raised Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Towing with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company. or applied. R the electric parking brake cannot be released Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground

# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods ( page 400) ( page 401).

# Make sure that the battery is connected and charged. When the battery is discharged:

R the engine cannot be started. R vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmission cannot be shifted to position i or j.

% vehicles with automatic transmission: if the automatic transmission cannot be shif ted to position i, or the multifunction dis play in the instrument cluster does not show anything, have the vehicle transported away( page 403). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transporta tion.

* NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis tances The drivetrain could be damaged when tow ing at excessively high speeds or over long distances.

# A towing speed of 50 km/h must not

# A towing distance of 50 km must not be be exceeded. exceeded. 402 Breakdown assistance

& WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy

# Fit the towing eye ( page 404).

# Attach the tow bar.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec tion

# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.

# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism

( page 72).

# Do not activate the HOLD function.

# Deactivate the tow-away protection

( page 84).

# Deactivate Active Brake Assist ( page 178).

# Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift the automatic transmission to position i.

# Release the electric parking brake.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi ted safety-related functions during the towing process Safety-related functions are limited or no lon ger available in the following situations:

R the ignition is switched off. R the brake system or power steering sys tem is malfunctioning. R the energy supply or the on-board electri cal system is malfunctioning. When your vehicle is then towed away, signif icantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required.

# Use a tow bar.

# Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely, before towing the vehicle away. If the vehicle being tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass, the following situations can occur:

R the towing eye may become detached. R the car/trailer combination may swerve or even overturn.

# If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permissible gross mass of your own vehicle. If a vehicle must be tow started or towed away, its permissible gross mass must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.

# Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden tification plate .

# Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not open the driver's door or front passenger door, otherwise the automatic transmission automatically shifts to position j.

* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged.

# Pull away slowly and smoothly. Loading the vehicle for transport

# Observe the notes on towing away

# Connect the tow bar to the towing eye to

( page 401). load the vehicle. hitch.

% You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer

# Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift the automatic transmission to position i.

% Vehicles with automatic transmission:

the automatic transmission may be locked in position j in the event of damage to the electrical system. To shift to i, provide the on-board electrical system with power

( page 397).

# Load the vehicle onto the transporter.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift the automatic transmission to position j.

# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle and prevent it from rolling away.

# Only secure the vehicle by the wheels. 4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission Breakdown assistance 403

* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to incorrect positioning

# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi cle. Towing eye storage location

# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle. 404 Breakdown assistance Towing eye 1 is under the load compartment floor. Installing the towing eye

# Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and remove.

# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten. Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a rear bracket for the towing eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch.

% Make sure that cover 1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye.

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect use of the towing eye When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc ess.

# Only use the towing eye to tow away or tow start the vehicle. Tow-starting the vehicle (emergency engine starting) Vehicles with automatic transmission

* NOTE Damage to the automatic trans mission due to tow-starting The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow-starting vehicles with automatic transmission.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started.

# Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloa ded. This could result in a fire.

# Always replace faulty fuses with speci fied new fuses containing the correct amperage.

* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect fuses Incorrect fuses may cause damage to electri cal components or systems.

# Only use Mercedes-Benz approved fuses with the correct fuse rating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the col our and fuse rating. Only use fuses marked with an "S". The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the engine compartment ( page 405).

* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction.

# When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box.

# When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned cor rectly on the fuse box. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified special ist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:

R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R All electrical consumers are switched off. R The ignition is switched off. Breakdown assistance 405 The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes:

R Fuse box on the driver's side of the engine compartment ( page 405) R Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell R Fuse box in the central load compartment

( page 406)

( page 407) Fuse box in the engine compartment Observe the notes on electrical fuses

( page 404). Have the following tools readily available:

R A dry cloth R A screwdriver 406 Breakdown assistance Opening

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers while the engine bon net is open When the engine bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage.

# Always switch off the windscreen wip ers and ignition before opening the engine bonnet.

# Open the bonnet. Closing

# Check whether the seal is positioned cor rectly in the lid.

# Place the lid on the fuse box.

# Make sure that clamps 2 engage.

# Tighten screws 1.

# Close the bonnet. Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell Observe the notes on electrical fuses

( page 404). Opening

# Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.

# Loosen screws 1.

# Press clamps 2 and lift the fuse box lid up and out. The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on the side of the fuse box.

# Lift carpet 1 in the direction of the arrow. Fuse box in the load compartment Observe the notes on electrical fuses

( page 404).

# Open the luggage compartment floor . Breakdown assistance 407

# Loosen screws 2 and remove fuse box lid from the top. Closing

# Place the lid on the fuse box.

# Tighten screws 2.

# Fold back carpet 1. Fuse box 1 is located in the centre underneath the luggage compartment floor. 408 Wheels and tyres Notes on noise or unusual handling charac teristics While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre dam age could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Regular checking of wheels and tyres

& WARNING Risk of accident from dam aged tyres Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle.

# Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. Minimum tread depth for:

R Summer tyres: 3 mm R M+S tyres: 4 mm

& WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip. The tyre tread is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that in heavy rain or slush the risk of aquaplaning is increased, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the condi tions. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tyre tread.

# Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres.

# For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached. Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg ularly, at least once a month or as required, e.g. prior to a long journey or driving off-road:

R Check the tyre pressure ( page 409). R Visual inspection of wheels and tyres for damage. R Check the valve caps. The valves must be protected against mois ture and dirt by the valve caps approved especially for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre tread condition across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm. Notes on snow chains

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect snow chain fitting If you fit snow chains to the rear wheels, the snow chains may grind against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres.

# Never fit snow chains to the rear wheels.

# Always fit snow chains to the front wheels in pairs.

* NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from fit ted snow chains If snow chains are fitted to steel wheels, the wheel trims can be damaged.

# Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels before fitting snow chains. R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R If snow chains are fitted, the maximum per missible speed is 50 km/h. R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted.

% You can permanently limit the maximum vehicle speed for driving with winter tyres

( page 182).

% You can deactivate ESP to pull away

( page 172). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force. Wheels and tyres 409 Tyre pressure Notes on tyre pressure

& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf ficient or excessive tyre pressure Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks:

R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.

# Comply with the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all tyres including the spare wheel regu larly:

R at least once a month R when the load changes 410 Wheels and tyres R before embarking on a longer journey R if operating conditions change, e.g. off-

road driving

# Adjust the tyre pressure as necessary.

# Check whether the wheel or valve has a leak.

# If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too low can:

R Shorten the service life of the tyres. R Cause increased tyre damage. R Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning.

& WARNING Risk of accident from repea ted tyre pressure drop If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Insufficient tyre pressure can cause the tyres to burst.

# Inspect the tyre for signs of foreign objects. Information on the recommended tyre pressure for the vehicle's factory-fitted tyres can be found on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap ( page 410). Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring sys tem: you can also check the tyre pressure using the on-board computer. Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. Conditions for cold tyres:

R The vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km. A rise in the tyre temperature of 10 C increases the tyre pressure by approx. 10 kPa (0.1 bar/

1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the tyre pressure of warm tyres. Trailer operation notes Always inflate the rear axle tyres to the recom mended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure table for increased load. Tyre pressure table The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by the + symbol, the tyre pressure information following shows alternative tyre pressures. These tyre pressures may improve your vehicle's ride comfort. Fuel consumption may then increase slightly. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different num bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 409) Tyre pressure monitoring system Function of the tyre pressure monitoring sys tem The system checks the tyre pressure and the tyre temperature of the tyres fitted to the vehicle by means of a tyre pressure sensor. New tyre pressure sensors, e.g. in winter tyres, are automatically taught-in the first time they are driven. Wheels and tyres 411 The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature appear in the multifunction display

( page 231). If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tyre temperature is excessive, a warning will be given:

R Via display messages ( page 477). R Via the h warning lamp in the instrument cluster ( page 511). It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation. Set the tyre pressure for cold tyres using a tyre pressure gauge. Note that the correct tyre pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tyre pressure monitoring sys tem. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring sys tem will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val ues by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system manually ( page 412). The tyre pressure table shows the recommended tyre pressure for all tyres approved for this vehi cle. The recommended tyre pressures apply for cold tyres under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pres sure, the tyre pressure information following is only valid for those tyre sizes. 412 Wheels and tyres System limitations The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R If the tyre pressure is set incorrectly. R If there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for example, by a foreign object penetrating the tyre. R If there is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source. Make sure to observe the following further rela ted subject:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 409) Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring system Requirement:

R the ignition is switched on. On-board computer:

, Service . Tyres One of the following displays appears:

R Current tyre pressure and tyre temperature of the individual wheels:

R Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving R Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tyre pressures are already being moni tored.

# Compare the tyre pressure with the recom mended tyre pressure for the current operat ing condition ( page 410). Observe the notes on tyre temperature ( page 409).

% The values displayed in the multifunction dis play may deviate from those of the tyre pres sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure values indicated by pressure gauges are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressure. Make sure to observe the following further rela ted subject:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 409) Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring sys tem Requirements:

R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly set for the respective operating condition on each of the four wheels ( page 409). Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in the following situations:

R The tyre pressure has changed. R The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly fitted. Radio-equipment approval of the tyre pres sure monitoring system Radio equipment approval numbers Country Radio equipment approval number Abu Dhabi Huf Electronics Bretten GmbH Model: TSSRE4A Model: TSSSG4G6 TRA Registered No: ERXXXXX/XX Dealer No: DAXXXXXXX/XX Australia Wheels and tyres 413 Country Radio equipment approval number Brazil MODELO: TSSRE4A ANATEL: XXXX-XX-XXXX Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito proteo contrain terferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo e no pode causar interferncia a siste mas operando em carter pri mrio. On-board computer:

, Service . Tyres

# Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Use current pressures as new reference values? message is shown in the multifunc tion display.

# To begin restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The OK message is shown in the multifunc tion display. Current warning messages are deleted and the h yellow warning lamp goes out. After you have driven for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pres sures are within the specified range. The cur rent tyre pressures are then accepted as ref erence values and monitored. Make sure to observe the following further rela ted subject:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 409) 414 Wheels and tyres Country Radio equipment approval number Country Radio equipment approval number Country Dubai Huf Electronics Bretten GmbH Model: TSSRE4A Model: TSSSG4G6 TRA Registered No: ERXXXXX/XX Dealer No: DAXXXXXXX/XX European Union Iceland Norway Indonesia POSTEL 827872337732 Israel Radio equipment approval number 75015 Bretten Germany A. The use of this product does not need a wireless operation license. B. The product does not include an RF disturbance protection, and should not disturb other licensed products. C. It is forbidden to replace the antenna or to make any change in this product. Hereby, Huf Hlsbeck & Frst GmbH & Co. KG declares that the radio equipment type TSSRE4A &

TSSSG4G6 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:

http:// www.huf-group.com/

eudoc Frequency band: 433,92 MHz Maximum Transmission Power:

<10 mW Manufacturer:

Huf Electronics Bretten GmbH Gewerbestr. 40 Country Radio equipment approval number Radio equipment approval number Country Radio equipment approval number Country Moldova Oman Philip pines OMAN - TRA X/NNNN/YY Dyynnnn NTC Type Approved. No: ESD-XXXXXXXX Jordan Kingdom of Jordan Type approval for Tyre Pressure Sensor and ECU Manufacturer: Huf Electronics Bretten GmbH Model: TSSRE4Dg Type Approval Number:

TRC/LPD/2017/223 Model: TSSSG4G6 Type Approval Number:

TRC/LPD/2017/223 Malaysia XXXX/XXX/XXXX/XXXXXX Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC Numero d'agrement: MR XXXXX ANRT 2017 Date d'agrement: XX/XX/2017 Mexico IFT: XXXXXXXXX-XXXX IFT: XXXXXXXXX-XXXX Wheels and tyres 415 Russia South Africa Model: TSSRE4A XXXXXXXXXXXXXX Model: TSSSG4G6 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX Singapore Complies with IDA Standards DA103787 Type approval number: TA-2017/

XXXX Type approval number: TA-2017/

XXXX 416 Wheels and tyres Country Taiwan Radio equipment approval number Country Radio equipment approval number According to Administrative Reg ulations on Low Power Radio Waves Radiated Devices. Without permission granted by the DGT, any company, enter prise, or user is not allowed to change frequency, enhance transmitting power or alter origi nal characteristic as well as per formance to a approved low power radio-frequency devices. The low power radio-frequency devices shall not influence air craft security and interfere legal communications; If found, the user shall cease operating imme diately until no interference is achieved. The said legal communications means radio communications is operated in compliance with the Telecommunications Act. Country Thailand Ukraine United Arab Emi rates Radio equipment approval number The low power radio-frequency devices must be susceptible with the interference from legal com munications or ISM radio wave radiated devices. This telecommunication equip ment conforms to NTC technical requirement. XX.XXX.XX.XXXX-XX Huf Electronics Bretten GmbH Model: TSSRE4A Model: TSSSG4G6 TRA Registered No: ERXXXXX/XX Dealer No: DAXXXXXXX/XX

, Tyre pressure loss warning system Function of the tyre pressure loss warning system The tyre pressure loss warning system warns the driver by means of display messages when there is a severe tyre pressure loss. After a change in tyre pressure, a wheel rotation or a wheel change, the tyre pressure loss warn ing system has to be taught-in again by being restarted ( page 417). The tyre pressure loss warning system does not replace the need to regularly check the tyre pressures. System limitations The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

R If the tyre pressure is set incorrectly. R If there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for example, by a foreign object penetrating the tyre. R If the pressure loss in several tyres decrea ses at the same rate. The system has a limited or delayed function:

R When the road surface is poor, e.g. snow or gravel. R When driving with snow chains. R When driving in a very sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or sudden accel eration. R When driving with a high load. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 409) R Display messages about the tyres ( page 477) Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system Requirement:

R The recommended tyre pressure is correctly set for the respective operating condition on each of the four wheels ( page 409). Wheels and tyres 417 On-board computer:

, Service . Tyres

# Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tyre pressure loss warning activeRestart message is shown in the multifunction dis play. Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system in the following situations:

R The tyre pressure has changed. R The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly fitted.

# To begin restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tyre pressure now OK? message is shown in the multifunction display.

# Select Yes.

# To confirm restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator restarted message is shown in the multifunction display. 418 Wheels and tyres After you have driven for a few minutes, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressures of all the tyres. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 409) Wheel change Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel/tyre combinations at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect dimensions of wheels and tyres If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or wheel suspension components may become damaged.

# Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct:

R Designation R Type When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the correct:

R Designation R Manufacturer R Type

& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed ing the specified tyre load-bearing capa city or the permissible speed rating Exceeding the specified tyre load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating may lead to tyre damage and to the tyres burst ing.

# Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model.

# Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

* NOTE Damage to vehicle and tyres due to non-approved tyre types and sizes For safety reasons, only use wheels, tyres and accessories which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These tyres have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, e.g. ABS or ESP, and are marked as follows:

R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

(run-flat tyres only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer tain AMG tyres) Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tyre dimension var iations could cause the tyres to come into contact with the body and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea ded tyres Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor rec ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ ous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. For this reason driving safety cannot be guar anteed.

# Do not use used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage.

* NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tyres when driving over obstacles Large wheels have a lower tyre section width. The lower the tyre section width, the greater is the risk of damage to wheels or tyres when driving over obstacles.

# Avoid obstacles or drive particularly carefully.

* NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tyre-fitting tools Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve. The tools could damage the electronic com ponent parts.

# Have the tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop only.

* NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low ambient temperatures Using summer tyres at very low ambient temperatures can cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently. Wheels and tyres 419

# At temperatures below 7 C use M+S-

tyres. Accessory parts that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about:

R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations

& WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tyres The special tyre tread in combination with the optimised tyre compound, means that the risk of skidding or hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tyre running temperature. 420 Wheels and tyres

# Switch on the ESP and adapt your driving style accordingly.

# Use M+S tyres at outside temperatures of less than 50 F. Observe the following when selecting, fitting and replacing tyres:

R Country-specific requirements for tyre approval that define a specific tyre type for your vehicle. Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. R Only use tyres and wheels of the same type

(summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) and the same make. R Only fit wheels of the same size on one axle

(left and right). It is only permissible to fit a different wheel size in the event of a flat tyre in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R Only fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. R Do not make any modifications to the brake R Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the system, the wheels or the tyres. The use of shims or brake dust shields is not permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. R Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tyre pres sure monitoring system. R At temperatures below 7 C, use winter tyres or all-season tyres marked M+S for all wheels. Winter tyres bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro vide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. R For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same tread. R Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres fitted. If this is below the vehicle's maximum speed, this must be indicated in an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision. first 100 km. R Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. R When replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteris tics, e.g. winter tyres. For more information on wheels and tyres, con tact a qualified specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 409) R Tyre pressure table ( page 410) R Notes on the emergency spare wheel

( page 427) Notes on interchanging wheels

& WARNING Risk of injury through differ ent wheel sizes Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions may severely impair the driving characteris tics. The disk brakes or wheel suspension compo nents may also be damaged.

# Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions. Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ:

R Front wheels wear more on the shoulder of R Rear wheels wear more in the centre of the the tyre tyre Wheels and tyres 421 On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel size, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for the wheels. It is imperative to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Wheel change" when doing so. Required tyre-change tool kits may include, for example:

R Jack R Chock R Wheel wrench R Centring pin

% The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg. The maximum payload of the jack can be found on the sticker affixed to the jack. The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified spe cialist workshop. The tyre-change tool kit is in tool bag 1 under the load compartment floor. Notes on storing wheels R After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease or fuel. Overview of the tyre-change tool kit Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi cles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit. For more information on which tyre-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. 422 Wheels and tyres Setting up the folding wheel chock 1 Tool bag Tool bag 1 contains:

R Jack R Gloves R Wheel wrench R Centring pin R Folding wheel chock R Ratchet for jack Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change Requirements:

R The required tyre-change tool kit is available. If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre-

change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools. R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground. position.

# Apply the electric parking brake manually.

# Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead

# Vehicles with automatic transmission:

shift into position j.

# Switch off the engine.

# Make sure that the engine cannot be started.

# Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diago nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

# Remove the hub caps if necessary

( page 422).

# Raising the vehicle ( page 423). Removing and fitting hub caps Requirements:

R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change

( page 422). Vehicles with steel wheels The wheel trim covers the wheel bolts. Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove the wheel trim.

# Position the hub cap and turn the centre R the foot of the jack must be positioned verti cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly. cally under the jacking point. Wheels and tyres 423 Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel Requirements:

R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change ( page 422). R The hub caps have been removed

( page 422). Important notes on using the jack:

R only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R the jack is only designed for raising and hold ing the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under the vehicle. R the jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, load-bearing, non-slip underlay. Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:

R Never place your hands or feet under the vehicle. R Do not lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the engine and do not release the electric parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the tail gate.

# To remove: using both hands, carefully reach into two wheel trim openings and remove the wheel trim. Plastic hub cap

# To remove: turn the centre cover of the hub cap anti-clockwise and remove the hub cap.

# To fit: make sure that the centre cover of the hub cap is turned anti-clockwise. 424 Wheels and tyres

# Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. Position of jack support points

& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.

# Only position the jack at the appropri ate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned ver tically under the jacking point of the vehicle.

* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi cle raised.

# The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup port points.

# Take the ratchet ring spanner out of the tyre-

change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the lettering "AUF" is visible. Removing a wheel Requirement:

R The vehicle is raised ( page 423). When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, since this could impair the level of comfort when braking.

* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts a dirty surface.

# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on

# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com pletely. Wheels and tyres 425

# Screw centring pin 1 instead of the wheel bolt into the threading.

# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.

# Remove the wheel.

# Fit the new wheel ( page 425). Fitting a new wheel Requirement:

R The wheel is removed ( page 425).

# Position jack 2 at jack support point 1.

# Turn ratchet ring spanner 3 clockwise until jack 2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

# Continue to turn ratchet ring spanner 3 until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm off the ground.

# Loosen and remove the wheel ( page 425). 426 Wheels and tyres

& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/

wheel nuts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv ing.

# Never oil or grease the threads.

# In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam aged hub threads replaced.

# Do not continue driving.

# Observe the information on the choice of tyres ( page 418). For tyres with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when fitting.

# Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cen Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change tring pin and push it on. Requirements:

R The new wheel has been fitted ( page 425).

# Place the ratchet ring spanner onto the hexa gon nut of the jack so that the lettering "AB"

is visible.

# To lower the vehicle: turn the ratchet ring spanner of the jack anti-clockwise.

& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.

# Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.

# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes-

Benz and for the wheel in question.

# Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-

# Unscrew the centring pin.

# Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-

tight. tight.

# Lower the vehicle ( page 426).

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated (1 to 5). Specified tightening torque: 130 Nm.

& WARNING Risk of injury through incor rect tightening torque The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.

# Have the tightening torque checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop after changing a wheel.

# Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun ted wheel and adjust accordingly.

# Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning system: restart the tyre pressure loss warn ing system ( page 417). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.

# Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: restart the tyre pressure monitoring system ( page 412). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel. Make sure to observe the following further rela ted subject:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 409) Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Mounting an emergency spare wheel/spare wheel may severely impair the driving char acteristics. To prevent hazardous situations:

# Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.

# Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size. Wheels and tyres 427

# Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size briefly.

# Do not switch off ESP.

# Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions. Check the tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel fitted. Correct the pressure as necessary. The maximum permissible speed with an emer gency spare wheel fitted is 80 km/h. Do not fit the emergency spare wheel with snow chains. Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.

% Vehicles with a tyre pressure loss warn ing system: If an emergency spare wheel is fitted the tyre pressure loss warning system cannot function reliably. Only restart the sys tem again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.

# Detach the fastening straps.

# Unhook the retaining spring hooks of the fas tening straps from the brackets.

# Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with the emergency spare wheel.

# Open the emergency spare wheel bag and remove the emergency spare wheel. 428 Wheels and tyres Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: If an emergency spare wheel is fit ted the tyre pressure monitoring system can not function reliably. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: For a few minutes after an emer gency spare wheel is fitted, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

R Notes on tyre pressure ( page 409) R Tyre pressure table ( page 410) Removing the emergency spare wheel The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the load compart ment.

# Observe the information on mounting tyres

( page 418).

# Open the tailgate. Notes on technical data The technical data was determined in accord ance with EU Directives. The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-

Benz Service Centre. Only for certain countries: you can find vehi cle-specific vehicle data in the EC-Certificate of Conformity (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are delivered with your vehi cle. On-board electronics Notes on tampering with the engine elec tronics

* NOTE Premature wear through improper maintenance Improper maintenance may cause vehicle components to wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalida ted.

# Always have work on the engine elec tronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Two-way radios Notes on installing two-way radios

& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios The electromagnetic radiation from two-way radios can interfere with the on-board elec tronics if RF transmitters are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Technical data 429

& WARNING Risk of accident from incor rect operation of two-way radios If you operate two-way radios incorrectly in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation could interfere with the on-board electronics, e.g.:

R if the two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial R if the exterior aerial is not correctly mounted or is not of low reflection This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

# Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop.

# When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior aerial. 430 Technical data

* NOTE Invalidation of the operating per mit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed.

# Only use approved frequency bands.

# Observe the maximum permissible out put power in these frequency bands.

# Only use approved aerial positions. On the rear wings, it is recommended that you install the aerial on the side of the vehicle clos est to the centre of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles "EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or aerial con nectors intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Supple ments when installing. Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the values in the following table:

1 Front roof area 2 Rear roof area 3 Rear wing On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, installing an aerial to the front or rear roof area is not permitted. Technical data 431 Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number Vehicle identification plate The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions:

R two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW R two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W

(trunked radio system/Tetra) R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the follow ing frequency bands:

R trunked radio system/Tetra R 70 cm frequency band R 2G/3G/4G frequency band and maximum transmission output Maximum transmis sion output 100 W Frequency band Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 4 m frequency band 74 - 88 MHz 2 m frequency band 144 - 174 MHz Trunked radio sys tem/Tetra 380 - 460 MHz 70 cm frequency band 420 - 450 MHz Two-way radio

(2G/3G/4G) 30 W 50 W 10 W 35 W 10 W 432 Technical data 6 Permissible front axle load (kg) 7 Permissible rear axle load (kg) 8 Paint code

% The data shown in the illustration is example data. VIN and engine number Vehicle identification plate (example: Kuwait) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 Place of manufacture 3 Manufacturing date 4 Vehicle model 5 VIN Vehicle identification plate (example: all other countries) 1 Vehicle manufacturer 2 EU general operating permit number (only for certain countries) 3 VIN (vehicle identification number) 4 Permissible gross mass (kg) 5 Permissible gross mass of vehicle combina tion (kg) (only for specific countries) 1 Engine number stamped into the crankcase 2 VIN (vehicle identification number) stamped into the crossmember 3 VIN (vehicle identification number) at the lower edge of the windscreen The VIN at the lower edge of the windscreen 3 is only available in some countries. You can obtain further information from any qualified specialist workshop. Operating fluids Notes on operating fluids

& WARNING Risk of injury from operating fluids harmful to your health Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm ful to your health.

# Observe the text on the original con tainers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids.

# Always store operating fluids sealed in their original containers.

# Always keep children away from operat ing fluids.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre sponsible disposal

# Dispose of operating fluids in an envi ronmentally responsible manner. Operating fluids include the following:

R fuels R exhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. AdBlue R lubricants R coolant R brake fluid R windscreen washer fluid R climate control system refrigerant Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. You can identify operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers:

Technical data 433 R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Further information on approved operating flu ids:

R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for operating fluids at http://bevo.mercedes-

benz.com (by entering the designation) R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app (by entering the designation) R at a qualified specialist workshop

& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly flammable.

# Fire, naked flames, smoking and creat ing sparks must be avoided.

# Switch off the ignition and, if it has been in use, switch off the stationary heater before you refuel your vehicle. 434 Technical data

& WARNING Risk of injury from fuel Fuels are poisonous and harmful to your health

# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

# Do not inhale fuel vapour.

# Keep children away from fuel. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.

# If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.

# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten tion immediately. Do not induce vomit ing.

# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. Fuel Information on fuel grades for vehicles with petrol engines Observe the notes on operating fluids

( page 433).

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

# Only refuel using unleaded fuel that conforms to EN 228, or an equivalent specification. Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10 % ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Do not refuel using:

R diesel R E85, E100 R petrol containing methanol (M15, M30, M85, M100) R petrol with additives containing metal If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel:

# do not switch the ignition on.

# consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul phur, this can produce unpleasant odours. The recommended octane number for your vehi cle can be found on the instruction label in the fuel filler flap ( page 154). As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with at least 91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel con sumption. Never refuel using petrol with a lower RON. Further information on fuel can be found:

R at a filling station R at a qualified specialist workshop Information on additives in petrol Observe the notes on service products

( page 433).

* NOTE Damage caused by non-approved

& WARNING Risk of fire through fuel mix additives ture Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring.

# Only add cleaning additives recommen ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-name fuels with additives. The fuel grade available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Be sure to observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Information on fuel grades for vehicles with a diesel engine General notes Observe the notes on operating fluids

( page 433). If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. While the engine is running, component parts in the exhaust system may overheat unnoticed.

# Never refuel using petrol.

# Never mix diesel fuel with petrol.

* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

# Only refuel using diesel fuel that con forms to EN 590, or an equivalent spec ification.

# Vehicles with diesel particulate fil ters: in countries outside the EU, only use low-sulphur Euro diesel with a sul phur content of under 50 ppm. Technical data 435 Do not use the following:

R petrol R marine diesel R heating oil R bio-diesel R vegetable oil R paraffin R kerosene Information on low outside temperatures Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel fuel as possible at the beginning of winter. Before changing over to winter diesel fuel, the fuel tank should be empty, if possible. When refuelling with winter diesel fuel for the first time, keep the fuel level low, for example at reserve level. The fuel tank can be filled as usual when next refuelling. Further information on fuel can be found:

R at a filling station R at a qualified specialist workshop 436 Technical data Tank content and fuel reserve The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment. Capacity Model A 250 All other models Model All models Adblue Total capacity 43.0 l or 51.0 l 43.0 l 5.0 l of which reserve fuel Notes on AdBlue Observe the notes on operating fluids

( page 433). AdBlue is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines.

* NOTE Damage caused by mixing addi tives with AdBlue or from diluting AdBlue The BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment sys tem could be destroyed by:

R Additives in AdBlue R Diluting AdBlue

# Only use AdBlue in accordance with ISO 22241.

# Do not add additives.

# Do not dilute AdBlue.

* NOTE Damage and malfunctions due to impurities in AdBlue Impurities in AdBlue lead to:

R Increased emissions values R Damage to the catalytic converter R Engine damage R BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment mal functions

# Avoid impurities in AdBlue.

+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Contamination caused by AdBlue AdBlue residues crystallise after a period of time, and contaminate the surfaces with which they come into contact.

# Surfaces that have come into contact with AdBlue while refilling must be immediately rinsed with water, or AdBlue must be removed with a damp cloth and cold water. If AdBlue has already crystallised, clean it with a sponge and cold water. When you open the AdBlue tank, small amounts of ammonia vapour may escape. Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may be released. Only fill the AdBlue tank in well-venti lated areas. AdBlue capacity Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. Total capacity of AdBlue tank Model Total capacity All models 23.8 l Engine oil Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on service products

( page 433).

* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi tives

# Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.

# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.

# Do not use additives.

# Have the engine oil renewed at regular intervals. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz engines. Further information on engine oils and oil filters:

R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at http://bevo.mercedes-

benz.com (by entering the designation) Technical data 437 R at a qualified specialist workshop Petrol engines: for certain countries, different engine oils can be used in conjunction with reduced maintenance intervals.

% Further information on different engine oils can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Quality and capacity of engine oil MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval Petrol engines All models MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval Diesel engines All models MB-Freigabe or MB-

Approval 229.51, 229.52, 229.61, 229.71 MB-Freigabe or MB-

Approval 226.51, 229.31, 229.51, 229.52, 229.61, 229.71 438 Technical data If the engine oils listed in the table are not avail able, you may add a maximum of 1.0 l of the fol lowing engine oils once only:

R petrol engines: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.31 or ACEA C3 R diesel engines: ACEA C3 The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter. Replacement amount Model A 180 d All other models Replacement amount 5.5 l 5.1 l Notes on brake fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids

( page 433).

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapour pockets forming in the brake sys tem The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake sys tem when the brakes are applied hard. This impairs the braking effect.

# Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. Have the brake fluid regularly changed at a quali fied specialist workshop. Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0. Further information on brake fluid:

R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids at http://bevo.mercedes-

benz.com R at a qualified specialist workshop Coolant Notes on coolant Observe the notes on service products

( page 433).

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart ment, it may ignite.

# Allow the engine to cool down before you top up the antifreeze.

# Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler opening.

# Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle.

* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool ant

# Only add coolant that has been pre mixed with the required antifreeze pro tection. Further information on coolant:

R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids 310.1, e.g. online at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. R At a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Overheating at high outside tem peratures If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro tected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures.

# Always use coolant approved by Mercedes-Benz.

# Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper ating Fluids 310.1. Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. The proportion of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system should be:

R a minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to approximately -37 C). R a maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45 C). Notes on windscreen washer fluid Observe the notes on service products

( page 433).

& WARNING Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

# Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening. Technical data 439

* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen washer fluid Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting.

# Only use windscreen washer fluids which are also suitable for use on plas tic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.

* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer fluids

# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win terFit with other windscreen washer flu ids. Do not use distilled or de-ionised water as the fill level sensor may be triggered erroneously. Recommended windscreen washer fluid:

R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit 440 Technical data For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa tion on the antifreeze container. Mix the washer fluid with the windscreen washer fluid all year round. Model Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions The heights specified may vary as a result of the:

R tyres R load R condition of the suspension R optional equipment Height when opened and headroom Vehicle height 1 Height when opened 2 Head room Model A 250 All other models 1445 mm 1440 mm A 250 2002 mm 1857 mm All other models 1997 mm 1852 mm Weights and loads Vehicle dimensions All models Vehicle length Vehicle width including out side mirrors Vehicle width excluding out side mirrors Wheelbase 4419 mm 1992 mm 1796 mm 2729 mm Please note that for the specified vehicle data:

R items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the payload. R vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate . Roof load All models Maximum roof load 100 kg Mounting dimensions Trailer hitch General notes on the trailer hitch Not all models can be used to tow a trailer

( page 221). Modifications to the engine cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle model. The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissi ble if a towing capacity is specified in your vehi cle documents. Further information can be obtained at a quali fied specialist workshop. 1 Fastening point 2 Overhang dimension 3 Rear axle centre line Technical data 441 The overhang dimension and fastening points are valid for a trailer hitch installed at the fac tory. Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. Model All models 2 Over hang dimen sion Permissible towing capacity The tongue weight is not included in the towing capacity. Permissible towing capacity, braked (at a minimum start-off gradeability of 8 %) Model A 180 d All other models Permissible towing capacity, braked 1600 kg 1800 kg 442 Technical data Permissible towing capacity, braked (at a minimum start-off gradeability of 12 %) Permissible towing capacity, braked

# The tongue weight must not be below 50 kg.

# Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maximum permissible tongue weight. All other models Maximum tongue weight Permissible towing capacity, unbraked Permissible towing capacity, unbraked Permissible rear axle load during trailer operation Model A 180 d Model A 180 d A 200 A 250 1400 kg 1600 kg 705 kg 680 kg 720 kg Model All models Axle load Model A 180 d A 200 A 250 80 kg Axle load 970 kg 976 kg 986 kg Maximum tongue weight

* NOTE Damage caused by the trailer coming loose If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose. Display messages Introduction Notes on display messages Display messages appear on the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic symbols are sim plified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols on the multifunction display. The multifunction display shows high-priority dis play messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. For some display messages, a symbol is also shown:

R Further information R O Hide display message You can select the desired symbol by swiping left or right on the left-hand touch control. Press the symbol to show further information on the multifunction display. Press the O symbol to hide the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the button or the left-hand touch control. The display messages are then stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hid den. The multifunction display shows these dis play messages continuously until the cause of the message has been rectified. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 443 Calling up stored display messages On-board computer:

, Service . 1 message If there are no display messages, No messages appears on the multifunction display.

# Scroll through the display messages by swip ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand touch control.

# To exit the message memory: press the button. 444 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Safety systems

inoperative See Owner's Manual Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. The brake system continues to operate normally. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa tion.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning If ABS and ESP are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ABS and ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 445 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* ABS and ESP are temporarily unavailable.

currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system continues to operate normally. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa tion.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning If ABS and ESP are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ABS and ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.

# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. 446 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* ESP is temporarily unavailable. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.

# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 447 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* ESP is malfunctioning. inoperative See Owner's Manual Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. The brake system continues to operate normally. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa tion.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 448 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. T

inoperative See Owner's Manual

Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake

& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning If EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning, the wheels can lock when braking and ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The red ! indicator lamp is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off.

# Switch the ignition on. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 449 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Release parking brake

* The red ! indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:

R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled . R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake .

# Check that the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake are fulfilled.

# Release the electric parking brake manually. 450 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

Parking brake See Owner's Manual To apply:

# Switch off the ignition and switch it back on.

# Apply the electric parking brake manually . If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away. The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunction ing. To release:

# Switch off the ignition and switch it back on.

# Release the electric parking brake manually . or

# Release the electric parking brake automatically . If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is mal functioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 451 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Switch off the ignition and switch it back on. To apply:

# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually . To release:

# Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually. If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red ! indicator lamp continues to flash:

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away. The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the battery charge level is too low:

# Charge the battery. To apply:

# Switch off the ignition. The electric parking brake is applied automatically. 452 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the electric parking brake should not be applied, e.g. when washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash or when having the vehicle towed, leave the ignition switched on. Do not do this when having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically:

# Switch off the ignition and switch it back on.

# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually . If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away. To release:

# If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually . If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 453 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J Check brake fluid level

* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not top up the brake fluid.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not top up the brake fluid.

* The brake pads have reached the wear limit.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Check brake pad wear G Inoperative 454 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* Service limited. Mercedes me connect Services limited See Own-

er's Manual Active Brake Assist Func-

tions limited See Owner's Manual Active Brake Assist Func-

tions currently limited See Owner's Manual At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning.

# Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection .

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE PLUS is malfunctioning. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system borders .

# Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system borders, the system will become available again.

# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual

* PRESAFE functions are malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. and restart the engine. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 455 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The restraint system is faulty . 6 Restraint sys. malfunction Consult workshop

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Detection of a restraint system malfunction:

R the 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on. R the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 456 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning . 6 Front left malfunction Con-

sult workshop (example) 6 Left windowbag malfunc-

tion Consult work-

shop (example)

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Detection of a restraint system malfunction:

R the 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on. R the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The corresponding windowbag is malfunctioning .

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window airbag The window airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration.

# Have the window airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front-passenger airbag dis-

abled See Owner's Manual

* The front passenger airbag is disabled, even though an adult or a person with a build corresponding to that of an adult is seated on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 457

& WARNING Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, espe cially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.

# Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff .

# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 458 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Man-

ual

* The front passenger airbag is enabled while the vehicle is in motion:

R even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat R even when the front passenger seat is not occupied The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag.

# Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG in front of it;

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff .

# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 459 Driving systems ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!

ATTENTION ASSIST inoper-

ative Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

( page 211).

# If necessary, take a break.

* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system borders ( page 219).

# Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system borders, the system will become available again. Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative

* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 460 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system borders have been reached ( page 216).

# Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. or

# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions

# If necessary, clean the rear bumper. If the bumper is extremely dirty, the sensors in the bumper may be mal and restart the engine. functioning. Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system borders have been reached ( page 216).

# Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.

# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions and restart the engine.

* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist is unavailable.

# Press the left-hand touch control and acknowledge the display message. Blind Spot Assist not availa-

ble when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist is unavailable.

# Press the left-hand touch control and acknowledge the display message. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 461 Active Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Man-

ual Blind Spot Assist inopera-

tive Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Traffic Sign Assist inopera-

tive

* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and restart the engine.

# If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.

# Drive on.

* Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. 462 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Off Active Distance Assist available again

--- mph

* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is skidding or a condition for activation is not met.

# Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function .

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again and can be activated ( page 184).

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions have been fulfilled.

# Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC . Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 463 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes:

R soiling of the sensors R heavy rain R extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert Currently unavailable Radar sensors dirty Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems will become availa ble again. If the display message does not disappear:

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Clean all sensors .

# Restart the engine. 464 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The camera view is restricted. Possible causes:

R dirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision R heavy rain, snow or fog Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems will become availa ble again. If the display message does not disappear:

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Clean the windscreen. Currently unavailable Cam-

era dirty Active Distance Assist cur-

rently unavailable See Own-

er's Manual Active Distance Assist inop-

erative

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system borders ( page 183).

# Drive on.

* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system borders, the system will become available again. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system borders ( page 188).

# Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system borders, the system will become available again. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 465

* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter is switched to passive mode

( page 181).

* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.

# Observe the activation conditions for cruise control .

* Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been switched off automatically ( page 179)

( page 179). Active Steering Assist cur-

rently unavailable See Own-

er's Manual Active Steering Assist inop-

erative Limiter passive

--- mph Cruise control off 466 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Cruise control inoperative

* Cruise control is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise control and Limiter inoperative

* Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The limiter is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Limiter inoperative

--- mph Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX mph Maximum speed exceeded

* The limiter cannot be activated as not all activation conditions have been fulfilled.

# Observe the activation conditions of the limiter .

* You have reached the stored maximum speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.

* The maximum permissible speed has been exceeded (only for certain countries).

# Drive more slowly. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 467 Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Top up coolant See Own-

ers Manual

* The coolant level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.

# Add coolant .

* The coolant is too hot.

Coolant Stop vehicle Switch engine off

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the bonnet If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

# Wait until the engine has cooled down.

# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120 C. 468 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The battery is not being charged.

See Owner's Manual

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Start engine See Owner's Manual

* The engine is off and the battery charge level is too low.

# Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.

# Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive for a longer distance. The battery charges. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 469 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low.

Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual

# Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

continue driving under any circumstances.

# Switch off the engine.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The battery charge level is too low. continue driving under any circumstances. Stop vehicle Leave engine running

# Leave the engine running.

# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not 470 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. 4 Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling 4 Engine oil level Stop vehi-

cle Switch engine off

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# Check the engine oil level when next refuelling. Top up the engine oil ( page 378). Notes on engine oil ( page 437).

* Display message only for certain engines:

The engine oil level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Switch off the engine.

# Check the engine oil level. Top up the engine oil ( page 378). Notes on engine oil ( page 437). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 471 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* Display message only for certain engines:

The engine oil level is too high. 4 Engine oil level Reduce oil level 4 Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil siphoned off.

* Display message only for certain engines:

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

# Check the engine oil level when next refuelling. Top up the engine oil ( page 378). Notes on engine oil ( page 437). 472 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* Display message only for certain engines:

The engine oil pressure is too low. 4 Engine oil pressure Stop Switch off engine

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil pressure

# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil pressure.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not

* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor is interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Vehicles with diesel engines: the fuel filter is dirty or the water in the fuel filter must be drained off.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 5 Engine oil level cannot be measured

Clean the fuel filter Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 473 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* Vehicles with diesel engines: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.

# Refuel. Antriebssystem Strung Anhalten Motor aus

* The drive system is malfunctioning.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Antriebssystem Strung Werkstatt aufsuchen

* The drive system is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The fan motor is defective.

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120 C. Display messages Replace air cleaner Reserve fuel level

474 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Top up AdBlue Perf. reduced in XXX miles See Owner's Manual Top up AdBlue Perf. reduced: XXX mph No start in XXX miles AdBlue system fault Perf. reduced: XXX mph No start in XXX miles

* The low AdBlue level will lead to limited performance after the remaining distance displayed has been driven.

# Refill AdBlue immediately .

% The message disappears after driving at a speed above 15 km/h for approximately one minute.

* The low AdBlue level will lead to limited performance as of the speed displayed. After the displayed remaining distance has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the engine.

# Refill AdBlue immediately.

* Power reduction due to the AdBlue system fault. After the distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the engine.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The AdBlue system is malfunctioning. You can no longer start the engine.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 475

* The AdBlue system is malfunctioning. Performance will be reduced after the remaining distance displayed has been covered.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. AdBlue system fault Engine start not possible AdBlue system fault Perf. reduced in XXX miles See Owner's Manual AdBlue system fault See Owner's Manual Refill AdBlue See Owners Manual

* The AdBlue system is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The AdBlue level has fallen below the reserve range.

# Refill AdBlue immediately . 476 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Refill AdBlue Eng. start not possible

* The AdBlue tank is empty. You can no longer start the engine.

# Top up at least 4.5 l of AdBlue .

# Switch the ignition on. You can restart the engine after approximately one minute. Tyres Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre pressure Check tyres

* The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 477

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose the following risks:

R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. R The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.

# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.

# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system .

* The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.

# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system .

* The tyre pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Check tyre pressures then restart Run Flat Indicator Run Flat Indicator inopera-

tive 478 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Rectify tyre pressure h Check tyre(s)

* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great.

# Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.

# When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitoring system .

* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose the following risks:

R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. R The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.

# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the tyre pressure and the tyres. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 479 Display messages h Warning tyre defect

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tyre Flat tyres are dangerous in the following ways:

R The tyres can overheat and cause a fire. R The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Do not drive with a flat tyre.

# Observe the notes on flat tyres. Notes on flat tyres ( page 390).

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the tyres. Tyre press. monitor cur-

rently unavailable pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable.

# Drive on.

* No signals can be received from the tyre pressure sensors due to strong radio signal source interference. The tyre The tyre pressure monitoring system restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. 480 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Wheel sensor(s) missing Tyre press. monitor inoper-

ative No wheel sensors Tyre press. monitor inoper-

ative

* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed.

# Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

* The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated.

# Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.

* The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning If the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres. Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may, for example, affect the vehicle's handling characteristics, steering and braking.

# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre(s) overheated

* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value,

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. the tyres are displayed in yellow.

# Drive more slowly. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 481 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyre(s) overheated Reduce speed

* At least one tyre is overheating.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres Overheated tyres may burst, particularly at high speeds.

# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.

# Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The key needs to be replaced.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Key Replace key 482 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

, Replace key See Owner's Manual Change key batteries Key not detected(white display message)

* Vehicles with a digital vehicle key: only a few or no authorisations remain for starting the engine.

# Make sure that the internet connection is not limited by certain mobile phone settings.

# Open the Mercedes me connect web app http://www.mercedes.me. and call up the digital vehicle key service.

# Deactivate the service first and then activate it again.

# If the display message still appears, contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (CAC). Vehicles with a digital vehicle key sticker: only a few or no authorisations remain for starting the engine.

# Order a new digital vehicle key sticker from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or at http://www.mercedes-

benz.com/connect.

* The key battery is discharged.

# Replace the battery .

* The key is currently undetected.

# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

# If the key is still not recognised, start the engine with the key in the stowage compartment . Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 483 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Key not detected(red dis play message)

* The key cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine:

R you can no longer start the engine. R you cannot centrally lock the vehicle.

# Ensure that the key is in the vehicle. If the key detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source:

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Place the key in the stowage compartment for starting the engine with the key .

* The key detection function is malfunctioning.

# Change the location of the key in the vehicle.

# Start the vehicle with the key in the stowage compartment . Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual 484 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* Retract or extend the ball neck. Vehicle j Trailer coupling extending Do not attempt to speed up, slow down or initiate the retracting or extending process using your hand, foot or other aids. During the retracting or extending process, do not couple a trailer. When the ball neck has reached an operational position, the display message disappears. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions j Check trailer hitch lock

* The trailer hitch is not operational when you are driving with a trailer.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine.

# Uncouple the trailer and safeguard it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivelling procedure .

# When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 485

& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked If the ball neck is not in the locked position, the trailer may come loose.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears. If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is defective and the ball neck is not locked.

# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The trailer hitch is not operational when the vehicle is at a standstill.

# Uncouple the coupled trailer and safeguard it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivelling procedure . 486 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is defective and the ball neck is not locked.

# Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position j and into another transmission position.

* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position j or i into another transmission position.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Start the engine.

* The driver's door is not fully closed and the transmission is in position k, i or h.

# Shift the transmission to position j when you park the vehicle.

* While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, the transmission has been shifted to position i.

# Depress the brake pedal to stop and, when the vehicle is stationary, shift the transmission to position j.

# To continue your journey, shift the transmission to position h or k.

* The transmission can be shifted to position j only when the vehicle is stationary. Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position To shift out of P or N, depress brake and start engine Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door open and trans-

mission not in P N permanently active Risk of vehicle rolling Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 487 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Without changing gear, consult workshop

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be shifted.

# When the transmission is in position h, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not shift the transmis sion position.

# For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. d Vehicle is operational Switch off the ignition before exiting Transmission Malfunction Stop

# When leaving the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the key with you.

# If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heater. Otherwise, the 12V battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only using a donor battery (starting assis tance).

* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to position i automatically.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Switch the transmission to position j.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Reversing not poss. Con-

sult workshop

* The transmission is malfunctioning. Reverse gear can no longer be engaged.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 488 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Auxiliary battery malfunc-

tion Air conditioning Malfunc-

tion See Owner's Manual Getriebe Strung Werk-

statt aufsuchen Teaching in transmission complete Getriebe wird eingelernt Whlhebel bettigen Bremse fr XX s treten Wegrollgefahr

* The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Until then, always manually set the transmission to position j before you switch off the engine.

# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

* Operation of the climate control system is temporarily restricted. Airflow and fresh air supply are set to automatic mode.

# Have the climate control system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

* The transmission is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The transmission's teach-in process is complete. All transmission positions can be engaged again.

* The transmission is being taught in. There is a risk of the vehicle rolling away.

# Depress and hold the brake pedal until the teach-in procedure has been completed. The electric parking brake is applied automatically during the teach-in procedure.

# Switch the ignition on.

# Select transmission position j, k or i. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 489 Trans. oil overheated Drive on with care Anti-theft alarm system Malfunction Apply brake to select R j Operation only possible in transmission position N

* The transmission is overheating. When the display message is active, starting up and driving characteristics may be temporarily impaired.

# Drive at low speeds.

# Avoid sporty driving.

# Before starting up on uphill gradients, let the transmission cool down until the display message disappears.

* The anti-theft alarm system is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Switch the transmission to position k.

* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position h and into transmission position k.

* You have attempted to swivel the ball neck and the transmission is not in position i.

# Switch the transmission to position i. 490 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* You have attempted to swivel the ball neck and the transmission is in position k, i or h.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Switch the transmission to position j. j Operation only possible in transmission position P Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual Steering malfunction Drive carefully Visit workshop

* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is considerably impaired.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not

* The power assistance for the steering is malfunctioning. You may need to use more force to steer. continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 491 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The climate control system is malfunctioning. Let fresh air into the vehi-

cle interior! Air condition-

ing malf. Visit workshop

& WARNING Risk of injury and accident due to an insufficient supply of fresh air If the climate control system is malfunctioning, carbon dioxide levels may increase in the passenger compart ment. Breathing in carbon dioxide may cause dizziness.

# Open the window to ensure that there is a sufficient supply of fresh air.

# Open the window to ensure that there is an adequate supply of fresh air.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The power assistance for the steering is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.

# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.

# Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.

# Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's Manual

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered. 492 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The bonnet is open.

C

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the engine bonnet unlocked An unlocked engine bonnet may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view.

# Never unlock the engine bonnet when driving.

# Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

# Close the bonnet.

* At least one door is open.

# Close all doors. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 493 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The tailgate is open.

& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

# Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate.

# Never drive with the tailgate open.

* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.

# Close the tailgate.

# Top up the washer fluid . A Top up washer fluid 494 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The corresponding light source is defective.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Lights b Left dipped beam (example) or

# Check whether you are permitted to replace the light source yourself .

% LED light bulbs: the display message for the corresponding lamp appears only when all the light-emitting diodes in the lamp have failed.

* The active headlamps are faulty.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of the Intelligent Light System.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b Active Light System inoper-

ative b Intelligent Light System inoperative Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 495 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The exterior lighting is faulty.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the fuses and replace them if necessary .

* The light sensor is faulty.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. b Malfunction See Owner's Manual b AUTO lights inoperative b Switch off lights b Switch on headlamps

* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.

# Turn the light switch to the position.

* You are driving without dipped-beam headlamps.

# Turn the light switch to the L or position. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is faulty.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 496 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable. The system borders have been reached ( page 122).

# Drive on. Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system borders have been reached ( page 121).

# Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus available again display message appears. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist available again display message appears. or flash after the engine is started or during a journey. Warning and indicator lamps Overview of warning and indicator lamps Some systems perform a self-test when the igni tion is switched on. Some warning and indicator lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behav iour is non-critical. These warning and indicator lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up Instrument display (standard) Instrument display in the widescreen cockpit Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 497

# Electrical fault( page 508) 6 Restraint system ( page 498)

; Engine diagnostics ( page 508) Fuel reserve with fuel filler cap loca tion indicator ( page 508)

? Vehicles with widescreen cock pit: coolant too hot/cold ( page 508) Distance warning ( page 505)

% Preglow h Tyre pressure monitoring system

( page 511) j Trailer hitch is not operational or swivels ( page 506) The positions of the indicator lamps on the instrument display may differ from the sample display depending on the display setting. Warning and indicator lamps:

L Dipped beam ( page 116) T Standing lights ( page 116) K Main beam ( page 118)

#! Turn signal light ( page 118) R Rear fog light ( page 116) Seat belt not fastened ( page 504) J Brakes (red) ( page 498) J Brakes (yellow) ( page 498)

! ABS malfunctioning ( page 498) ESP( page 498) ESP OFF ( page 498)

! Electric parking brake ( page 498) Power-assisted steering malfunction ing ( page 506) Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. 498 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Safety systems J Brake system warning lamp

(yellow)

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Adjust your speed and continue to drive carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.

# If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J Brake system warning lamp

(red) The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes:

R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 499

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. Braking char acteristics may be impaired. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not top up the brake fluid. 500 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not

ABS warning lamp continue driving under any circumstances.

# Observe the messages on the multifunction display.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is malfunctioning. If there is an additional acoustic warning signal, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

& WARNING There is risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning If EBD or ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 501 Warning/indicator lamp ESP warning lamp flashes ESP warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP is intervening .

# Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. The yellow ESP warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 502 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp ESP OFF warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP is deactivated.

& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP deactivated If ESP is deactivated, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.

# Drive on carefully.

# Only deactivate ESP for as long as the situation requires. If ESP cannot be activated, ESP is malfunctioning.

# Have ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP . Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow indicator lamp is also lit if the electric parking brake malfunctions.

# Observe the messages in the multifunction display. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 503

Red indicator lamp, electric parking brake applied

Yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is mal functioning 504 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is malfunctioning. 6 Restraint system warning lamp

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example.

# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.

# Observe the messages in the multifunction display.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Seat belt 7 Seat belt warning lamp lights up Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine is started. In addition, an acoustic warning tone may sound. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.

# Fasten your seat belt. If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the seat belt warning lamp may remain lit. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 505 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 7 Seat belt warning lamp flashes The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.

# Fasten your seat belt. There are objects on the front passenger seat.

# Remove the objects from the front passenger seat. Driving systems Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Distance warning warning lamp The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.

# Be prepared to brake immediately.

# Increase the distance. Active Brake Assist. 506 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Vehicle j Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red trailer hitch warning lamp is on. The trailer hitch is not operational or swivels. Trailer hitch warning lamp

& WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked If the ball neck is not in the locked position, the trailer may come loose.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.

# Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.

# Observe the messages in the multifunction display. If the trailer hitch swivels:

# Wait until the ball neck has reached the operational position. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 507 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Power steering system warning lamp The red power steering system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power steering assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Observe the messages in the multifunction display. 508 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Engine

Engine diagnosis warning lamp Fuel reserve warning lamp

Electrical fault warning lamp The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.

# Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank may have been run dry.

# Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked. The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.

# Refuel. The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. There is a fault in the electrics.

# Observe the messages in the multifunction display. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 509 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Coolant warning lamp The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes:

R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R Coolant level too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120 C.

& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the bonnet If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.

# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not con tinue driving under any circumstances.

# Observe the messages in the multifunction display. If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 510 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Otherwise:

# Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

# Check the coolant level.

# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120 C. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 511 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tyres h Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure pose the following risks:

R The tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. R The driving characteristics, steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle.

# Observe the recommended tyre pressures.

# Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

# Check the tyre pressure and the tyres. 512 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty.

& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning If the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres. Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may, for example, affect the vehicle's handling characteristics, steering and braking.

# Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 1, 2, 3 ... 12 V battery ............................................. 400 Replacing ............................................ 400 12 V socket see Socket (12 V) 230 V socket see Socket (230 V) 360 Camera ........................................... 202 Care .................................................... 384 Function .............................................. 202 Selecting a view .................................. 205 Setting as a favourite .......................... 205 A A/C function Activating/deactivating (multimedia system) ................................................ 136 Switching on/off (control panel) ......... 136 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ............. 169 Acceleration see Kickdown Access data Setting ................................................. 353 Acoustic locking verification signal Activating/deactivating ......................... 65 Active Blind Spot Assist .......................... 216 Activating/deactivating ....................... 219 Brake application ................................. 217 Function ............................................... 216 System limitations ............................... 216 Trailer operation ................................... 217 Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) .. 375 Operation ............................................ 375 Resetting ............................................. 375 Active Brake Assist Function/notes .................................... 174 Setting ................................................. 178 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ........ 183 Active Emergency Stop Assist ............. 192 Active Lane Change Assist .................. 190 Calling up a speed ............................... 184 Displays in the Instrument Display ...... 192 Function .............................................. 183 Increasing/decreasing speed .............. 184 Requirements: ..................................... 184 Route-based speed adaptation ............ 187 Selecting ............................................. 184 Index 513 Steering wheel buttons ........................ 184 Storing a speed ................................... 184 Switching off/deactivating .................. 184 Switching on/activating ...................... 184 System limitations ............................... 183 Active Emergency Stop Assist ............... 192 Active headlamps function ..................... 119 Active Lane Change Assist Activating/deactivating ....................... 192 Function .............................................. 190 Active Lane Keeping Assist ..................... 219 Activating/deactivating ....................... 220 Function ............................................... 219 Sensitivity (function/notes) ................. 221 Setting the sensitivity .......................... 221 System limitations ............................... 219 Active Parking Assist .............................. 205 Cross Traffic Alert ................................ 210 Drive Away Assist ................................ 209 Exiting a parking space ....................... 208 Function .............................................. 205 Parking ................................................ 207 System limitations ............................... 205 514 Index Active Speed Limit Assist ............... 186, 216 Display ................................................. 186 Function .............................................. 186 Setting ................................................. 216 Active Steering Assist ............................. 188 Activating/deactivating ....................... 190 Active Emergency Stop Assist ............. 192 Active Lane Change Assist .................. 190 Displays in the Instrument Display ...... 192 Function .............................................. 188 System limitations ............................... 188 Adaptive brake lights .............................. 178 Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED see Intelligent Light System Adaptive Highbeam Assist Activating/deactivating ....................... 122 Function ............................................... 121 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Activating/deactivating ....................... 123 Function .............................................. 122 AdBlue .................................................... 436 Additives ............................................. 436 Filling capacity .................................... 437 Notes ................................................... 157 Purity ................................................... 436 Topping up ........................................... 158 Additional door lock .................................. 68 Additives .................................................. 437 AdBlue ................................................. 436 Engine oil ............................................. 437 Fuelling ................................................ 434 Additives (AdBlue) see AdBlue Additives (engine oil) see Additives Additives (fuel) see Fuelling Address book see Contacts Adjusting the balance/fader Burmester surround sound system .... 373 Adjusting the headlamp range ................ 117 Adjusting the sound focus Burmester surround sound system .... 373 Advanced sound system Calling up the sound menu .................. 373 Information .......................................... 373 After-sales service centre see ASSYST PLUS Air conditioning menu Air conditioning system see Climate control Calling up ............................................ 136 Air distribution ........................................ 135 Setting (multimedia system) ................ 137 Air vents ................................................... 138 Adjusting (front) .................................. 138 Adjusting (rear) .................................... 139 Air vents see Air vents Air-recirculation mode ............................ 138 Airbag ......................................................... 37 Activation .............................................. 31 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) .... 37 Installation locations ............................. 37 Index 515 Knee airbag ........................................... 37 Overview ............................................... 37 Protection .............................................. 37 Reduced protection ............................... 39 Side impact airbag ................................. 37 Windowbag ............................................ 37 Airflow ...................................................... 135 Alarm see Panic alarm Alarm system Alternative route see Route see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Ambient lighting ...................................... 124 Android Auto ............................................ 343 Connecting a mobile phone ................. 344 Ending ................................................. 345 Note .................................................... 344 Overview ............................................. 343 Sound settings .................................... 345 Transferred vehicle data ...................... 345 Animals Pets in the vehicle ................................. 62 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Ashtray ..................................................... 110 Assistance systems Anti-skid chains see Snow chains Anti-theft alarm system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Anti-theft protection Additional door lock .............................. 68 Immobiliser ........................................... 83 Anti-theft protection see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Anticipatory occupant protection see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection) see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) Apple CarPlay ....................................... 342 Connecting an iPhone ....................... 343 Exiting ................................................. 343 Notes .................................................. 342 Overview ............................................. 342 Tone settings ....................................... 343 Transferred vehicle data ...................... 345 see Driving safety system Assistant display Menu (on-board computer) .................. 233 ASSYST PLUS ........................................... 374 Battery disconnection periods ............. 375 Displaying the service due date ........... 374 Function/notes .................................... 374 Regular maintenance work .................. 374 Special service requirements ............... 374 ATA (anti-theft alarm system) .................. 83 Activating/deactivating interior pro tection ................................................... 85 Deactivating the alarm .......................... 84 Function ................................................ 83 Function of interior protection ............... 85 Priming/deactivating tow-away pro tection ................................................... 84 Tow-away protection function ................ 84 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................... 211, 213 Function ............................................... 211 Setting ................................................. 213 System limitations ............................... 211 516 Index Attention assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST Authorised workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Automatic driving lights .......................... 117 Automatic engine start (ECO start/

stop function) .......................................... 147 Automatic engine stop (ECO start/

stop function) .......................................... 147 Automatic front passenger front air bag deactivation system ..................... 39, 41 Function of the automatic front passenger front airbag deactivation system ................................................... 39 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 41 Automatic front passenger front air bag deactivation system see Automatic front passenger front airbag deactivation system Automatic mirror folding function Activating/deactivating ....................... 133 Automatic transmission Battery DIRECT SELECT lever ........................... 150 Drive program display .......................... 149 Drive programs .................................... 149 DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 149 Engaging drive position ....................... 152 Engaging reverse gear ......................... 152 Kickdown ............................................. 153 Manual gearshifting ............................. 152 Selecting park position ........................ 152 Shifting to neutral ................................ 152 Steering wheel gearshift paddles ........ 152 Transmission position display .............. 150 Transmission positions ........................ 150 Axle load Permissible .......................................... 431 Trailer operation .................................. 442 B Bag hook .................................................. 106 Ball neck Folding in/out ..................................... 221 BAS (Brake Assist System) ..................... 169 Charging (Remote Online) .................... 144 Key ........................................................ 66 Battery (vehicle) Charging .............................................. 397 Notes .................................................. 395 Starting assistance .............................. 397 Belt see Seat belt Bicycle rack Trailer operation .................................. 224 Blind Spot Assist ...................................... 216 Activating/deactivating ....................... 219 Function ............................................... 216 System limitations ............................... 216 Blower see Climate control BlueTEC see AdBlue Bluetooth Activating/deactivating ....................... 283 Setting up an Internet connection ....... 353 Settings ............................................... 283 Index 517 Boot lid see Tailgate Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Notes .................................................. 438 Brake force distribution EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu tion) ..................................................... 173 Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 169 Active Brake Assist .............................. 174 Adaptive brake lights ........................... 178 BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 169 Driving tips .......................................... 145 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu tion) ..................................................... 173 HOLD function ..................................... 194 Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads) .................................................. 145 New/replaced brake linings/brake discs .................................................... 145 Running-in notes .................................. 145 Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System) Breakdown C Call list Assistance overview .............................. 16 Tow-starting ........................................ 404 Towing away ........................................ 401 Transporting the vehicle ...................... 403 Wheel change ...................................... 422 Breakdown see Flat tyre Burmester surround sound system ..... 372 Adjusting the balance/fader ................ 373 Adjusting the sound focus ................... 373 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings ................................................ 372 Automatic volume adjustment ............. 373 Calling up the sound menu .................. 372 Information .......................................... 372 Switching the surround sound on/off

............................................................. 373 Buttons Steering wheel .................................... 228 Car wash Making a call ............................... 338, 339 Options in the call list .......................... 338 Overview ............................................. 338 Calling up the sound menu Burmester surround sound system .... 372 Calls .......................................................... 333 Accepting ............................................ 333 Activating functions during a call ........ 333 Calls with several participants ............. 334 Declining ............................................. 333 Ending a call ........................................ 333 Incoming call during an existing call .... 334 Making ................................................ 333 Camera see 360 Camera see Reversing camera Car key see Key see Care Car wash (care) ........................................ 381 518 Index Car-to-X-Communication Displaying hazard warnings ................. 318 Overview .............................................. 317 Sending hazard warnings ..................... 318 Care .......................................................... 386 Car wash ............................................. 381 Carpet ................................................. 386 Display ................................................ 386 EASY-PACK boot box ........................... 386 Exhaust pipes ...................................... 384 Exterior lighting ................................... 384 High-pressure cleaner ......................... 381 Matt finish ........................................... 383 Paintwork ............................................ 383 Plastic trim .......................................... 386 Real wood/trim elements ................... 386 Reversing camera/360 Camera ........ 384 Roof lining ........................................... 386 Seat belt .............................................. 386 Seat cover ........................................... 386 Sensors ............................................... 384 Trailer tow hitch ................................... 384 Washing by hand ................................. 382 Wheels/rims ....................................... 384 Windows .............................................. 384 Wiper blades ....................................... 384 Carpet (Care) ........................................... 386 Changing bulbs ........................................ 125 Dipped beam ....................................... 127 Fitting/removing cover (front wheel arch) .................................................... 126 Main beam ........................................... 127 Notes ................................................... 125 Overview ............................................. 126 Reversing lights ................................... 127 Turn signal lights (rear) ........................ 127 Changing hub caps ................................. 422 Changing the lights Driving abroad (symmetrical dipped beam) ................................................... 116 Channel tracking Charging Setting ................................................. 371 DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL .................. 195 Child safety lock Child seat Rear side windows ................................. 62 Attaching (notes) ................................... 53 Front passenger seat (notes) ................. 51 Front passenger seat (rearward-

facing/forward-facing) .......................... 52 Front passenger seat (without airbag shutoff) .................................................. 52 ISOFIX/i-Size (fitting) ............................ 49 Notes ..................................................... 45 Recommendations for child restraint systems ................................................. 59 Seats suitable for belt-secured child restraint systems ................................... 54 Seats suitable for iSize child restraint systems ................................... 58 Seats suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems ................................... 56 Top Tether .............................................. 50 Battery (vehicle) .................................. 397 Mobile phone (wireless) ....................... 113 USB port .............................................. 113 Child seat Chassis Damping characteristics ...................... 195 see i-Size child seat securing system see ISOFIX child seat securing system Child-safety lock Children Rear door ............................................... 61 Restraint systems .................................. 45 Chock ........................................................ 421 Storage location .................................. 421 Cigarette lighter Front centre console ............................ 111 City lighting .............................................. 120 Cleaning see Care Climate control ........................................ 135 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel) ....................... 136 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (multimedia system) .............. 136 Activating/deactivating the synchro nisation function (control panel) .......... 137 Activating/deactivating the synchro nisation function (multimedia sys tem) ..................................................... 137 Air distribution settings ....................... 137 Air-recirculation mode ......................... 138 Automatic control ................................ 136 Demisting the windscreen ................... 135 Demisting windows .............................. 137 Front air vents ..................................... 138 Rear air vents ...................................... 139 Residual heat ....................................... 138 Setting (multimedia system) ................ 136 Setting the air distribution ................... 135 Setting the airflow ............................... 135 Setting the temperature ...................... 135 Switching on/off ................................. 136 Switching the rear window heater on/off ................................................. 135 THERMATIC control panel .................... 135 THERMOTRONIC control panel ............ 135 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening) ................................................ 76 Cockpit ......................................................... 6 Overview ................................................. 6 Combination switch see Turn signal light Compass .................................................. 325 Computer On-board computer ............................. 229 Index 519 Connection status Displaying ............................................ 355 Overview ............................................. 355 Contacts ................................................... 334 Calling up ............................................ 335 Deleting ............................................... 337 Deleting favourites .............................. 337 Downloading (from mobile phone) ...... 335 Importing ............................................ 336 Information .......................................... 334 Making a call ....................................... 336 Name format ....................................... 335 Options ................................................ 336 Saving a contact as a favourite ............ 337 Selecting options for suggestions ........ 337 Storing ................................................ 336 Convenience closing ................................. 77 Convenience opening ................................ 76 Coolant (engine) Level check ......................................... 379 Notes .................................................. 438 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ................................................... 29 520 Index Cornering light ......................................... 120 Cross Traffic Alert .................................... 210 Crosswind Assist Function/notes .................................... 173 Cruise control Buttons ................................................ 181 Calling up a speed ............................... 181 Requirements: ..................................... 181 Selecting .............................................. 181 Setting a speed .................................... 181 Storing a speed .................................... 181 Switching off ........................................ 181 Switching on ........................................ 181 Cruise control: ......................................... 179 Function .............................................. 179 System limitations ............................... 179 Cup holder ............................................... 108 Fitting/removing (centre console) ....... 108 Rear ..................................................... 110 D Damage detection (parked vehicle) ....... 167 Dashboard see Cockpit Dashboard lighting see Instrument lighting Data acquisition Vehicle ................................................... 27 Data import/export Function/notes ................................... 286 Importing/exporting ........................... 286 Date Setting the time and date automati cally ..................................................... 282 Deactivating the alarm (ATA) .................... 84 Declaration of conformity Electromagnetic compatibility ............... 23 Jack ....................................................... 23 TIREFIT kit ............................................. 24 Wireless vehicle components ................ 23 Designs Menu (on-board computer) .................. 239 Destination ............................................... 312 Editing intermediate destinations ........ 303 Editing the previous destinations ......... 312 External ............................................... 312 Saving (current vehicle position) .......... 312 Saving as global favourite .................... 312 Destination entry ............................ 293, 296 Entering a POI or address .................... 293 Entering an intermediate destination .. 303 Entering geo-coordinates .................... 298 Notes .................................................. 292 Selecting a contact ............................. 298 Selecting a POI .................................... 296 Selecting from favourites .................... 299 Selecting from the map ....................... 298 Selecting previous destinations ........... 296 Detecting inattentiveness see ATTENTION ASSIST Diagnostics connection ............................ 25 Diesel Low outside temperatures ................... 435 Notes .................................................. 435 Digital Car Key sticker Locking the vehicle ................................ 69 Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 69 Digital Owner's Manual ............................. 18 Digital speedometer ............................... 233 Digital Vehicle Key sticker Starting the vehicle ............................. 142 Dinghy towing see Tow-bar system Dipped beam Activating/deactivating ........................ 116 Changing bulbs .................................... 127 Setting ................................................. 123 Setting for abroad ................................ 116 DIRECT SELECT lever ............................... 150 Engaging drive position ....................... 152 Engaging park position automatically .. 152 Engaging reverse gear ......................... 152 Function .............................................. 150 Selecting park position ........................ 152 Shifting to neutral ................................ 152 Display Care .................................................... 386 Display (multimedia system) Home screen ....................................... 258 Notes ................................................... 257 Operating ............................................ 260 Settings ............................................... 281 Display (on-board computer) Displays on the multifunction display .. 231 Display message ..................................... 443 Calling up (on-board computer) ........... 443 Notes .................................................. 443 Display messages

? ........................................... 473, 492 A ................................................... 493 C ................................................... 492

.................................................... 465 Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 460 Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative ..... 461 Active Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual ................................................. 461 Active bonnet malfunction See Own er's Manual .......................................... 491 Active Brake Assist Functions cur rently limited See Owner's Manual ...... 454 Index 521 Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual ........................... 454 Active Distance Assist available again ................................................... 462 Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 464 Active Distance Assist inoperative ...... 464 Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 459 Active Lane Keeping Assist inopera tive ...................................................... 459 bActive Light System inoperative .. 494 Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Own er's Manual .......................................... 461 Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 465 Active Steering Assist inopera tive ...................................................... 465 522 Index Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual ......... 496 Adaptive Highbeam Assist inopera tive ...................................................... 496 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cur rently unavailable See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 496 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inop erative ................................................. 495 AdBlue system fault Engine start not possible ................................. 475 AdBlue system fault Perf. reduced in XXX miles See Owner's Manual ................................................. 475 AdBlue system fault See Own er's Manual .......................................... 475 4Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling .............................................. 471 Air conditioning Malfunction See Owner's Manual .................................. 488 Anti-theft alarm system Malfunction ... 489 Antriebssystem Strung Anhalten Motor aus ............................................ 473 Antriebssystem Strung Werkstatt aufsuchen ............................................ 473 Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position ............................................... 486 Apply brake to select R ....................... 489 ATTENTION ASSIST inoperative ... 459 ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break! .................................................. 459 bAUTO lights inoperative ............... 495 Auxiliary battery malfunction .............. 488 Blind Spot Assist currently unavaila ble See Owner's Manual ...................... 460 Blind Spot Assist inoperative ............... 461 Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual ... 460

.................................................... 462 Change key batteries .................. 482 JCheck brake fluid level ................ 453 4Check eng. oil lev. when next refuelling ............................................. 470 jCheck trailer hitch lock ............... 485 hCheck tyre(s) ............................... 478

!Clean the fuel filter ...................... 472

?Coolant Stop vehicle Switch engine off ............................................ 467 Cruise control and Limiter inopera tive ...................................................... 466 Cruise control inoperative ................... 466 Cruise control off ................................ 465 Currently unavailable Camera dirty ..... 464 Currently unavailable Radar sensors dirty ..................................................... 463

!currently unavailable See Own er's Manual ......................................... 445 currently unavailable See Own er's Manual ......................................... 446

.................................................... 466 5Engine oil level cannot be measured ............................................ 472 4Engine oil level Reduce oil level ... 471 4Engine oil level Stop vehicle Switch engine off ................................. 470 4Engine oil pressure Stop Switch off engine ............................................ 472 6Front left malfunction Consult workshop (example) ............................ 456 Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual .................................. 457 Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual .................................. 458 Getriebe Strung Werkstatt aufsu chen .................................................... 488 Getriebe wird eingelernt Whlhebel bettigen Bremse fr XX s treten Wegrollgefahr ...................................... 488

!inoperative See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 444 inoperative See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 447 Tinoperative See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 448 GInoperative .................................. 453 bIntelligent Light System inoper ative .................................................... 494 Key not detected (white dis play message) ..................................... 482 Key not detected(red display message) ............................................. 483 bLeft dipped beam (example) ........ 494 6Left windowbag malfunction Consult workshop (example) ............... 456 Let fresh air into the vehicle interior!

Air conditioning malf. Visit workshop .. 491 Limiter inoperative .............................. 466 Limiter passive .................................... 465 bMalfunction See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 495 Index 523 Maximum speed exceeded .......... 466 Mercedes me connect Services limi ted See Owner's Manual ..................... 454 N permanently active Risk of vehicle rolling .................................................. 486 Off ............................................... 462 Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary ............................................ 486 jOperation only possible in transmission position N ....................... 489 jOperation only possible in transmission position P ....................... 490

!Parking brake See Owner's Manual ................................................ 450 Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual ................. 483 PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual ................................................ 454 hRectify tyre pressure ................... 478 524 Index Refill AdBlue Eng. start not pos sible ..................................................... 476 Refill AdBlue See Owners Man ual ....................................................... 475

!Release parking brake ................. 449 Replace air cleaner ...................... 473

,Replace key See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 482 Replace key ................................. 481 Reserve fuel level ........................ 473 6Restraint sys. malfunction Con sult workshop ...................................... 455 Reversing not poss. Consult work shop .................................................... 487 Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door open and transmission not in P ........... 486

#See Owner's Manual ................... 468 Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX mph ..... 466

#Start engine See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 468 Steering malfunction Drive carefully Visit workshop ...................... 490 Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual .... 491 Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual ....... 490

#Stop vehicle Leave engine run ning ..................................................... 469

#Stop vehicle See Owner's Man ual ....................................................... 469 bSwitch off lights .......................... 495 bSwitch on headlamps .................. 495 Teaching in transmission complete ..... 488 To shift out of P or N, depress brake and start engine .................................. 486 Top up coolant See Owners Manual ... 467 Top up washer fluid ..................... 493 Traffic Sign Assist currently unavaila ble See Owner's Manual ...................... 461 Traffic Sign Assist inoperative .............. 461 jTrailer coupling extending ......... 484 Trans. oil overheated Drive on with care ..................................................... 489 Transmission Malfunction Stop ............ 487

!Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake ................................ 448 Tyre press. monitor currently unavail able ..................................................... 479 Tyre press. monitor inoperative ........... 480 Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors ..................................... 480 Tyre pressure Check tyres ................... 477 Tyre(s) overheated ............................... 480 Tyre(s) overheated Reduce speed ........ 481 dVehicle is operational Switch off the ignition before exiting .............. 487 hWarning tyre defect ..................... 479 hWheel sensor(s) missing ............. 480 Without changing gear, consult work shop .................................................... 487 Display on the windscreen see Head-up display Distance control Drive programs see DYNAMIC SELECT Driving lights see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Automatic driving lights Distance recorder see Trip distance DISTRONIC Door see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Additional door lock .............................. 68 Locking (emergency key) ....................... 72 Opening (from the inside) ...................... 69 Unlocking (emergency key) .................... 72 Unlocking (from the inside) ................... 69 Door control panel ..................................... 14 Drawbar see Tow-bar system Drinks holder see Cup holder Drive Away Assist .................................... 209 Drive position Selecting ............................................. 152 Drive program display ............................. 149 Driving safety system ............................. 168 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ........... 169 Active Brake Assist .............................. 174 Adaptive brake lights ........................... 178 BAS (Brake Assist System) .................. 169 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu tion) ..................................................... 173 ESP (Electronic Stability Program) Crosswind Assist ................................. 173 ESP (Electronic Stability Program) trailer stabilisation ............................... 173 Overview ............................................. 169 Radar sensors ...................................... 168 Responsibility ...................................... 168 STEER CONTROL ................................. 173 DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL .................. 195 Driving system Driving system see 360 Camera see Active Blind Spot Assist Index 525 see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist see Active Steering Assist see ATTENTION ASSIST see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control:

see Driving safety system see HOLD function see Limiter see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Reversing camera see Speed Limit Assist see Traffic Sign Assist Driving tips Driving abroad (changing the lights) ..... 116 General driving tips ............................. 145 Running-in notes .................................. 145 Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL Chassis ................................................ 195 526 Index Dynamic handling control system see ESP (Electronic Stability Program) DYNAMIC SELECT .................................... 149 Configuring drive program I ................. 150 Displaying engine data ........................ 150 Displaying vehicle data ........................ 150 Drive program display .......................... 149 Drive programs .................................... 149 Function .............................................. 149 Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch)

............................................................. 149 Selecting the drive program ................ 149 E E10 ............................................................ 434 Easy entry feature Function/notes ..................................... 96 Setting ................................................... 97 Easy exit feature Function/notes ..................................... 96 Setting ................................................... 97 EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu tion) Function/notes .................................... 173 ECO display Function .............................................. 148 Resetting ............................................. 234 ECO start/stop function ................. 147, 148 Automatic engine start ........................ 147 Automatic engine stop ......................... 147 Operation ............................................. 147 Switching off/on ................................. 148 Electric parking brake ............. 165, 166, 167 Applying automatically ........................ 165 Applying or releasing manually ............ 166 Emergency braking .............................. 167 Releasing automatically ....................... 166 Electrical fuses see Fuses Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity ...................... 23 Electronic Stability Program see ESP (Electronic Stability Program) Electronics ............................................... 429 Emergency Assistance overview .............................. 16 Fire extinguisher .................................. 389 First-aid kit (soft sided) ....................... 389 Removing the warning triangle ............ 388 Safety vest .......................................... 388 Setting up the warning triangle ........... 389 Emergency braking .................................. 167 Emergency call system see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Emergency engine start ......................... 404 Emergency key Locking a door ....................................... 72 Unlocking a door ................................... 72 Unlocking the tailgate ............................ 74 Emergency key element Inserting/removing ............................... 66 Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle ............................. 143 Emergency spare wheel ......................... 427 Notes ................................................... 427 Removing ............................................ 428 Energy consumption Key ........................................................ 65 Engine ECO start/stop function ...................... 147 Index 527 Engine number .................................... 431 Starting (Digital Vehicle Key sticker) .... 142 Starting (emergency operation mode) .................................................. 143 Starting (mobile phone) ....................... 142 Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 144 Starting (start/stop button) ................. 141 Starting assistance .............................. 397 Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 160 Engine bonnet Function (active bonnet) ...................... 375 Opening/closing .................................. 376 Resetting (active bonnet) ..................... 375 ESP Engine data Displaying ............................................ 150 Engine electronics Notes .................................................. 429 Engine number ........................................ 431 Engine oil .................................................. 378 Additives ............................................. 437 Checking the oil level using the on-

board computer ................................... 378 Filling capacity .................................... 437 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ............... 437 Quality ................................................. 437 Topping up ........................................... 378 Entering characters Function/notes ................................... 277 On the touchpad .................................. 277 Setting the keyboard ........................... 281 Using the touchscreen ........................ 279 ERA-GLONASS test mode Starting/ending .................................. 352 ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP (Electronic Stability Program) Crosswind Assist ................................. 173 Trailer stabilisation ............................... 173 ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ...... 170 Activating/deactivating ....................... 172 Function/notes ................................... 170 EU general operating permit number .... 431 Exhaust pipes (Care) ............................... 384 Exterior lighting Care .................................................... 384 Exterior lighting see Lights F Fatigue detection see ATTENTION ASSIST Fault message see Display message Favourites Adding ................................................. 271 Calling up ............................................. 271 Deleting ............................................... 272 Moving ................................................. 272 Overview .............................................. 271 Renaming ............................................. 271 Filling station search Starting an automatic filling station search ................................................. 305 Switching the automatic filling sta tion search on/off ............................... 304 Fire extinguisher ..................................... 389 First-aid kit (soft sided) .......................... 389 Flat towing see Tow-bar system Flat tyre .................................................... 390 MOExtended tyres ............................... 390 528 Index Notes .................................................. 390 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 391 Wheel change ...................................... 422 Floor mats ................................................ 115 Free software ............................................ 29 Frequencies Mobile phone ...................................... 430 Two-way radio ...................................... 430 Frequency band Selecting (on-board computer) ............ 236 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ..... 37 Front wheel arch Fitting/removing the cover .................. 126 Front wheel arch cover Fitting/removing ................................. 126 Fuel E10 ...................................................... 434 Petrol ................................................... 434 Quality (petrol) .................................... 434 Reserve fuel level ................................ 436 Sulphur content ................................... 434 Tank capacity ...................................... 436 Fuel consumption On-board computer ............................. 233 Fuelling .................................................... 434 Additives ............................................. 434 Diesel .................................................. 435 Low outside temperatures ................... 435 Quality (diesel) .................................... 435 Refuelling ............................................ 154 Function seat see Door control panel Fuse insert see Fuses Fuses ........................................................ 404 Assignment diagram ............................ 404 Before replacing a fuse ........................ 404 Fuse box in the engine compartment .. 405 Fuse box in the front-passenger foot well ...................................................... 406 Fuse box in the load compartment ...... 407 Notes .................................................. 404 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ........................... 163 Opening/closing the garage door ........ 163 Programming buttons .......................... 161 Radio equipment approval numbers .... 164 Resolving problems ............................. 162 Synchronising the rolling code ............ 162 Gearshift paddles see Steering wheel gearshift paddles Gearshift recommendation .................... 153 General operating permit number

(EU) ........................................................... 431 Genuine parts ............................................ 21 Glide mode ............................................... 154 Global search Function ............................................... 274 Overview .............................................. 274 Glove box Locking/unlocking .............................. 100 Gross weight ............................................ 431 H Handbrake see Electric parking brake Index 529 Handling characteristics (unusual) ....... 408 Hazard warning lights ............................. 119 Head restraint ........................................... 90 Front (adjusting manually) ..................... 90 Rear (adjusting) ..................................... 91 Rear (fitting/removing) ......................... 92 Head-up display ....................................... 238 Adjusting display elements (on-board computer) ............................................ 238 Adjusting the brightness (on-board computer) ............................................ 238 Function .............................................. 239 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 238 Setting the position (on-board com puter) .................................................. 238 Using the memory function ................... 97 Headlamp flasher .................................... 118 Heating see Climate control High-pressure cleaner (care) .................. 381 Hill Start Assist ........................................ 194 HOLD function ......................................... 194 Activating/deactivating ....................... 194 Function/notes .................................... 194 In Car Office Home screen (multimedia system dis play) Indicator lamp Overview ............................................. 258 see Warning/indicator lamps Selecting options of Tasks & Calls ....... 342 Hotspot Setting up (Wi-Fi) ................................. 285 I i-Size child seat securing system ............. 47 Fitting .................................................... 49 Notes ..................................................... 47 Seats suitable for attaching ................... 58 Identification plate Engine ................................................. 431 Vehicle ................................................. 431 Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 140 Ignition Ignition key see Key Immobiliser ................................................ 83 Implied warranty Vehicle .................................................. 26 Individual drive program Configuring .......................................... 150 Selecting ............................................. 149 Instrument cluster ...................................... 8 Instrument cluster see Instrument display Instrument display .................................. 227 Adjusting the lighting .......................... 232 Function/notes ................................... 227 Overview ......................................... 8, 227 Overview (standard) ................................ 8 Overview (widescreen) ............................ 8 Warning/indicator lamps .................... 496 Instrument display see Instrument cluster Instrument lighting ................................. 232 Intelligent Light System .......................... 119 Activating/deactivating ....................... 120 Active headlamps function ................... 119 530 Index Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ........... 122 City lighting ......................................... 120 Cornering light ..................................... 120 Motorway mode ................................... 120 Overview .............................................. 119 Interior lighting ........................................ 124 Ambient lighting .................................. 124 Setting ................................................. 124 Switch-off delay time ........................... 125 Interior lighting see Interior lighting see Lighting see Lights Interior protection Activating/deactivating ......................... 85 Function ................................................ 85 Intermediate destination Calculating a route with intermediate destinations ........................................ 303 Editing ................................................. 303 Entering ............................................... 303 Starting an automatic filling station search ................................................. 305 Starting the automatic service sta tion search .......................................... 305 Internet Deleting a bookmark ........................... 358 Deleting history ................................... 358 Managing bookmarks .......................... 358 Internet connection Cancelling permission ......................... 354 Connection status ............................... 355 Displaying the connection status ........ 355 Establishing ......................................... 354 Information .......................................... 352 Mobile phone details ........................... 354 Restrictions ......................................... 352 Setting access data ............................. 353 Setting up (Bluetooth) ....................... 353 Via Bluetooth ..................................... 353 Via communication module ................. 353 Via Wi-Fi .............................................. 353 Internet radio Calling up ............................................ 359 Calling up the station list (category last selected) ....................................... 361 Deleting stations .................................. 361 Logging out .......................................... 361 Overview ............................................. 360 Registering ........................................... 361 Saving stations .................................... 361 Selecting and connecting to a station

............................................................. 361 Selecting the stream ............................ 361 Setting options .................................... 361 Terms of use ........................................ 361 iPhone see Apple CarPlay ISOFIX child seat securing system .......... 47 Fitting .................................................... 49 Notes ..................................................... 47 Seats suitable for attaching ................... 56 J Jack Declaration of Conformity ..................... 23 Storage location .................................. 421 Jump-start connection ............................ 397 K Key .............................................................. 64 Battery .................................................. 66 Emergency key element ........................ 66 Energy consumption .............................. 65 Features ................................................ 64 Key ring attachment .............................. 66 Overview ............................................... 64 Panic alarm ........................................... 65 Problem ................................................. 67 Unlocking setting .................................. 65 KEYLESS-GO Locking the vehicle ................................ 70 Problem ................................................. 71 Unlocking setting .................................. 65 Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 70 Kickdown ................................................. 153 Using ................................................... 153 Knee airbag ................................................ 37 L Laden ........................................................ 105 Tie-down eyes ...................................... 105 Lamp (instrument display) see Warning/indicator lamps Lamps see Interior lighting Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist Language Notes .................................................. 286 Setting ................................................. 286 LED light Light switch see Intelligent Light System Overview .............................................. 116 Lighting .................................................... 124 Lighting see Lights Lights ................................................ 116, 124 Active headlamps function ................... 119 Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... 121 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ........... 122 Adjusting the instrument lighting ........ 232 Automatic driving lights ....................... 117 Changing bulbs .................................... 125 City lighting ......................................... 120 Combination switch ............................. 118 Cornering light ..................................... 120 Dipped beam ........................................ 116 Driving abroad ..................................... 116 Index 531 Hazard warning lamps .......................... 119 Headlamp flasher ................................. 118 Headlamp range ................................... 117 Intelligent Light System ........................ 119 Light switch ......................................... 116 Main beam ........................................... 118 Motorway mode ................................... 120 Parking lights ....................................... 116 Rear fog light ........................................ 117 Responsibility for lighting systems ....... 116 Setting the dipped beam ..................... 123 Standing lights ..................................... 116 Turn signal light .................................... 118 Limiter ...................................................... 180 Buttons ................................................ 181 Calling up a speed ............................... 181 Function .............................................. 180 Passive mode ...................................... 180 Permanent setting ............................... 182 Requirements: ..................................... 181 Selecting .............................................. 181 Setting a speed .................................... 181 Storing a speed .................................... 181 Switching off ........................................ 181 Switching on ........................................ 181 System limitations ............................... 180 Live Traffic Information 532 Index Limiting speed see Limiter LINGUATRONIC ........................................ 240 Application specific voice commands

............................................................. 242 Audible help functions ......................... 243 Entering numbers ................................ 242 Global voice commands ...................... 242 Improving speech quality ..................... 243 Language setting ................................. 242 Media player voice commands ............ 250 Message voice commands .................. 252 Multifunction steering wheel (operat ing) ...................................................... 240 Navigation voice commands ................ 245 Operable functions .............................. 242 Operating safety .................................. 240 Radio voice commands ........................ 249 Switch voice commands ...................... 243 Telephone voice controls ..................... 248 Text message voice commands ........... 252 Types of voice commands ................... 242 Vehicle voice commands ..................... 253 Voice prompting ................................... 241 Displaying subscription information ..... 314 Displaying the traffic map .................... 315 Displaying traffic incidents .................. 316 Extending a subscription ...................... 315 Registering on Mercedes me ............... 314 Showing local area messages .............. 317 Switching the traffic information dis play on ................................................. 316 Load compartment cover Fitting/removing ................................. 103 Loading Bag hook ............................................. 106 Notes ..................................................... 98 Roof rack ............................................. 107 Stowage space underneath the load compartment floor .............................. 106 Loading guidelines .................................... 98 Loads Securing ................................................ 98 Locator lighting Switching on/off ................................. 124 Locking/unlocking .................................... 73 Additional door lock .............................. 68 Digital Car Key sticker ........................... 69 KEYLESS-GO .......................................... 70 Mobile phone ........................................ 69 Smartphone .......................................... 69 Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside .............................................. 69 Lubricant additives see Additives Luggage Securing ................................................ 98 Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way) Lumbar support (4-way) ........................... 90 M Main beam Activating/deactivating ....................... 118 Adaptive Highbeam Assist ................... 121 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ........... 122 Changing bulbs .................................... 127 Maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction Restraint system .................................... 31 Map ................................................... 315, 320 Avoiding an area .................................. 323 Avoiding an area (overview) ................. 322 Changing an area ................................ 323 Deleting an area .................................. 323 Displaying Qibla .................................. 325 Displaying the compass ....................... 325 Displaying the map version ................. 322 Displaying the next intersecting street ................................................... 322 Displaying the satellite map ................ 325 Displaying the traffic map .................... 315 Displaying weather information ........... 326 Map data ............................................. 324 Moving ................................................ 320 Selecting POI symbols ......................... 321 Selecting text information ................... 322 Selecting the map orientation ............. 321 Setting the map scale .......................... 320 Setting the map scale automatically .... 325 Showing in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster ..................... 326 Showing the range .............................. 325 Switching motorway information on/off ................................................. 322 Updating .............................................. 324 Massage programs Selecting the front seats ....................... 92 Matt finish (cleaning instructions) ........ 383 Maximum gross vehicle weight ............. 431 Maximum speed see Limiter MBUX multimedia system ...................... 256 Overview ............................................. 256 Mecca ....................................................... 325 Media Menu (on-board computer) .................. 237 Media mode Adding a favourite song ....................... 366 Connecting Bluetooth audio equip ment .................................................... 365 Connecting USB devices ..................... 365 Controlling media playback ................. 366 Copyright and trademarks ................... 362 Information about media search .......... 367 Making video settings ......................... 368 Index 533 Overview of the media menu ............... 364 Playing back similar music tracks ........ 366 Removing a favourite song .................. 366 Searching for a music track accord ing to mood ......................................... 368 Starting media playback ...................... 366 Starting the media search ................... 367 Supported format and data storage media ................................................... 361 Using the keyword search ................... 368 Media playback Media source Memory function Operating (on-board computer) ........... 237 Dialling (on-board computer) ............... 237 Head-up display Calling up stored settings .................................................. 97 Head-up display Storing settings ......... 97 Operating .............................................. 97 Outside mirror Calling up stored settings .................................................. 97 Outside mirror Storing settings ........... 97 Seat Calling up stored settings ........... 97 Seat Storing settings ........................... 97 534 Index Menu (on-board computer) Assistant display ................................. 233 Designs ............................................... 239 Head-up display ................................... 238 Media .................................................. 237 Navigation ........................................... 235 Overview ............................................. 229 Radio ................................................... 236 Service ................................................ 232 Telephone ............................................ 237 Trip ...................................................... 233 Mercedes me Calling up services .............................. 349 Calling up your user account ............... 349 Deleting a connection ......................... 349 Information .......................................... 348 Mercedes me connect Accident management ......................... 347 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre ................................................. 346 Consenting to data transfer ................. 348 Information .......................................... 345 Service call with the me button ........... 347 Service message ................................. 347 Transferred data .................................. 348 Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys tem ........................................................... 349 Automatic emergency call ................... 350 Information .......................................... 349 Manual emergency call ........................ 351 Overview ............................................. 349 Self-diagnosis ...................................... 352 Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode ................................................... 352 Transferred data .................................. 351 Mercedes-Benz Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Message (multifunction display) see Display message Message memory .................................... 443 Messages ................................................. 339 Calling a message sender .................... 340 Composing .......................................... 339 Configuring the displayed text mes sages ................................................... 339 Deleting ............................................... 341 Forwarding .......................................... 340 Overview ............................................. 339 Read-aloud function ............................ 339 Reading ............................................... 339 Replying .............................................. 340 Sending ............................................... 339 Using a number/URL .......................... 340 Using templates .................................. 340 Mirrors see Outside mirrors Mobile phone Cancelling permission for Internet connection .......................................... 354 Damage detection (parked vehicle) ...... 167 Frequencies ......................................... 430 Locking the vehicle ................................ 69 Starting the vehicle ............................. 142 Transmission output (maximum) ......... 430 Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 69 Wireless charging ................................. 114 Mobile phone see Android Auto see Apple CarPlay see Telephone Mobile phone voice recognition Starting ............................................... 333 Stopping .............................................. 333 Multimedia system .................................. 281 Navigation announcements Model series ............................................ 431 MOExtended tyres .................................. 390 Moods Calling up ............................................ 267 Creating ............................................... 267 Deleting ............................................... 268 Displaying information (DIBA) .............. 269 Modifying ............................................ 268 Moving ................................................ 268 Overview ............................................. 267 Motorway mode ....................................... 120 MULTIBEAM LED see Intelligent Light System Multifunction display Setting ................................................. 230 Multifunction display (on-board com puter) ........................................................ 231 Multifunction steering wheel Overview of buttons ............................ 228 Multifunction steering wheel see Steering wheel Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... 168 Adjusting the volume ........................... 276 Central control elements ..................... 259 Configuring display settings ................ 281 Main functions .................................... 263 Restoring the factory settings ............. 289 Switching the sound on/off ................. 275 Multimedia system see MBUX multimedia system N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) .................. 235 Showing/hiding the menu ................... 292 Switching on ........................................ 291 Updating the map data ........................ 324 Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC) ..... 245 Navigation see Destination see Destination entry see Route see Route guidance see Traffic information Index 535 Activating/deactivating ....................... 310 Adjusting the volume ........................... 310 Repeating ............................................. 311 Switching audio fadeout on/off ........... 310 Switching on/off during a phone call .. 310 Navigation messages On-board computer ............................. 235 Near Field Communication (NFC) .......... 332 Connecting the mobile phone to the multimedia system .............................. 332 Locking the vehicle (digital vehicle key sticker) ............................................ 69 Locking the vehicle (mobile phone) ....... 69 Starting the vehicle (Digital Vehicle Key sticker) .......................................... 142 Starting the vehicle (mobile phone) ..... 142 Switching mobile phones .................... 332 Unlocking the vehicle (digital vehicle key sticker) ............................................ 69 Unlocking the vehicle (mobile phone) .... 69 Neutral Selecting ............................................. 152 536 Index NFC see Near Field Communication (NFC) Notifications Centre Calling up a notification ....................... 273 Editing a notification ............................ 274 Global search ....................................... 274 Notification types ................................ 272 Overview ............................................. 272 Selecting actions for a notification ...... 273 Using the global search ....................... 274 Notifications Centre see Notifications types Notifications types .................................. 272 O Occupant safety Pets in the vehicle ................................. 62 Occupant safety see Airbag see Automatic front passenger front airbag deactivation system see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection) see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system see Seat belt Odometer see Total distance Oil see Engine oil On-board computer Assistant display menu ........................ 233 Displaying the service due date ........... 374 Head-up Display menu ........................ 238 Media menu ........................................ 237 Menu designs ...................................... 239 Menu overview .................................... 229 Multifunction display ........................... 231 Navigation menu ................................. 235 Operating ............................................ 229 Radio menu ......................................... 236 Service menu ...................................... 232 Telephone menu .................................. 237 Trip menu ............................................ 233 On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection On-board electronics Engine electronics ............................... 429 Notes .................................................. 429 Two-way radios .................................... 429 Open-source software .............................. 29 Operating fluids AdBlue ............................................... 436 Brake fluid ........................................... 438 Coolant (engine) .................................. 438 Fuel (petrol) ......................................... 434 Notes .................................................. 433 Operating safety Declaration of Conformity (electro magnetic compatibility) ......................... 23 Declaration of conformity (jack) ............ 23 Declaration of conformity (TIREFIT kit) .. 24 Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components) ............................. 23 Information ............................................ 22 Operating system On-board computer ............................. 229 Outside mirrors ................................ 131, 132 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) .............. 132 Automatic mirror folding function ........ 133 Folding in/out ...................................... 131 Parking position ................................... 132 Setting ................................................. 131 Using the memory function ................... 97 Parking (navigation service) Selecting parking options .................... 326 Showing a parking option on the map ..................................................... 327 Overhead control panel Overview ................................................ 12 see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking aid Parking Assist Owner's Manual Vehicle equipment ................................. 22 Owner's Manual (digital) ........................... 18 P Paint code ................................................ 431 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ......... 383 Panic alarm ................................................ 65 Activating/deactivating ......................... 65 Panoramic sliding sunroof see Sliding sunroof Park position Selecting ............................................. 152 Selecting automatically ....................... 152 Parking see Electric parking brake Manoeuvring assistance ...................... 211 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ................... 195 Activating ............................................ 198 Adjusting warning tones ...................... 198 Deactivating ........................................ 198 Function .............................................. 195 Side impact protection ........................ 197 System limitations ............................... 195 Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist Parking brake see Electric parking brake Parking lights ........................................... 116 Parking position Outside mirrors ................................... 132 see Contacts PIN protection Index 537 Storing the position of the passenger outside mirror using reverse gear ........ 133 Parking up ................................................ 167 Partition net Attaching ............................................. 103 PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger front airbag deactivation system Pedestrian protection see Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Period out of use Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... 168 Permissible axle load .............................. 431 Permitted towing methods ..................... 400 Petrol ........................................................ 434 Pets in the vehicle ..................................... 62 Phone book Activating/deactivating ....................... 287 Plastic trim (Care) ................................... 386 538 Index POI symbols Power supply Power windows see Side windows Custom ................................................ 321 Switching on (Start/Stop button) ........ 140 PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection) ................................................. 44 Function ................................................ 44 PRE-SAFE Sound ................................. 44 Reversing measures .............................. 44 PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occu pant protection plus) ................................ 44 Function ................................................ 44 Reversing measures .............................. 44 Preventative occupant protection sys tem see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection) Previous destinations Selecting ............................................. 296 Profile Creating a new profile ......................... 265 Maximum number of profiles .............. 264 Notes ................................................... 264 Overview ............................................. 264 Selecting a profile ............................... 266 Selecting profile options ..................... 265 Showing the profile selection when entering ............................................... 266 Synchronising ...................................... 266 Profile see User profile Programs see DYNAMIC SELECT Protection of the environment Notes ..................................................... 20 Take-back of end-of-life vehicles ............ 20 Q Qibla ......................................................... 325 QR code Rescue card .......................................... 26 Qualified specialist workshop ................. 25 R Radar sensors .......................................... 168 Radio Activating/deactivating radio text ....... 371 Calling up a slide show ........................ 371 Calling up the station list ..................... 370 Deleting stations ................................. 370 Displaying information ......................... 371 Displaying radio text ............................ 371 Editing station presets ......................... 370 Entering a frequency directly ............... 370 Frequency fix ....................................... 371 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 236 Moving stations ................................... 370 Overview ............................................. 369 Searching for stations ......................... 370 Setting a station .................................. 370 Setting a voice tag ............................... 371 Setting station tracking ....................... 371 Setting the frequency band ................. 370 Setting the traffic information service volume increase ...................... 371 Storing radio stations .......................... 370 Switching on ....................................... 368 Rear window wipers Replacing the vehicle battery Activating/deactivating ....................... 128 see 12 V battery Switching traffic announcements on/off .................................................. 371 Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC) ..... 249 Radio stations Selecting (on-board computer) ............ 236 Recycling Rain-closing feature Sliding sunroof ....................................... 81 Range Displaying ............................................ 233 Rear-view mirror see Outside mirrors Reading light see Interior lighting Real wood (Care) ..................................... 386 Rear door (child safety lock) ..................... 61 Rear fog light ............................................ 117 Rear seat see Seat Rear seat belt Status display ........................................ 36 Rear seat belt status display .................... 36 Rear window Changing the wiper blade .................... 130 Rear window heater ................................ 135 see Take-back of end-of-life vehicles Reducing agent see AdBlue Refuel Refuelling Registration Remote Online Refuelling the vehicle .......................... 154 Topping up AdBlue ............................. 158 Vehicle .................................................. 26 Charging the battery ............................ 144 Cooling or heating the vehicle inte rior ...................................................... 144 Starting the vehicle ............................. 144 Replacing a bulb see Changing bulbs Replacing the battery (vehicle) see 12 V battery Index 539 Rescue card ............................................... 26 Reserve Fuel ..................................................... 436 Reset function (multimedia system) ..... 289 Residual heat ........................................... 138 Restoring (factory settings) see Reset function (multimedia system) Restraint system ....................................... 30 Children ................................................. 45 Function in an accident ......................... 31 Functionality .......................................... 31 Malfunction ........................................... 31 Protection .............................................. 30 Reduced protection ............................... 30 Self-test ................................................. 31 Warning lamp ......................................... 31 Reverse gear Selecting ............................................. 152 Reversing camera .................................... 199 Care .................................................... 384 Function .............................................. 199 540 Index Opening the camera cover (360 Camera) .............................................. 205 Setting as a favourite (360 Camera)

............................................................. 205 Switching automatic operation on/off (360 Camera) ......................... 205 Reversing lights (changing bulbs) .......... 127 Rims (Care) .............................................. 384 Roll away protection see HOLD function Roof lining (care) ..................................... 386 Roof load .................................................. 440 Roof rack .................................................. 107 Route ................................................ 299, 304 Accepting a detour recommendation after a prompt ...................................... 317 Activating a commuter route ............... 304 Calculating .......................................... 299 Displaying destination information ...... 302 Displaying the route list ....................... 304 Editing a stored route .......................... 306 External ............................................... 312 Recording a route ................................ 306 Saving a recorded route ...................... 306 Selecting a type .................................. 300 Selecting an alternative route ............. 304 Selecting notifications ......................... 302 Selecting options ................................. 301 Showing a stored route on the map .... 305 Starting a saved route ......................... 306 Starting the automatic service sta tion search .......................................... 305 Switching the automatic filling sta tion search on/off ............................... 304 With intermediate destinations ........... 303 Route guidance ........................................ 307 Cancelling ............................................ 311 Changing direction .............................. 307 Destination reached ............................. 310 From an off-road location ..................... 311 Lane recommendations ....................... 309 Motorway information ......................... 309 Notes ................................................... 307 Off-road ............................................... 311 To an off-road destination .................... 311 Route guidance with augmented real ity Activating ............................................. 318 Displaying street names and house numbers .............................................. 319 Selecting a POI .................................... 319 Showing traffic lights ........................... 319 Switching on display of POIs ................ 318 Route-based speed adaptation ............... 187 Route-based speed adjustment Displays in the Instrument Display ...... 192 Run-flat characteristics MOExtended tyres ............................... 390 Running-in notes ..................................... 145 S Safety systems see Driving safety system Safety vest ............................................... 388 Satellite map ........................................... 325 Seat ........................................................... 101 4-way lumbar support ........................... 90 Adjusting (electrically) ........................... 90 Adjusting (Seat Comfort) ....................... 89 adjustment (without Seat Comfort Package) ................................................ 87 Index 541 Backrest (rear) locking ........................ 102 Configuring the settings ........................ 92 Correct driver's seat position ................ 86 Folding the backrest (rear) back .......... 102 Folding the backrest (rear) forwards .... 101 Resetting the settings ............................ 92 Selecting a massage program ............... 92 Setting options ...................................... 14 Using the memory function ................... 97 Seat see Head restraint Seat belt ............................................... 32, 36 Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment ............................................ 36 Care .................................................... 386 Fastening ............................................... 35 Protection .............................................. 32 Rear seat belt status display ................. 36 Reduced protection ............................... 33 Releasing ............................................... 36 Seat belt adjustment (function) ............. 35 Warning lamp ........................................ 36 Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating ......................... 36 Function ................................................ 35 Seat belt tensioners Service Activation .............................................. 31 see ASSYST PLUS Seat belt warning see Seat belt Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Seat cover (Care) ..................................... 386 Seat heater Service interval display see ASSYST PLUS Activating/deactivating ......................... 93 Service product Activating/deactivating ......................... 94 Service products Seat ventilation Selecting a gear see Shifting gears Selecting a POI see Destination entry Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever Self-test Automatic front passenger front air bag deactivation system ........................ 41 Sensors (Care) ......................................... 384 Service Menu (on-board computer) .................. 232 Engine oil ............................................. 437 Additives (fuel) .................................... 434 Fuel (diesel) ......................................... 435 Windscreen washer fluid ..................... 439 Setting a speed see Cruise control:

Setting the date format .......................... 282 Setting the distance unit ........................ 286 Setting the map scale see Map Shifting gears .......................................... 152 Gearshift recommendation .................. 153 Manual ................................................ 152 Short messages see Messages 542 Index Side impact airbag .................................... 37 Side impact protection ............................ 197 Side windows ............................................. 75 Child safety lock in the rear ................... 62 Closing .................................................. 75 Closing using the key ............................. 77 Convenience closing .............................. 76 Convenience opening ............................ 76 Opening ................................................. 75 Opening with the key ............................. 76 Problem ................................................. 77 Sliding sunroof .......................................... 78 Automatic features ................................ 81 Closing .................................................. 78 Closing using the key ............................. 77 Opening ................................................. 78 Opening with the key ............................. 76 Problem ................................................. 82 Rain-closing feature ............................... 81 Smartphone Locking the vehicle ................................ 69 Unlocking the vehicle ............................ 69 Smartphone see Android Auto see Apple CarPlay see Telephone Spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel Snow chains ............................................ 409 Socket (12 V) ............................................ 111 Front centre console ............................ 111 Socket (230 V) .......................................... 112 Rear passenger compartment .............. 112 Spectacles compartment ....................... 100 Speech dialogue system see LINGUATRONIC Speed Limit Assist ................................... 213 Function/notes .................................... 213 Software update Important system updates .................. 289 Information .......................................... 288 Performing .......................................... 288 PRE-SAFE Sound ................................. 44 wheels and tyres ................................. 408 Sound Sound see Burmester surround sound system see Tone settings Sound settings Adjusting the balance/fader ................ 372 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings ................................................ 372 Automatic volume adjustment ............. 372 Speed limitation for winter tyres Setting ................................................. 182 Speedometer Standby mode Digital .................................................. 233 Activating/deactivating ....................... 168 Function ............................................... 167 Standing lights ......................................... 116 Start/stop button Starting the vehicle .............................. 141 Switching off the vehicle ..................... 160 Switching on the power supply or ignition ................................................ 140 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Index 543 Starting assistance see Jump-start connection Starting the engine see Vehicle Starting-off aid see Hill Start Assist Station Deleting ............................................... 370 Entering a frequency directly ............... 370 Frequency fix ....................................... 371 Moving ................................................ 370 Searching ............................................ 370 Setting ................................................. 370 Storing ................................................. 370 Calling up ............................................ 370 Editing ................................................. 370 Station list Station presets STEER CONTROL Function/notes .................................... 173 Steering wheel ........................................ 228 Adjusting (manually) .............................. 94 Buttons ................................................ 228 Steering wheel heater ........................... 95 Steering wheel gearshift paddles .......... 152 Steering wheel heater Activating/deactivating ......................... 95 Renaming ............................................ 270 Sulphur content ...................................... 434 Sun visor Operating ............................................ 134 Stowage areas see Laden see Stowage compartment Surround View see 360 Camera Switch-off delay time Stowage compartment ............................. 99 Armrest ................................................. 99 Centre console ...................................... 99 Door ...................................................... 99 Glove box .............................................. 99 Spectacles compartment .................... 100 Stowage compartments see Laden see Stowage compartment Stowage space underneath the load compartment floor .................................. 106 Suggestions Calling up ............................................ 269 Configuring .......................................... 269 Deleting ............................................... 270 Overview ............................................. 269 Exterior ................................................ 123 Interior ................................................. 125 Switching the surround sound on/off Burmester surround sound system .... 373 Synchronisation function Activating/deactivating (multimedia system) ................................................ 137 Switching on/off (control panel) ......... 137 System settings Language ............................................. 286 Notes on language selection ............... 286 Reset function (multimedia system) .... 289 Setting the distance unit ..................... 286 Software update .................................. 288 System settings see Multimedia system 544 Index T Tailgate ....................................................... 73 Closing ................................................... 74 Opening ................................................. 73 Opening dimensions ............................ 440 Unlocking (emergency key) .................... 74 Tailgate see Locking/unlocking Take-back of end-of-life vehicles .............. 20 Protection of the environment ............... 20 Tank capacity AdBlue ............................................... 437 Fuel ..................................................... 436 Reserve (fuel) ...................................... 436 Technical data Axle load (trailer operation) ................. 442 Fastening point (trailer hitch) ............... 441 Information .......................................... 429 Mounting dimensions (trailer hitch) ..... 441 Notes (trailer hitch) .............................. 441 Overhang dimension (trailer hitch) ....... 441 Tongue weight ..................................... 442 Towing weight (towing a trailer) ........... 441 Tyre pressure monitoring system ......... 413 Vehicle identification plate .................. 431 Telephone ........................................ 237, 328 Activating functions during a call ........ 333 Calls with several participants ............. 334 Changing a function ............................. 331 Connecting a mobile phone (Near Field Communication (NFC)) ............... 332 Connecting a mobile phone (Pass key) ..................................................... 330 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing) .................................... 330 Disconnecting a mobile phone ............ 331 Importing contacts .............................. 336 Incoming call during an existing call .... 334 Information .......................................... 330 Interchanging mobile phones .............. 331 Locking the vehicle (mobile phone) ....... 69 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 237 Mobile phone voice recognition .......... 333 Notes .................................................. 329 Operating modes ................................. 329 Reception and transmission volume .... 332 Ringtone volume ................................. 332 Starting the vehicle (mobile phone) ..... 142 Switching mobile phones (Near Field Communication (NFC)) ........................ 332 Telephone menu overview ................... 328 Telephone operation ............................ 333 Unlocking the vehicle (mobile phone) .... 69 Using Near Field Communication

(NFC) ................................................... 332 Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC) ..... 248 Wireless charging (mobile phone) ........ 114 Dialling (on-board computer) ............... 237 Telephone number Telephone operation see Calls Telephony operating modes Bluetooth Telephony .......................... 329 Business telephony ............................. 329 Temperature ............................................ 135 Text messages Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC) ..... 252 Text messages see Messages Through-loading feature see Seat Tie-down eyes .......................................... 105 Time Touchpad Manual time setting ............................. 282 Setting the time and date automati cally ..................................................... 282 Setting the time zone .......................... 282 Setting the time/date format .............. 282 TIREFIT kit Declaration of conformity ...................... 24 Using ................................................... 391 Tone settings ............................................ 371 Calling up the sound menu .................. 372 Information .......................................... 371 Tongue weight ......................................... 442 Top Tether .................................................. 50 Total distance .......................................... 233 Displaying ............................................ 233 Touch Control On-board computer ............................. 229 Operating ............................................ 259 Setting acoustic operating feedback ... 260 Setting the sensitivity .......................... 260 Activating/deactivating haptic oper ating feedback ..................................... 262 Operating ............................................. 261 Reading the handwriting recognition aloud ................................................... 262 Selecting a station and track ............... 262 Setting acoustic operating feedback ... 262 Setting the sensitivity .......................... 262 Touchscreen Entering characters ............................. 279 Touchscreen (multimedia system dis play) Operating ............................................ 260 Tow-away protection Activating/deactivating ......................... 84 Function ................................................ 84 Tow-bar system ....................................... 226 Tow-starting ............................................. 404 Towing away ............................................. 401 Towing eye Installing .............................................. 404 Storage location .................................. 403 Index 545 Towing methods ...................................... 400 Traffic announcements Activating/deactivating ....................... 371 Traffic information ................................... 313 Displaying the traffic map .................... 315 Displaying traffic incidents .................. 316 Live Traffic Information ........................ 314 Overview .............................................. 313 Traffic information service volume increase Setting ................................................. 371 Traffic map see Map Traffic Sign Assist .................................... 214 Function/notes .................................... 214 Setting ................................................. 216 System limitations ............................... 214 Trailer hitch Axle load ............................................. 442 Bicycle rack ......................................... 224 Fastening point .................................... 441 Folding the ball neck in/out ................ 221 General notes ...................................... 441 Mounting dimensions .......................... 441 546 Index Notes ................................................... 221 Overhang dimension ............................ 441 Power socket ....................................... 223 Tongue weight ..................................... 442 Trip Trip computer Trailer operation Active Blind Spot Assist ....................... 217 Bicycle rack ......................................... 224 Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer ........ 223 Folding the ball neck in/out ................ 221 Notes ................................................... 221 Power socket ....................................... 223 Trailer stabilisation Trailer tow hitch Function/notes .................................... 173 Menu (on-board computer) .................. 233 Displaying ............................................ 233 Resetting ............................................. 234 Trip distance ............................................ 233 Displaying ............................................ 233 Resetting ............................................. 234 Trip meter see Trip distance Turn signal indicator see Turn signal light Turn signal light ....................................... 118 Activating/deactivating ....................... 118 Care .................................................... 384 Towing weight ...................................... 441 Turn signal lights Transferred vehicle data Android Auto ....................................... 345 Apple CarPlay ................................... 345 Transmission position display ................ 150 Transporting Vehicle ................................................ 403 Trim element (Care) ................................ 386 Changing bulbs (rear) .......................... 127 Two-way radios Frequencies ......................................... 430 Notes on installation ........................... 429 Transmission output (maximum) ......... 430 Tyre pressure Checking (tyre pressure monitoring system) ................................................ 412 Notes .................................................. 409 Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system .................................... 417 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor ing system ............................................ 412 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 391 Tyre pressure loss warning system

(function) ............................................. 417 Tyre pressure monitoring system

(function) .............................................. 411 Tyre pressure table .............................. 410 Tyre pressure loss warning system Function ............................................... 417 Restarting ............................................ 417 Tyre pressure monitor Checking the tyre pressures ................ 412 Checking the tyre temperature ............ 412 Function ............................................... 411 Tyre pressure monitoring system Restarting ............................................ 412 Technical data ...................................... 413 Tyre pressure table .................................. 410 Tyre temperature Checking (tyre pressure monitoring system) ................................................ 412 Tyre pressure monitoring system

(function) .............................................. 411 Tyre tread ................................................. 408 Tyre-change tool kit Overview .............................................. 421 Tyres Changing hub caps .............................. 422 Checking ............................................. 408 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pressure monitoring system) ............... 412 Fitting .................................................. 425 Flat tyre ............................................... 390 MOExtended tyres ............................... 390 Noise ................................................... 408 Notes on fitting .................................... 418 Removing ............................................ 425 Replacing ..................................... 418, 422 Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system .................................... 417 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor ing system ............................................ 412 Selection .............................................. 418 Snow chains ........................................ 409 Storing ................................................. 421 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 391 Tyre pressure (Notes) .......................... 409 Tyre pressure loss warning system

(function) ............................................. 417 Tyre pressure monitoring system

(function) .............................................. 411 Tyre pressure table .............................. 410 Unusual handling characteristics ........ 408 U Units of measurement Setting ................................................. 286 Unlocking setting ...................................... 65 USB port ................................................... 113 User profile .............................................. 264 V Vehicle ...................................... 141, 143, 144 Activating/deactivating standby mode ................................................... 168 Additional door lock .............................. 68 Correct use ........................................... 26 Index 547 Damage detection (parking) ................. 167 Data acquisition .................................... 27 Diagnostics connection ......................... 25 Equipment ............................................. 22 Implied warranty ................................... 26 Locking (automatically) ......................... 72 Locking (digital vehicle key sticker) ....... 69 Locking (emergency key) ....................... 72 Locking (from the inside) ....................... 69 Locking (KEYLESS-GO) .......................... 70 Locking (mobile phone) ......................... 69 Lowering ............................................. 426 Parking up ........................................... 167 QR code rescue card ............................. 26 Qualified specialist workshop ................ 25 Raising ................................................ 423 Registration ........................................... 26 Starting (Digital Vehicle Key sticker) .... 142 Starting (emergency operation mode) .................................................. 143 Starting (mobile phone) ....................... 142 Starting (Remote Online) ..................... 144 Starting (start/stop button) ................. 141 Switching off (start/stop button) ........ 160 Towing ................................................. 226 Unlocking (digital vehicle key sticker) .... 69 548 Index Unlocking (from the inside) ................... 69 Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ....................... 70 Unlocking (mobile phone) ...................... 69 Ventilating (convenience opening) ......... 76 Voice commands (LINGUATRONIC) ..... 253 Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT) ............ 150 Roof load ............................................. 440 Vehicle height ...................................... 440 Vehicle length ...................................... 440 Vehicle width ....................................... 440 Wheelbase ........................................... 440 Vehicle data storage Electronic control units ......................... 27 Service providers .................................. 28 Vehicle dimensions ................................. 440 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate EU general operating permit number ... 431 Maximum gross vehicle weight ............ 431 Paint code ........................................... 431 Permissible axle load ........................... 431 VIN ...................................................... 431 Vehicle identification plate see Model series Vehicle interior Cooling or heating (Remote Online) ..... 144 Vision Demisting windows .............................. 137 Voice command types (LINGUA TRONIC) .................................................... 242 Voice control system see LINGUATRONIC Transmitting ........................................ 283 see Warning/indicator lamps Towing eye .......................................... 403 see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Convenience opening ............................ 76 W Warning lamp Warning system Warning triangle Vehicle key see Key Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Vehicle position Vehicle tool kit Ventilating Ventilation see Climate control Vents see Air vents Removing ............................................ 388 Setting up ............................................ 389 Warning/indicator lamp

!ABS warning lamp ....................... 500 JBrake system warning lamp

(red) .................................................... 499 JBrake system warning lamp

(yellow) ................................................ 498

?Coolant warning lamp ................. 509 VIN ............................................................ 431 Engine compartment ........................... 431 Identification plate ............................... 431 Windscreen .......................................... 431 Distance warning warning lamp .. 505

#Electrical fault warning lamp ....... 508

;Engine diagnosis warning lamp ... 508 ESP OFF warning lamp .............. 502 ESP warning lamp flashes ......... 501 ESP warning lamp lights up ....... 501 Fuel reserve warning lamp .......... 508 Power steering system warning lamp .................................................... 507

!Red indicator lamp, electric parking brake applied .......................... 503 6Restraint system warning lamp ... 504 7Seat belt warning lamp flashes ... 505 7Seat belt warning lamp lights up ........................................................ 504 jTrailer hitch warning lamp ........... 506 hTyre pressure monitoring sys tem warning lamp flashes .................... 512 hTyre pressure monitoring sys tem warning lamp lights up .................. 511

!Yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is malfunctioning ......... 503 Warning/indicator lamps ....................... 496 Instrument display (overview) .................. 8 Overview ............................................. 496 PASSENGER AIR BAG ............................. 41 Warranty .................................................... 26 Washer fluid see Windscreen washer fluid Washing by hand (care) .......................... 382 Weather information ............................... 326 Web browser Calling up a web page ......................... 355 Calling up options ............................... 358 Calling up the settings ......................... 358 Deleting a bookmark ........................... 358 Deleting Internet history ...................... 358 Ending ................................................. 359 Managing bookmarks .......................... 358 Overview ............................................. 357 Website Calling up ............................................ 355 Index 549 Wheel change Fitting a new wheel ............................. 425 Lowering the vehicle ........................... 426 Preparation ......................................... 422 Raising the vehicle .............................. 423 Removing a wheel ............................... 425 Removing/fitting hub caps .................. 422 Wheel change see Emergency spare wheel Wheel chock see Chock Wheel rotation ......................................... 421 Wheels Care .................................................... 384 Changing hub caps .............................. 422 Checking ............................................. 408 Checking the tyre pressure (tyre pressure monitoring system) ............... 412 Fitting .................................................. 425 Flat tyre ............................................... 390 Interchanging ....................................... 421 MOExtended tyres ............................... 390 Noise ................................................... 408 Notes on fitting .................................... 418 Mobile phone ....................................... 114 Wireless vehicle components Declaration of conformity ...................... 23 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop 550 Index Removing ............................................ 425 Replacing ..................................... 418, 422 Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system .................................... 417 Restarting the tyre pressure monitor ing system ............................................ 412 Selection .............................................. 418 Snow chains ........................................ 409 Storing ................................................. 421 TIREFIT kit ........................................... 391 Tyre pressure (Notes) .......................... 409 Tyre pressure loss warning system

(function) ............................................. 417 Tyre pressure monitoring system

(function) .............................................. 411 Tyre pressure table .............................. 410 Unusual handling characteristics ........ 408 Windows (Care) ....................................... 384 Windscreen ...................................... 128, 135 Demisting ............................................ 135 Replacing the wiper blades .................. 128 Windscreen see Windscreen Windscreen washer fluid ........................ 439 Notes .................................................. 439 Windscreen washer system Topping up ........................................... 380 Windscreen wipers Activating/deactivating ....................... 127 Replacing the wiper blades .................. 128 Winter operation Winter tyres Snow chains ........................................ 409 Wi-Fi Overview ............................................. 283 Setting ................................................. 284 Setting up a hotspot ............................ 285 Setting up an Internet connection ....... 353 Windowbag ................................................ 37 Windows see Side windows Setting the permanent speed limita tion ...................................................... 182 Wiper blades Care .................................................... 384 Replacing ............................................. 128 Wireless charging Function/notes .................................... 113 Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites:

http://www.mercedes-benz.com http://www.daimler.com Editorial office You are welcome to forward any queries or sug gestions you may have regarding this Owner's Manual to the technical documentation team at the following address:

Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with out written permission from Daimler AG. Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstrasse 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany As at 12.06.17 Digital in the vehicle Familiarise yourself with the con tents of the Owner's Manual directly via the vehicle's multi media system (menu item "Vehi cle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips. Vehicle document wallet Here you can find comprehen sive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form. Digital on the Internet You can find the Owner's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz home page. Digital as an App The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available free-of-charge in familiar App stores. 1775844400Z102 1775844400Z102 Order no. P177 0027 02 Edition NA2018-04a Part no. 177 584 44 00 Z102 Apple iOSAndroidTM

 

 

User Instruction Manual NTG6NQ Infotainment System Model names: NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID and NTG6NQ HIGH2 Brand: Mercedes-Benz Version:

1.1 - english Date:

2022-01-117 Inputs for User Manual NTG6NQ HIGH2 NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID 1 Technical Information 1.1 Materials NTG6NQ infotainment system est em conformidade com os mais recentes lanamentos de directivas RoHS (2002/95/EC) e ELV (2000/53/EC), e tambm o regulamento REACH (CE) No. 1907/2006. Marcao de polmero partes acc. a VDA 260, respectivamente EN ISO 1043.Declaration of Conformity to RED regulation 1.2 Declaration of Conformity to RED regulation 2014/53/EU Declaration of Conformity (DoC) English:

Hereby, Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH declares that the radio equipment type NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet Address: (*1) Bulgarian:

Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH , NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID 2014/53/.

: (*1) Spanish:

Por la presente, Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH declara que el tipo de equipo radioelctrico NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID es conforme con la Directiva 2014/53/UE. El texto completo de la declaracin UE de conformidad est disponible en la direccin Internet siguiente: (*1) Czech:

Tmto Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH prohlauje, e typ rdiovho zazen NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID je v souladu se smrnic 2014/53/EU. pln znn EU prohlen o shod je k dispozici na tto internetov adrese: (*1) Danish:

Hermed erklrer Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH, at radioudstyrstypen NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID er i overensstemmelse med direktiv 2014/53/EU. EU-

overensstemmelseserklringens fulde tekst kan findes p flgende internetadresse: (*1) German:

Hiermit erklrt Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH, dass das Gert mit Funkfunktion NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU entspricht. Der vollstndige Text der EU- Konformittserklrung ist unter der folgenden Internetadresse verfgbar: (*1) Estonian:

Kesolevaga deklareerib Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH, et kesolev raadioseadme tp NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID vastab direktiivi 2014/53/EL nuetele. ELi vastavusdeklaratsiooni tielik tekst on kttesaadav jrgmisel internetiaadressil: (*1) Version 1.1 Inputs for User Manual NTG6NQ HIGH2 NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID Greek:

/ Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH, NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID 2014/53/.

: (*1) French:

Le soussign, Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH, dclare que l'quipement radiolectrique du type NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID est conforme la directive 2014/53/UE. Le texte complet de la dclaration UE de conformit est disponible l'adresse internet suivante: (*1) Croatian:

Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID u skladu s Direktivom 2014/53/EU. Cjeloviti tekst EU izjave o sukladnosti dostupan je na sljedeoj internetskoj adresi: (*1) Italian:

Il fabbricante, Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH, dichiara che il tipo di apparecchiatura radio NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID conforme alla direttiva 2014/53/UE. Il testo completo della dichiarazione di conformit UE disponibile al seguente indirizzo Internet: (*1) Latvian:

Ar o Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH deklar, ka radioiekrta NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID atbilst Direktvai 2014/53/ES. Pilns ES atbilstbas deklarcijas teksts ir pieejams d interneta vietn: (*1) Lithuanian:

A, Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH, patvirtinu, kad radijo rengini tipas NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID atitinka Direktyv 2014/53/ES. Visas ES atitikties deklaracijos tekstas prieinamas iuo interneto adresu: (*1) Hungarian:

Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH igazolja, hogy a NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID tpus rdiberendezs megfelel a 2014/53/EU irnyelvnek. Az EU-megfelelsgi nyilatkozat teljes szvege elrhet a kvetkez internetes cmen: 2014.5.22. L 153/104 Az Eurpai Uni Hivatalos Lapja HU: (*1) Maltese:

B'dan, Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH, niddikjara li dan it-tip ta' tagmir tar-radju NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID huwa konformi mad-Direttiva 2014/53/UE. It-test kollu tad- dikjarazzjoni ta' konformit tal-UE huwa disponibbli f'dan l-indirizz tal-Internet li ej: (*1) Dutch:

Hierbij verklaar ik, Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH, dat het type radioapparatuur NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID conform is met Richtlijn 2014/53/EU. De volledige tekst van de EU- conformiteitsverklaring kan worden geraadpleegd op het volgende internetadres:

(*1) Polish:

Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH niniejszym owiadcza, e typ urzdzenia radiowego NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6N Q ENTRY/MID jest zgodny z dyrektyw 2014/53/UE. Peny tekst deklaracji zgodnoci UE jest dostpny pod nastpujcym adresem internetowym: (*1) Portuguese:

O(a) abaixo assinado(a) Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH declara que o presente tipo de equipamento de rdio NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID est em conformidade com a Diretiva 2014/53/UE. O texto integral da declarao de conformidade est disponvel no seguinte endereo de Internet: (*1) Version 1.1 Inputs for User Manual NTG6NQ HIGH2 NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID Romanian:

Prin prezenta, Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH declar c tipul de echipamente radio NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID este n conformitate cu Directiva 2014/53/UE. Textul integral al declaraiei UE de conformitate este disponibil la urmtoarea adres internet: (*1) Slovak:

Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH tmto vyhlasuje, e rdiov zariadenie typu NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID je v slade so smernicou 2014/53/E. pln E vyhlsenie o zhode je k dispozcii na tejto internetovej adrese: (*1) Slovenian:

Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH potrjuje, da je tip radijske opreme NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID skladen z Direktivo 2014/53/EU. Celotno besedilo izjave EU o skladnosti je na voljo na naslednjem spletnem naslovu: (*1) Finnish:

Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH vakuuttaa, ett radiolaitetyyppi NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID on direktiivin 2014/53/EU mukainen. EU-

vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutuksen tysimittainen teksti on saatavilla seuraavassa internetosoitteessa: (*1) Swedish:

Hrmed frskrar Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH att denna typ av radioutrustning NTG6NQ HIGH2 and NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID verensstmmer med direktiv 2014/53/EU. Den fullstndiga texten till EU-frskran om verensstmmelse finns p fljande webbadress: (*1)

(*1) http://www.harman.com/compliance 1.3 Used Frequency spectrum Bluetooth:

WLAN 2.4:

WLAN 5:

2400-2483,5 MHz 2400 2483.5 MHz 5170-5250 MHz, 5735 5835 MHz 1.4 Maximum radio-frequency power transmitted 2400 2483.5 MHz: 15 dBm 5170-5250 MHz: 15 dBm, 5735 5835 GHz: 15 dBm 1.5 Manufacturer Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH Becker-Goering-Strasse 16 76307 Karlsbad, Germany Version 1.1 Inputs for User Manual NTG6NQ HIGH2 NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID 1.5 FCC/ISED statements (North America) FCC ID: T8GNTG6NQEM & IC: 6434A-NTG6NQEM FCC IC: T8GNTG6NQH2 & IC: 6434A-NTG6NQH2 Modification statement:

The party responsible for the compliance has not approved any changes or modifications to this device by the user. Any changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Le responsable de lhomologation de ce produit napprouve aucune modification apporte lappareil par lutilisateur, quelle quen soit la nature. Tout changement ou modification peuvent annuler le droit dutilisation de lappareil par lutilisateur. Wireless notice:

This device complies with FCC/ISED radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines and RSS102 of the ISED radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This device will be installed into specific carlines, with an antenna configuration that as worst case will be at aminor distance of 8.68 cm from the end user. Le prsent appareil est conforme l'exposition aux radiations FCC / ISED dfinies pour un environnement non contrl et rpond aux directives d'exposition de la frquence de la FCC radiofrquence (RF) et RSS102 de la frquence radio (RF) ISED rgles d'exposition. L'metteur ne doit pas tre colocalis ni fonctionner conjointement avec autre antenne ou autre metteur. Cet appareil sera install dans des carlines spcifiques, avec une configuration d'antenne qui, dans le pire des cas, sera une distance minimale de 8,68 cm de l'utilisateur final. CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B) This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de classe B est conforme la norme canadienne ICES-003. FCC Class B digital device notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Version 1.1 1.6 Mexico declaration:

Modelo: NTG6NQ HIGH2 Modelo: NTG6NQ ENTRY/MID Marca: Mercedes-Benz La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada Version 1.1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Mercedes-Benz #2225 A xxx 900 xx xx et LU STG VST HEADUNIT A-xxxx xx oa mB | l ll ll | ll ll I |

Version: oor XX. Type No: HB Mxxx Exx.x

=e A xxx 901 xx xx HWHU yy / cw Ic: 6434A-NTG6NQEM Date of Manufacture: yyy | mm | dd i THE PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH DHHS RULES 21 CFR Power Supply/#A: 12V === 3,80 SUBCHAPTER J APPLICABLE TO THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE. : ESD EC: XXX FCC ID: T8GNTG6NQEM THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:

(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND

(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION, HARMAN BECKER AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS CRIN: HBMxxxH0000017 Becker-Goring Strasse 16 76307 Karlsbad, Germany Manufactured in Hungary

 

 

Karlsbad, 2021-12-10 HARMAN AUTOMOTIVE DIVISION HARMAN BECKER AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS GMBH BECKER-GOERING-STRASSE 16 76307 KARLSBAD, GERMANY TEL: +49 7248 71 3382 FAX: +49 7248 71 4667 E-MAIL: STEFAN.BLASCHEK@HARMAN.COM Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH | Postfach 2260 | 76303 Karlsbad DEKRA Testing and Certification, S.A.U. Parque Tecnolgico de Andaluca C/ Severo Ochoa 2 & 6 29590 Campanillas Mlaga, Espaa Ref: Agent letter for FCC ID: T8GNTG6NQH2 T8GNTG6NQEM We, hereby authorize Harman Becker Automotive Systems Becker-Goering-str. 16; 76307 Karlsbad, Germany DEKRA Testing and Certification, S.A.U., Parque Tecnolgico de Andaluca C/ Severo Ochoa n 2 29590 Campanillas Malaga Spain Mr. Eduardo Pava Rubio < >

e-mail: eduardo.pavia@dekra.com Phone: +34 952 61 91 25 to act as our agent in the preparation of this application for equipment certification, including the signing of all documents relating to these matters. The present authorization considers the development of documents on behalf of the client, written under his own letterhead and related to the necessary information tobe provided on his behalf to complete the certification process. We also hereby certify that neither we nor any party to this application are subject to a denial of U.S. Federal benefits, which include FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, U.S.C. 862 because of conviction for possession or distribution of controlled substance. For instances where our authorized agent signs the application for certification on our behalf, I acknowledge that all responsibility for complying with the terms and conditions for Certification, as specified by DEKRA Testing and Certification, S.A.U., still resides with us. This agreement expires one year from the current date. Regards i.V. i.V. Stefan Blaschek Regulatory Compliance Management Harman Infotainment Division Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH Becker-Gring-Strae 16 76307 Karlsbad Phone: +49 7248 71 3382 Fax: +49 7248 71 3802 Mobile: +49 172 94 191 49 Email: stefan.blaschek@harman.com Web: www.harman.com Simon Vgele Regulatory Compliance Management Harman Infotainment Division Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH Becker-Gring-Strae 16 76307 Karlsbad Phone: +49 7248 71 3667 Fax: +49 7248 71 3802 Mobile: +49 175 4366188 Email: simon.voegele@harman.com Web: www.harman.com Sitz der Gesellschaft: Karlsbad | Amtsgericht Mannheim: HRB-Nr. 361395 T8GNTG6EM _ FCC Agent letter_signed

 

 

HARMAN AUTOMOTIVE DIVISION HARMAN BECKER AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS GMBH BECKER-GOERING-STRASSE 16 76307 KARLSBAD, GERMANY TEL: +49 7248 71 3667 / 3382 E-MAIL: SIMON.VOEGELE@HARMAN.COM E-MAIL: STEFAN.BLASCHEK@HARMAN.COM Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH | Postfach 2260 | 76303 Karlsbad DEKRA Testing and Certification, S.A.U. Parque Tecnolgico de Andaluca C/ Severo Ochoa 2 & 6 29590 Campanillas Mlaga, Espaa Ref: Confidentiality request for To whom it may concern:

Pursuant to 0.457(d)(1)(ii) and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules (47 C.F.R.) and 552 (b)(4) of the Freedom of Information Act, Harman Becker Automotive Systems hereby request requests that a part of the subject FCC application be held confidential to avoid release of sensitive information of the product to the public. For the product stated above, we request that the following information be withheld from public disclose:

FCC ID: T8GNTG6NQH2 FCC ID: T8GNTG6NQEM Karlsbad, 2021-12-10 Type of Confidentiality Requested Exhibit Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Block Diagrams External Photos Internal Photos Operation Description Parts List & Placement/BOM Schematics Test Setup Photos Users Manual Permanent Confidentiality:

The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful to us and provide unjustified benefits to our competitors. Short-Term Confidentiality:

We hereby request short-term confidentiality for the product stated above to avoid premature release of sensitive information prior to marketing or release of the product to the public. Release date of short term confidentiality is:

45 days from grant date marked 90 days from grant date marked 135 days from grant date marked 180 days from grant date marked Specific date:

We are also aware that we are responsible to notify DEKRA in the event information regarding the product or the product is made available to the public. DEKRA will then release the documents listed above for public disclosure pursuant to FCC Public Notice DA 04-1705. Sincerely, Karlsbad

(Place) 10.12.2021

(Date)

(Signature) Mr. Stefan Blaschek, Regulatory Compliance Expert Mr. Simon Voegele, Regulatory Compliance Expert Karlsbad

(Place) 10.12.2021

(Date)

(Signature) Sitz der Gesellschaft: Karlsbad | Amtsgericht Mannheim: HRB-Nr. 361395 T8GNTG6NQEM FCC Confidentiality Request T8GNTG6NQH2 FCC Confidentiality Request

 

 

HARMAN AUTOMOTIVE DIVISION HARMAN BECKER AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS GMBH BECKER-GOERING-STRASSE 16 76307 KARLSBAD, GERMANY TEL: +49 7248 71 3667 / 3382 E-MAIL: SIMON.VOEGELE@HARMAN.COM E-MAIL: STEFAN.BLASCHEK@HARMAN.COM Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH | Postfach 2260 | 76303 Karlsbad DEKRA Testing and Certification, S.A.U. Parque Tecnolgico de Andaluca C/ Severo Ochoa 2 & 6 29590 Campanillas Mlaga, Espaa Ref: sDoC declaration letter for equipment with Pursuant to 15.101 of the Commissions Rules (47 C.F.R.), HARMAN BECKER AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS GmbH hereby declare that the device above mentioned is classified under the following equipment class/classes:

FCC ID: T8GNTG6NQH2 FCC ID: T8GNTG6NQEM Karlsbad, 2021-12-10 JAB JAD JAV JBP JBC CXX CRR CYY HID Part 15 Class B Digital Device Part 15 Class A Digital Device Other Non-Digital SDoC Devices Part 15 Class B Computing Device/Personal Computer Part 15 Class B Computing Device/Personal Computer Communications Rcvr for use w/ licensed Tx and CBs Superregenerative Receiver Communications Receiver used w/Pt 15 Transmitter Part 15 TV Interface Device And will follow the Authorization procedure Suppliers Declaration of Conformity prior to the initiation of marketing. Sincerely, i.V. Stefan Blaschek Regulatory Compliance Management Harman Infotainment Division Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH Becker-Gring-Strae 16 76307 Karlsbad Phone: +49 7248 71 3382 Fax: +49 7248 71 3802 Mobile: +49 172 94 191 49 Email: stefan.blaschek@harman.com Web: www.harman.com i.V. Simon Vgele Regulatory Compliance Management Harman Infotainment Division Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH Becker-Gring-Strae 16 76307 Karlsbad Phone: +49 7248 71 3667 Fax: +49 7248 71 3802 Mobile: +49 175 4366188 Email: simon.voegele@harman.com Web: www.harman.com Sitz der Gesellschaft: Karlsbad | Amtsgericht Mannheim: HRB-Nr. 361395 ISED Confidentiality request signed